HomeMy WebLinkAbout20-159 Project Manual_SEALED 5-25-22PROJECT MANUAL
PROJECT NO. OAA-2020-159
New Culver's Restaurant
Carmel, Indiana
County of Hamilton
OLLMANN ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS, P.C.
200 South State Street
Belvidere, Illinois 61008
815-544-7790 Phone
PROJECT MANUAL
PROJECT NO. OAA – 2020-159
NEW CULVER’S RESTAURANT
431 E Carmel Drive
Carmel, Indiana
A SINGLE CONTRACT FOR:
GENERAL WORK
PLUMBING WORK
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
HVAC WORK
ELECTRICAL WORK
OLLMANN ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS, P.C.
200 SOUTH STATE STREET
BELVIDERE, ILLINOIS 61008
May 25, 2022
OAA-2020-159 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
SECTION 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
000101 TITLE PAGE .............................................................................................................000101 – 1
000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS .......................................................................................000110 – 1-2
000111 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE.................................000111 - 1
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
GENERAL CONDITIONS - AIA A201...............................................................................1-40
007300 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS....................................................................007300 – 1-20
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
012300 ALTERNATES ..........................................................................................................012300 – 1
013300 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................013300 – 1-2
015001 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................015001 – 1-5
DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS
NOT USED
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ..........................................................................033000 – 1-10
DIVISION 4 MASONRY
042000 UNIT MASONRY ................................................................................................042000 – 1-11
047300 MANUFACTURED STONE AND BRICK VENEER ..........................................047300 – 1-7
DIVISION 5 METALS
051200 STEEL CONSTRUCTIONS...................................................................................051200 – 1-4
053100 STEEL DECKING ..................................................................................................053100 – 1-3
055000 METAL FABRICATIONS ....................................................................................055000 – 1-7
DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES
061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY .........................................................................................061000 – 1-6
061753 FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES.........................................................................061753 – 1-2
062000 FINISH CARPENTRY ...........................................................................................062000 – 1-6
DIVISION 7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
072100 BUILDING INSULATION ....................................................................................072100 – 1-4
072400 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM .................................................072400 – 1-7
075419 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM ...................................................................................075419 – 1-10
076113 METAL ROOFING...............................................................................................076113 – 1-10
076200 SHEET METAL WORK ........................................................................................076200 – 1-8
079200 JOINT SEALANTS ................................................................................................079200 – 1-4
DIVISION 8 OPENINGS
081113 HOLLOW METAL WORK ...................................................................................081113 – 1-5
081513 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS .............................................................081513 – 1-3
084113 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS ............................................................084113 – 1-7
000110-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
087100 FINISH HARDWARE ...........................................................................................087100 – 1-4
088000 GLAZING ..............................................................................................................088000 – 1-8
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
092116 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS ..............................................................................092116 – 1-6
093013 CERAMIC TILE ..........................................................................................093013 – 1-4
095113 LAY-IN CEILINGS ...............................................................................................095113 – 1-3
096518 HYBRID CARPET .................................................................................................096518 – 1-4
096724 RESINOUS FLOORING .......................................................................................096724 – 1-8
097200 VINYL WALL COVERING ..................................................................................097200 – 1-3
099000 PAINTING ............................................................................................................099000 – 1-6
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
102111 STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS .......................................................102111 – 1-4
104400 FIRE EXTINGUISHER SPECIALTIES ................................................................104400 – 1-2
DIVISIONS 11 - 21
NOT USED
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING
220000 PLUMBING ............................................................................................................220000 – 1-5
DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING
230000 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING...................................230000 – 1-6
233113 DUCTWORK..........................................................................................................233113 – 1-3
DIVISIONS 24 & 25
NOT USED
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
260000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS.............................................................260000 – 1-4
260010 GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS & SERVICE............................................260010 – 1-3
265000 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION ..............................................265000 – 1-5
DIVISIONS 27 - 30
NOT USED
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK
312000 EARTHWORK .......................................................................................................312000 – 1-8
312319 DEWATERING ......................................................................................................312319 – 1-2
313116 TERMITE CONTROL ...........................................................................................313116 – 1-2
DIVISION 32 - 49
NOT USED
END 000110.
OAA-2020-159 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE 000111-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
SECTION 000111 – OWNERSHIP AND USE OF INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
1.01.DEFINITIONS
A. INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE: Instruments of service are representations, in any medium of
expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by
the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements.
Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings,
specifications, and other similar materials.
1.02.OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER
INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
A. The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their
respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all
common law, statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. Entities other than the
Architect shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution
to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to
be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s reserved rights.
B. Entities other than the Architect are authorized to reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to
them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization
shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. Entities other than the
Architect may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project
outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Architect.
1.03.TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM
A. Instruments of Service shall not be transmitted in digital form without the specific written consent of
the Architect.
END 000111.
OAA-2020-159 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
SECTION 007300 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Referring to page 1 of AIA Document A201-2007 the following identifications are made:
1.Project:As indicated on the Title Block of the Drawings.
2.Owner:As indicated on the Title Block of the Drawings.
3.Architect:Ollmann Associates Architects, P.C.
200 South State Street
Belvidere, Illinois 61008.
1.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.The standard American Institute of Architects (AIA) Document A201, “General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction,” 2007 Edition, attached hereto, shall apply in full except for such
modifications and supplementary conditions specified in this Specification Section 007300.
B.Section 1.1.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
1.1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to all technical specifications, Divisions 2
through 50.
1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
A.Revise the second sentence of Paragraph 1.1.1 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change
Order, (3) a written order or supplemental drawing for a minor change in the Work issued by the
Architect or Engineer.”
B.In Paragraph 1.1.2 of the General Conditions, everywhere the word “Architect” occurs revise it to
read “Architect or Engineer”.
C.Add the following phrase to the last sentence of Paragraph 1.1.2 of the General Conditions:
“… as defined in the Owner Architect Agreement.”
D.Section 1.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
1.1.9 Where the word “building,” “project” or “work” occurs, it shall be construed as
applying to all portions of the Work.
1.1.10 The term “General Work” shall mean the portion of the Work other than Mechanical and
Electrical Work.
1.1.11 The term “Mechanical Work” shall refer to any Fire Protection, Plumbing, and Heating,
Ventilating or Air Conditioning Work described by the Fire Protection, Plumbing and
Mechanical Drawings and/or Divisions 21, 22 and 23 of the Specifications and includes
like work specified in Division 1.
1.1.12 The term “Electrical Work” shall mean the Integrated Automation, Electrical,
Communications, and Electronic Safety and Security Work described by the Integrated
Automation, Electrical, Communications, and Electronic Safety and Security Drawings
and/or Divisions 25, 26, 27 and 28 of the Specifications and includes like work specified
in Division 1.
1.1.13 The term “General Contractor” shall mean the Contractor as defined in Article 3. The
terms “General Contractor,” “Fire Protection Contractor,” “Heating/Ventilation/Air
Conditioning Contractor,” “Electrical Contractor,” etc., may appear in the Construction
Documents to help identify responsibilities associated with their respective segments of
the Work.
007300-2 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.1.14 The term “Engineer” shall mean an engineering professional or entity employed by the
Architect, General Contractor or Owner, except as stated or clearly implied otherwise.
1.1.15 The term “provide” shall mean “furnish and install in place” except as stated otherwise.
1.1.16 The term “equal” shall mean equal in accordance with the determination of the Architect
or Engineer, except as clearly indicated otherwise.
1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.Paragraph 1.2.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
1.2.1.1 Ambiguity or conflict in description of quality or quantity shall be resolved in favor of
the better quality or greater quantity.
1.2.1.2 The Contractor shall provide all work and materials which any Section or part of the
Drawings, Specifications or Conditions require him to provide regardless of whether
such requirement is or is not faithfully repeated in other parts of documents thereof to
which the provision might be appropriate.
1.2.1.3 In all cases where a device, material, unit, or part of equipment is referred to as singular
in number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are
required to complete the work referenced.
1.2.1.4 As is the custom, persons and entities appearing in the Contract Documents may be
referred to as though masculine in gender, irrespective of actual gender. When the
context so requires, the masculine gender includes the female and/or neuter, and a
singular number includes the plural as does the plural the singular.
1.2.1.5 Where a Specifications Section contains a “Work Includes” list, the list shall merely
serve as a table of contents for items described in the Section and does not necessarily
set the limits of work required.
1.2.1.6 Where a material is listed only by description, ASTM, or Fed. Spec. numbers, any
product meeting or exceeding requirements of such specification will be acceptable if
material does not alter details shown on Drawings. If requested by Architect or
Engineer, evidence shall be furnished showing that material meets requirements of the
Specifications.
B.Paragraph 1.2.3 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
1.2.3.1 Acronyms and abbreviations that have well known technical or construction industry
meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized
meanings.
1.2.3.2 Where reference is made to a standard of a government, manufacturers' association or
professional society, the pertinent sections of the latest edition (as of the time of
bidding) of the referenced standard shall apply, unless otherwise specified, and shall
have the same force and effect as if set forth in full.
1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER
INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE
A.Delete Sections 1.5 and 1.6 of the General Conditions and refer to Specification Section 000111
“Ownership and Use of Instruments of Service”.
2.1 GENERAL (ARTICLE 2 - OWNER)
A.In the third sentence of Paragraph 2.1.1 of the General Conditions delete the following phrase:
“Except as otherwise provided in Paragraph 4.2.1,”
OAA-2020-159 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
A.Delete the third sentence of Section 2.4 of the General Conditions.
B.Section 2.4 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
2.4.1 The reasonable cost to be deducted for correcting such deficiencies may also include
costs for testing, engineering, accounting, consulting services and attorneys’ fees and
expenses.
2.4.2 The Owner’s actions pursuant to this paragraph shall not operate as a release of any
obligation of a Surety upon its Performance and Payment Bonds.
3.1 GENERAL (ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR)
A.In the first sentence of Paragraph 3.1.3 of the General Conditions revise as follows:
Delete the phrase “in the Architect’s” and replace with “or Engineer in the…”.
3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
A.Revise Paragraph 3.2.1 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
3.2.1 By executing the Agreement, the Contractor represents that he has visited the site and
has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local
conditions, including those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage
of materials, availability of labor, water, electric power, roads, the character, quality and
quantity of surface and sub-surface materials to be encountered, the character of
equipment and facilities needed prior to and during the prosecution of the work and all
other matters which can in any way affect the work or the cost thereof under this
Contract. Any failure by the Contractor to acquaint himself with all the available
information concerning these conditions will not relieve him from any obligation with
respect to his Contract.
B.Revise the second sentence Paragraph 3.2.2 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor
and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions or inconsistencies in the Contract
Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect and Engineer any errors,
inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for
information.”
C.Revise Paragraph 3.2.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with
applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public
authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect and Engineer any nonconformity
discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information.”
D.In Paragraph 3.2.4 of the General Conditions, everywhere the word “Architect” occurs revise it to
read “Architect or Engineer”.
E.Paragraph 3.2.4 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following to the
last sentence:
“…, unless the Contractor recognized or should have recognized such error, inconsistency, omission
or difference and failed to report it to the Architect, Engineer and Owner.”
F.Section 3.2 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
3.2.5 The Contractor shall advise the Architect and Engineer of any condition in the Contract
Documents that might affect a product’s warranty.
3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
A.Revise Paragraph 3.4.2 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
007300-4 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
“Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect or Engineer in
accordance with Paragraph 3.12.8 or Section 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with
the consent of the Owner, after evaluation and in accordance with a Change Order.”
B.Subparagraph 3.4.2 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
3.4.2.1 After award of the Contract, substitutions initiated by the Contractor will not be
considered except under one or more of the following conditions:
.1 Required for compliance with subsequent interpretation of code requirements or
insurance regulations.
.2 Unavailability of specified products, through no fault of the Contractor.
.3 Subsequent information discloses inability of specified products to perform properly
or to fit in designated space.
.4 When it is clearly seen, in the judgment of the Architect, Engineer or Owner, that a
substitution would be substantially to the Owner’s best interests, in terms of cost,
time or other considerations.
3.4.2.2 By submitting a substitution, Contractor assumes responsibility for any changes or
modifications required in the construction directly related to the substitution as well as
in any other items of work affected by such substitution, including warranties,
irrespective of acceptance of the substitution.
3.4.2.3 Where materials are listed by manufacturer and trade name/model number with no
qualifying statement, Contractor shall provide the product/material indicated. Where
listed product/material is followed by a phrase allowing equal or comparable materials
of other manufacturers, products/materials complying with or exceeding the
specifications for the named item, as appropriate to the intended use, may be submitted
for approval.
C.Paragraph 3.4.3 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
3.4.3.1 It shall be the duty of the Contractor to enforce among all workers directly or indirectly
employed by him, all rules that Owner may establish for conduct of workers on
premises.
D.Section 3.4 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
3.4.4 Quality of Materials: Unless specifically called for otherwise, all equipment, materials
and articles incorporated in the Work are to be of the best grade of their respective kinds
for the purpose.
3.4.5 Domestic vs. Foreign Sources of Materials: In order that ready availability of
materials, parts, or components for repair, replacement or expansion may be assured, all
materials, parts and components shall be obtained where feasible from sources which
maintain a regular domestic stock. Foreign produced materials and components shall be
used only with Owner’s prior written approval.
3.4.6 Acceptance of Materials: Within 30 days after award of Contract and prior to ordering
material and equipment, Contractor shall submit in quadruplicate to Owner a listing of
which manufacturers and materials the Contractor intends to incorporate into the Work.
When requested, he shall also submit related performance capacities, samples and other
pertinent information. Machinery or equipment, materials and articles installed or used
without such review shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection.
3.4.7 Quality of Workmanship: Unless specifically called for otherwise, all workmanship
incorporated in the Work is to be of the best grade appropriate to its kind for the
purpose.
3.4.8 Work shall be performed by trained experienced personnel, skilled in their various
crafts, under supervision of an approved foreman.
OAA-2020-159 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.4.9 Anchors and/or Fasteners: Anchoring of any component by way of fibrous braid, plastic
or other non-metallic expansion shields will not be permitted.
3.5 WARRANTY
A.In the first sentence of Section 3.5 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “and Architect”.
B.Revise the last sentence of Section 3.5 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“If requested, by the Architect, Engineer or Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence
as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.”
3.6 TAXES
A.Section 3.6 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
3.6.1 Contractor shall also pay unemployment and social security taxes as well as other taxes
imposed by local, city, state or federal government. If the tax laws are subsequently
amended by legislation during the term of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide the
net change caused by such amendment.
3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS
A.Revise Paragraph 3.7.4 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site
that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially
from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of
an unusual nature, that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and
generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for
in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner,
Architect and Engineer before conditions are further disturbed.
3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
A.The first sentence of Paragraph 3.9.1 of the General Conditions is revised to read as follows:
“The Contractor shall employ a competent Superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in
attendance as required at the Project Site until all punch list items have been accepted by the Owner.”
B.Paragraph 3.9.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
3.9.1.1 The Superintendent employed shall be subject to the Owner’s approval. Upon Owner’s
request, Contractor shall submit for review a written summary of the Superintendent’s
experience and qualifications.
C.Paragraph 3.9.2 of the General Conditions shall be revised to read as follows:
3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in
writing to the Owner, if requested by the Owner, the name and qualifications of a
proposed superintendent. The Owner may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in
writing stating (1) whether the Owner has reasonable objection to the proposed
superintendent or (2) that the Owner requires additional time to review. Failure of the
Owner to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable
objection.
D.In the first sentence of Paragraph 3.9.3 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “or Architect”.
3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.In the first sentence of Paragraph 3.10.1 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “and
Architect”.
007300-6 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B.Paragraph 3.10.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
3.10.1.1 Upon award of the Contract, the General Contractor shall develop a horizontal bar type
Construction Schedule for the work and make copies for Owner and Subcontractors.
3.10.1.2 The Construction Schedule shall be determined following consultation with the General
Contractor and Owner’s Contractors under Separate Contract and their estimates of time
required to complete their Work.
C.Delete Paragraph 3.10.2 of the General Conditions.
D.In Paragraph 3.10.3 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “and Architect”.
3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
A.Revise the last sentence of Section 3.11 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“These shall be available to the Owner, in addition to any additional documents required to be on the
site by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and shall be delivered to the Owner upon completion of
the Work as a record to the Work as constructed.”
B.Section 3.11 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
3.11.1 Only Drawings, Specifications and Submittals reflecting the latest changes shall be used
at the site to construct the Work.
3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
A.Revise the last two sentences of Paragraph 3.12.4 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the reviewer
without action.”
B.Revise Paragraph 3.12.5 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents and approve Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with
reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of
the Owner or of separate contractors.
C.In Paragraph 3.12.6 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “and Architect”.
D.In Paragraph 3.12.7 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “by the Architect”.
E.Revise Paragraph 3.12.8 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be
relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the
approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has
specifically informed the Owner, Architect and Engineer in writing of such deviation at the time of
submittal and (1) the Owner, Architect or Engineer has given written approval to the specific
deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order has been issued authorizing the
deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect’s or Engineer’s review
thereof.”
F.In the first sentence of Paragraph 3.12.9 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “by the
Architect”.
G.In the last sentence of Paragraph 3.12.9 of the General Conditions, delete the word “Architect’s”.
H.In the fifth sentence of Paragraph 3.12.10 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “to the
Architect”.
I.In the seventh sentence of Paragraph 3.12.10 of the General Conditions, delete the word “Architect”
and insert the word “reviewer”.
OAA-2020-159 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-7
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
J.Section 3.12 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
3.12.11 Only Shop Drawings that have been reviewed by General Contractor shall be used at the
job site and all copies shall bear the stamp of the General Contractor.
3.18 INDEMNIFICATION
A.In the first sentence of Paragraph 3.18.1 of General Conditions, after the phrase “Architect’s
consultants,” add the word “Engineer,”.
B.Section 3.18 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
3.18.3 None of the foregoing provisions shall deprive the Owner, the Architect or the Engineer
of any action, right or remedy otherwise available to them or either of them at common
law.
3.18.4 In the event that any party is requested but refuses to honor the indemnity obligations
hereunder, then the party indemnifying shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the
cost of bringing any such action, including attorneys’ fees, to the party requesting
indemnity.
4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
A.Delete Paragraph 4.2.1.
B.In Paragraph 4.2.2 of General Conditions, delete the first two sentences.
C.In Paragraph 4.2.3 of General Conditions, delete the first sentence.
D.In Paragraph 4.2.4 of General Conditions, delete the first sentence.
E.Delete Paragraph 4.2.5.
F.In Paragraph 4.2.6 of General Conditions, revise the first sentence to read as follows:
“Regardless whether or not the Architect has been retained to perform Construction Administration
functions, the Architect has the authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract
Documents.”
G.In Paragraph 4.2.7 of General Conditions, revise the first two sentences to read as follows:
“If any submittals are reviewed by the Architect, the Architect will review and take appropriate
action upon the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and other
similar submittals, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be
taken with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time, in the Architect’s professional
judgement, to permit adequate review.”
H.Delete Paragraphs 4.2.8, 4.2.9 and 4.2.10 of the General Conditions.
I.In Paragraph 4.2.11 of General Conditions, in the first sentence delete the phrase “performance
under, the”.
J.In Paragraph 4.2.13 of General Conditions, after the word “Architect’s” add the phrase “or
Owner’s”.
5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE
WORK
A.Revise Paragraph 5.2.1 of General Conditions, to read as follows:
“The Contractor, as soon as practicable after the award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the
Owner the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment
fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Owner may
reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner has a reasonable
objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) that the Owner requires
007300-8 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
additional time for review. Failure of the Owner to reply within the 14 days period shall constitute
notice of no reasonable objection.”
B.In Paragraph 5.2.2 of General Conditions, delete the phrase “or Architect”.
C.In Paragraph 5.2.3 of General Conditions, in the first sentence delete the phrase “or Architect” both
times it occurs.
D.In Paragraph 5.2.4 of General Conditions, delete the phrase “or Architect”.
6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
A.In Paragraph 6.2.2 of General Conditions, delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”.
B.Subparagraph 6.2.2 of the General Conditions is supplemented as follows:
6.2.2.1 Each contractor shall perform work in proper sequence in relation to that of other
contractors. Mechanical contractors and electrical contractors shall fit their conduit,
piping and ductwork into the structure as job conditions may demand. Final decision as
to right-of-way and run of pipes, ducts, etc., is reserved by the Owner.
6.2.2.2 Each contractor shall cooperate in every way possible to allow for installation of
equipment provided by Owner or his Equipment Contractors during the course of
construction.
6.2.2.3 Each contractor and subcontractor shall obtain complete data at site and inspect surfaces
that are to receive his work before proceeding with his work; shall be solely responsible
for accuracy of measurements and laying out of work; shall correct errors or defects due
to faulty measurements taken, information obtained, layout, or due to failure to report
discrepancies. Work of previous contracts found to be unacceptable to receive work of
this contract shall be reported to the Owner by contractors finding such conditions prior
to beginning of their work.
6.2.2.4 Each contractor shall give due notice and proper information to other contractors of any
special provisions necessary for the placing and setting of his work coming in contact
with work of other contractors. Failing to do so in proper time, he shall be held
responsible and shall pay for any and all alterations and repairs necessitated by such
neglect.
6.2.2.5 Any contractor who installs work improperly coordinated with other trades, either by
way of installing work at the wrong time or the wrong items of work or work in the
wrong location, shall, at his own expense, do all cutting, fitting, patching, repairing or
replacement required to make his work conform to the intent of the design as shown and
specified.
6.2.2.6 Each contractor shall furnish all lintels, thimbles, sleeves, hangers, etc., required for his
work and not indicated to be furnished under another subcontract. Such items shall be
installed in a manner and at such times as will not delay or interfere with any other
building operations.
6.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
A.Revise Section 6.3 of General Conditions, to read as follows:
“If a dispute arises among the Contractor and separate contractors as to the responsibility under their
respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and
rubbish, the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost among these responsible.”
7.1 GENERAL (CHANGES IN THE WORK)
A.In Paragraph 7.1.1 of General Conditions, delete the phrase “Construction Change Directive”.
B.Revise Paragraph 7.1.2 of General Conditions, to read as follows:
OAA-2020-159 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-9
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
“A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner and the General Contractor.”
C.In Paragraph 7.1.3 of General Conditions, delete the phrase “Construction Change Directive”.
7.2 CHANGE ORDERS
A.Revise Paragraph 7.2.1 of General Conditions, to read as follows:
“A Change Order is a written instrument signed by the Owner and the General Contractor stating
their agreement upon all of the following:…”
B.Section 7.2 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
7.2.2 No contractor shall have the right to prosecute or maintain either an arbitration
proceeding or a suit-at-law to recover for an extra, unless his claim is based upon a
written Change Order signed by the Owner.
7.2.3 In addition to information required by the General Conditions, Change Orders shall
include itemized breakdowns of labor hours and wages and of materials as well as
itemized costs of related accessories, rentals and special services separated out from
other costs. Breakdowns shall be organized according to Subcontractors, sub-
subcontractors, material suppliers and Contractor.
7.2.4 The combined total of profit and overhead shall be limited to the percentage as
stipulated in the Owner Contractor Agreement. Overhead shall include the markup
related to a contractor’s indirect expenses such as main office operations, field office
activities, tools and minor equipment, depreciation, as-built drawings, personnel
transport, delay costs, bond premiums and liability insurance. Overhead is not to
include what are frequently called “general conditions” items such as rented sheds,
rented operating equipment, scaffolding, toilets, snow removal, waste removal, cleaning,
permits, fees, surveying, temporary constructions, temporary enclosures, protection, and
temporary heat, power and ventilation.
7.2.5 Charges for field supervision time shall not be allowed as an added expense unless the
Change Order includes an extension of the Contract Time.
7.2.6 Charges for delivery of materials shall not be allowed as an added expense unless the
quantity of additional material items exceeds one-half truck load.
7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
A.Delete Section 7.3 of the General Conditions.
7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.Revise Section 7.4 of General Conditions, to read as follows:
“The Architect and Engineer have the authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving
adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension in the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the
intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes will be effected by written order or Supplemental
Drawing from the Architect or Engineer and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.”
8.1 DEFINITIONS
A.Revise Paragraph 8.1.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date determined by the Owner and General
Contractor.
8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
A.Paragraph 8.2.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented as follows:
007300-10 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
8.2.1.1 It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between Contractor and Owner, that
the date for beginning construction, rate of progress and time for completion of the work
of the Contract are essential conditions of the Contract.
8.2.1.2 Work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently and uninterruptedly at such rate of
progress as will ensure the substantial completion of the work within the required
completion times except as otherwise established in the Contract.
8.2.1.3 Additional costs due to payment of overtime rates shall be deemed to have been
included in the Contract Sum and may not be submitted to Owner for additional
payment except by prior written agreement.
8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
A.Revise Paragraph 8.3.1 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work
by an act or neglect of the Owner, Architect or Engineer, or of an employee of either, or
of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or by changes ordered in the Work; or
by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other
causes beyond the Contractor’s control; or by delay authorized by the Owner pending
mediation and arbitration; or by other causes that the Owner determines may justify
delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable
time as the Owner may determine.
9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.In Section 9.2 of the General Conditions, delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”
each time it occurs.
B.Section 9.2 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
9.2.1 Allowances and bond charges shall appear separately in the schedule.
9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.In the first sentence of Paragraph 9.3.1 of the General Conditions, delete the word “Architect” and
insert the word “Owner”.
B.In the last sentence of Paragraph 9.3.1 of the General Conditions, delete the phrase “or Architect”.
C.Delete subparagraph 9.3.1.1 of the General Conditions.
D.Subparagraph 9.3.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
9.3.1.3 As soon as possible, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner an estimated draw
schedule for each month, based upon the date established for completion of the project.
9.3.1.4 Contractor’s itemized labor and material breakdown shall be submitted to the Owner on
Schedule of Contract Amount forms, or other form as Owner may agree to, for review
and approval prior to submission of first periodic estimate for payment.
9.3.1.5 Payment requests shall be submitted in triplicate.
9.3.1.6 Beginning with the first payment request and with each subsequent payment request, the
Contractor shall submit 3 notarized waivers of lien for the full amount of the payment
request being submitted. Beginning with the second payment request, the Contractor
shall submit 3 notarized waivers of lien from each subcontractor/supplier for whom
payment was requested in the previous payment request. These waivers must be
received by the Owner in order for subsequent payment to be released.
E.Revise Subparagraph 9.3.2 to read as follows:
OAA-2020-159 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-11
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on
account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for
subsequent incorporation in the Work. Payment for materials and equipment stored on
the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures
satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment
or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable
insurance.
F.Revise the second sentence of Paragraph 9.3.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for
which Payments have been previously received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s
knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or
encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or
entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, material and equipment relating to the
Work.”
G.Paragraph 9.3.3 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
9.3.3.1 All material and work paid for by partial payments shall thereupon become the sole
property of the Owner; but this provision shall not be construed as relieving the
Contractor from the sole responsibility for the care and protection of materials and work
upon which payments have been made nor the restoration of damaged work, nor as a
waiver of the right of the Owner to require the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract.
9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
A.Delete Section 9.4 of the General Conditions.
9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD PAYMENT
A.Revise Paragraph 9.5.1 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“The Owner may withhold a Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to
protect the Owner, if the Work has not progressed to the point indicated or that the Work is not in
accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner will notify the General Contractor in writing,
within seven (7) days of receipt of Application for Payment, the Owner’s reasons for withholding
Payment in whole or in part as provided in Paragraph 9.5.1. If the General Contractor and the Owner
can not agree on a revised amount, the Owner will promptly issue a Payment for the amount for
which the Owner believes represents the quantity of Work completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents. The Owner may also withhold a Payment or, because of subsequently
discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Payment previously issued, to such extent
as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible,
including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of…”
B.In Paragraph 9.5.2 of the General Conditions delete the word “certification” and insert the word
“payment” each place it occurs.
C.Revise Paragraph 9.5.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“If the Owner withholds Payment under 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks
to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the
Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably
delivered.”
9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A.Delete Paragraphs 9.6.1, 9.6.2 and 9.6.3 of the General Conditions.
B.Paragraph 9.6.4 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
007300-12 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
9.6.4.1 Should the Owner fail to approve an Application for Payment for a cause the Owner
determines is the fault of the Contractor and not the fault of a particular subcontractor,
the Owner may pay such subcontractor directly; and such payment shall not be deemed
to create any contractual relationship between the Owner and any subcontractor or to
create any rights in the subcontractor against the Owner.
C.Delete Paragraph 9.6.5 of the General Conditions.
D.In Paragraph 9.6.6 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “Certificate for Payment, a”.
9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT
A.Revise the first sentence of Section 9.7 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
If the Owner does not pay the Contractor, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven (7) days
after the date established in the Contract Documents the justified amount of Application of Payment
or amount awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional
days’ written notice to the Owner, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been
received.
9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.Revise the first sentence of Paragraph 9.8.2 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to
accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner a
comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.”
B.In the first sentence of Paragraph 9.8.3 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and
insert the word “Owner”.
C.Revise the second sentence of Paragraph 9.8.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“If the Owner’s inspection discloses an item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which
is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can
occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall,
before agreement on a date of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon
notification by the Owner.”
D.In the last sentence of Paragraph 9.8.3 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and
insert the word “Owner”.
E.Revise Paragraph 9.8.4 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Owner and General
Contractor shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the
Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance,
and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list. Warranties
required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the
Work or designated portion thereof.”
F.Paragraph 9.8.4 of the General Conditions is modified and supplemented by the following:
9.8.4.1 When the date of Substantial Completion is set, a time shall be fixed, not to exceed
thirty (30) days, within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the final punch list.
G.Revise the first sentence of Paragraph 9.8.5 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“The Owner and General Contractor shall provide written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned
to them when the date of Substantial Completion was set for the Work or a designated portion
thereof.”
OAA-2020-159 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-13
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
A.In the third sentence of Paragraph 9.9.1 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and
insert the word “Owner”.
B.In the last sentence of Paragraph 9.9.1 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “or, if no
agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect”.
C.Paragraph 9.9.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
9.9.1.1 In addition to all other precautions required by the Contract, such as barricades, signs,
warning lights, etc., to make the Work completely safe for public use, the Contractor
shall provide and maintain dust-tight barriers to segregate areas occupied before
Substantial Completion. Cost of barriers shall be paid by Contractor if Work is behind
schedule and by Owner if Work is ahead of schedule.
9.9.1.2 The Owner moving equipment into areas of the Work will not constitute partial
occupancy.
D.In Paragraph 9.9.1 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “Owner, Contractor and Architect”
and insert the phrase “Owner and Contractor”.
9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
A.Delete Paragraph 9.10.1 of the General Conditions.
B.In the first sentence of Paragraph 9.10.2 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and
insert the word “Owner”.
C.Revise Paragraph 9.10.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through
no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, the Owner
shall, upon application by the Contractor, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the
balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for
the Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract
Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the
balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the Owner prior to such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and
conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.”
D.Section 9.10 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
9.10.6 The final payment will be made, including retained percentages, within 45 days after
final acceptance of Work, provided that the following conditions have been met:
.1 All punch lists are satisfactorily completed.
.2 All required record drawings, SDS forms (delivered directly to Owner),
warranties and guarantees are provided.
9.10.7 The Contractor and each of his Subcontractors shall keep an accurate, legible, certified
record of all payrolls during his project and for three (3) years after acceptance of the
work performed, and shall make said records available at any time to the Owner, if so
requested. Such copies of payrolls shall be accompanied by proof satisfactory to the
Owner that all bills for materials supplied have been duly paid and by such other data as
the Owner may require. The Contractor shall not carry on his payroll employees of a
subcontractor, but such employees must be carried on the payroll of the employing
subcontractor.
10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
A.Subparagraph 10.2.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following
Clauses:
007300-14 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
.4 Contractor shall, likewise, protect property the Owner requires to be temporarily
stored in the areas of the Work, including furniture and furnishings delivered
under separate contracts let by the Owner under Section 6.1.
.5 Contractor shall, likewise, protect the Owner's property in the areas of the Work,
including furnishings, equipment and sundries, except items designated for
disposal.
B.In the last sentence of Paragraph 10.2.6 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “and Architect”.
C.Subparagraph 10.2.8 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
10.2.8.1 Whenever any employee, agent or other representative of Contractor or any
Subcontractor, whose activities on or about the site arise out of the Work, shall cause or
be a factor in causing any damage (including, but not limited to, breaking, burning,
overheating, freezing, exposing, disconnecting, misconnecting, failing to guard or
protect, and depriving of support) to the work, materials or property of a third party
(including but not limited to the Owner, other contractors, subcontractors, material
suppliers, delivery persons, frequenters, security holders, adjacent land owners, bodies
politic, utilities, or members of the public), such Contractor or Subcontractor shall
promptly proceed to remedy and correct such damage and to pay all costs, expenses, and
damages involved. To the extent that such Contractor or Subcontractor shall fail to do
so, he shall be accountable to the Owner, under his contract with the Owner, for all
damages directly or consequential arising therefrom, whether liquidated or not, and
whether certain or contingent, including, but not limited to costs of renovation, repair,
replacement or relocation, vicarious liabilities, losses by delays, charges for architectural
or other services, and extra costs, charges, work or materials of every description.
.1 Upon determination of the identity of the responsible parties and of the extent of
such damage so caused, Owner shall be entitled for its security, to withhold or
deduct from payments otherwise due such contractor any sum reasonably
estimated to be required to secure Owner's right to such account, until Owner
shall otherwise be fully indemnified and made whole.
.2 Such liability to account shall be deemed contractual, and shall arise regardless of
whether or not circumstances of conventional tort are present or proven, and shall
bind the sureties and indemnitors of such Contractor or Subcontractor, but
.3 the Owner shall not be deemed to have waived, released, settled, or otherwise
impaired its right to full account by reason of any payment, withholding,
deduction, failure to withhold or deduct, or other form of claim or failure to
claim; and in no event shall exercise or non-exercise of the Owner's right be
deemed or implied to impose on the Owner any liability toward any other person;
or to affect, except as expressly provided, the rights or liabilities of any of the
parties arising independently of this provision.
10.2.8.2 Whenever the contractor or subcontractors whose activities cause any such damage
cannot be specifically ascertained, or whenever the proportionate responsibility to
account for the damage according to the foregoing provisions cannot be finally
determined, the party to whose work the damage pertains shall proceed promptly to
remedy and correct such damage as extra work. The reasonable charges for such extra
work, together with the amounts of any further damages that may so arise, shall be
agreed upon by the Owner and the Contractor. If agreement cannot be reached,
Contractor may submit this issue to arbitration.
.1 The Owner may charge the aggregate sum to the respective accounts of all
contractors who, directly or through subcontractors, material suppliers, or
delivery persons were engaged in any activity at the site of the damage when it
arose, in proportion to the gross amounts of their respective contracts.
OAA-2020-159 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-15
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
.2 Such allocated accountability shall continue as security to the Owner until a
different accountability is ascertained or until Owner is otherwise fully
indemnified and made whole.
10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A.In the second sentence of Paragraph 10.3.2 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “and
Architect”.
B.Revise the third and fourth sentences of Paragraph 10.3.2 of the General Conditions to read as
follows:
“The Contractor will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not he has reasonable
objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner. If the Contractor has an objection to a person
or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor has no
reasonable objection.”
11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE
A.Subparagraph 11.1.2 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
11.1.2.1 During the term of the Contract, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, purchase and
maintain the specified insurance in companies properly licensed and satisfactory to
Owner, and in amounts satisfactory to the Owner:
11.1.2.1.1 Workmen’s Compensation including Occupational Disease and Employer’s
Liability Insurance:
.1 State / Federal:Statutory amounts and coverage as required by Workmen’s
Compensation Laws.
.2 Employer’s Liability:
Amount for each accident
Amount for disease, policy limit
Amount for disease, each employee
For the above listed categories, provide insurance in amounts as directed by Owner
but not less than that required by State and Federal Law.
11.1.2.1.2 Commercial General Liability: Include coverage for Premises-Operations, Independent
Contractors’ Protective, Products-Completed Operations, Contractual Liability, Personal
Injury and Broad Form Property Damage (including coverage for Explosion, Collapse
and Underground hazards), shall be as follows:
.1 The limits shall be:
Amount for each occurrence
Amount for general aggregate
Amount for personal and advertising injury
Amount for products - completed operations aggregate
For the above listed categories, provide insurance in amounts as directed by Owner.
.2 The policy shall be endorsed to have General Aggregate apply to this Project only.
.3 The Contractual Liability insurance shall include coverage sufficient to meet the
obligations in AIA Document A201 under Section 3.18.
a.The insurance obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph shall not
extend to the liability of the Architect, his agents or employees arising out of
(1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys,
Change Orders, designs or specifications, or (2) the giving of or the failure to
give directions or instructions by the Architect, his agents or employees
provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or
damage.
007300-16 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
b.This insurance shall be for the same limits stated for the Contractor’s other
liability insurance.
.4 Products and Completed Operations insurance shall be maintained for a minimum
period of at least one (1) year, unless otherwise directed by the Owner, after the
expiration of the period for correction of the Work.
11.1.2.1.3 Automobile Liability Insurance: Include coverage (owned, non-owned, leased and hired
vehicles) for bodily injury and property damage - with limits not less than those stated
below:
Amount for each accident
Provide above listed insurance in the amount as directed by Owner.
11.1.2.1.4 Umbrella or Excess Liability: with no more restrictions than primary policies.
Amount over primary insurance
Provide above listed insurance in the amount as directed by Owner.
11.1.2.1.5 Contractor shall carry sufficient comprehensive insurance on his equipment at site of
Work and en route to and from site to fully protect him; Contractor shall require same
coverage of his subcontractors. It is expressly understood and agreed that Owner and/or
Architect shall have no responsibility therefor.
11.1.2.2 If this insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy form, the
certificates shall be ACORD Form 25, completed and supplemented in accordance with
AIA Document G715, Instruction Sheet and Supplemental Attachment for ACORD
Certificate of Insurance Form 25; and all certificates and policies shall indicate that the
carrying company will not cancel without giving the Owner notice in writing thirty (30)
days prior to date cancellation is to become effective.
11.1.2.3 Contractor shall protect himself by requiring his subcontractors to maintain workmen’s
compensation insurance and insurance of the same kind in amounts specified above.
B.The second sentence of Paragraph 11.1.3 of the General Conditions is revised as follows:
These certificates and the insurance policies required by Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that
coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled, changed or allowed to expire until at
least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner.
11.3 PROPERTY (BUILDER'S RISK) INSURANCE
A.The first sentence of Paragraph 11.3.1 of the General Conditions is revised as follows:
The Contractor shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do
business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s
risk “all risk” or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of
subsequent Contract Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising
total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles.
B.Paragraph 11.3.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following at the
end of the paragraph:
If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to purchase and maintain such insurance
without so notifying the Owner in writing, the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs attributable
thereto.
C.Delete Subparagraph 11.3.1.2.
D.Modify Subparagraph 11.3.1.3 to read as follows:
11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered
because of such deductibles.
OAA-2020-159 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-17
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
E.Add Subparagraphs 11.3.1.6 and 11.3.1.7:
11.3.1.6 A copy of the insurance certificate for this coverage will be furnished to the Owner upon
purchase of the policy by the Contractor. Any additional details about the policy’s
provisions will be promptly furnished by the Contractor upon written request.
11.3.1.7 At the Contractor’s option and expense, he may carry insurance not included under
Property Insurance for coverage on equipment and materials that are in his possession
for this project. See Article REPLACEMENT OF BROKEN GLASS in Specifications
Section 015001 “Special Requirements”.
F.Delete Paragraphs 11.3.4 and 11.3.5.
G.The first sentence of Paragraph 11.3.6 of the General Conditions is revised as follows:
Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Contractor shall file with the Owner a copy of each policy
that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3.
H.The last sentence of Paragraph 11.3.6 of the General Conditions is revised as follows:
Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and
that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the
Owner.
I.Delete Paragraph 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION and insert the following:
11.3.7 Neither the Owner nor its insurance company waive any rights of subrogation.
J.The first sentence of Paragraph 11.3.8 of the General Conditions is revised as follows:
“A loss insured under this property insurance shall be adjusted by the Contractor as fiduciary and
made payable to the Contractor as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to
requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Paragraph 11.1.10.”
K.The first sentence of Paragraph 11.3.9 of the General Conditions is revised as follows:
“If required in writing by a party in interest, the Contractor as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an
insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Contractor’s duties.”
L.The third sentence of Paragraph 11.3.9 of the General Conditions is revised as follows:
“The Contractor shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Contractor shall
distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as determined in
accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the
Owner and Contractor.”
M.Revise Paragraph 11.3.10 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
11.3.10 The Contractor as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers
unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after
occurrence of loss to the Contractor’s exercise of this power; if such objection is made,
the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the
method of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. If the Owner and Contractor
have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Contractor as
fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or, in the case of a dispute over distribution
of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the direction of the arbitrators.”
11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
A.Delete Paragraph 11.4.1 of the General Conditions and replace with the following:
11.4.1 If required by Owner, Contractor shall furnish through a surety company both
Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds each in the amount not less than the
full amount of his Contract as security for the duration of the Contract and for 12 months
after date of acceptance of the Work.
007300-18 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B.Paragraph 11.4.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
11.4.1.1 Premium for bonds shall be paid for by Contractor. Surety Company shall use the
American Institute of Architects Form A-312. The surety company must have a Best
rating of “B” or better, must be licensed to do business in the state in which the project
resides and must be acceptable to Owner. The bond form shall incorporate by reference
all the Contract Documents as defined in the General Conditions.
11.4.1.2 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on
behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.
12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
A.In Paragraph 12.1.1 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect’s” and insert the word
“Owner’s” and delete the word “Architect” and insert the word “Owner”.
B.In Paragraph 12.1.2 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and insert the word
“Owner”.
12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
A.In the first sentence of Paragraph 12.2.1 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and
insert the word “Owner”.
B.Paragraph 12.2.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
12.2.1.1 Approval of any material or work at any stage of construction will not prevent its
subsequent rejection for cause.
12.2.1.2 No election by the Owner to correct work shall constitute a waiver of any obligation of a
surety upon its Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds.
C.In the last sentence of Subparagraph 12.2.2.1 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “or
Architect”.
13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A.In the third sentence of Paragraph 13.5.1 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and
insert the word “Owner”.
B.Paragraph 13.5.1 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
13.5.1.1 The testing and inspection agencies will be hired by the Owner except as specified
otherwise in the Contract Documents.
13.5.1.2 The Contractor shall prepare a testing schedule indicating the types of tests required by
the Contract Documents and the times at which the tests need to be performed so as not
to delay the Work. The Contractor shall update the schedule as necessary and shall
deliver copies to the Owner, Architect and the testing/inspection agencies.
13.5.1.3 The Contractor shall cooperate with testing/inspection agencies in all regards.
C.Revise Paragraph 13.5.2 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“If the Design Professional of Record , Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine
that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under
Paragraph 13.5.1, the Design Professional of Record will, upon written authorization from the
Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or
approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the
Design Professional of Record and Owner of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so
that the Design Professional of Record and Owner may be present for such procedures. Such costs,
except as provided in Paragraph 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense.”
D.In Paragraph 13.5.4 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and insert the word
“Owner”.
OAA-2020-159 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300-19
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
E.In Paragraph 13.5.5 of the General Conditions delete the word “Architect” and insert the word
“Owner”.
13.8 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY
A.The General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following sub-article 3.8:
13.8 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY
13.8.1 Policies of Employment to be Maintained by Contractor
13.8.1.1 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall comply with all applicable provisions of all
federal and state laws which prohibit discrimination in employment on the basis of race,
color, religion, sex, marital status, national origin, ancestry, age, and physical or mental
handicap and all rules and regulation promulgated and adopted pursuant thereto. Such
action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading,
demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates
of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including
apprenticeship.
13.8.1.2 The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and
applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination.
13.8.1.3 The Contractor and all subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for
employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applications will
receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, marital
status, national origin, ancestry, age, and physical or mental handicap.
14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
B.Revise Subparagraph 14.1.1.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
14.1.1.3 Because the Owner has not made payment within the time stated in the Contract
Documents, and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding payment as
provided in Paragraph 9.5.1; or
C.In Paragraph 14.1.3 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “and Architect”.
D.In Paragraph 14.1.4 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “and the Architect”.
15.0 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
A.In the first sentence of Paragraph 15.1.2 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “with a copy
sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker.”
B.Revise the last sentence of Paragraph 15.1.3 of the General Conditions to read as follows:
“Change Orders shall be prepared and Payments shall be issued in accordance with the decisions of
the Initial Decision Maker.”
C.Paragraph 15.1.3 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
15.1.3.1 Nothing in the requirements of this Paragraph shall require the Owner to pay to the
Contractor any sum for work that is under a disputed Claim that has yet to be resolved,
until final resolution of the disputed Claim.
D.Paragraph 15.1.4 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
15.1.4.1 Should the Contractor believe he has been delayed or damaged by another contractor
hired by the Owner for work not in the Contractor’s Contract, the Contractor shall, as an
intended third party beneficiary of all other prime contracts, have the right to maintain
legal action against such other contractors, but shall not have the right to maintain legal
action against the Owner except when the Owner is the proximate cause of the claim.
E.Revise the first and second sentences of Paragraph 15.2.1 to read as follows:
007300-20 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
“Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3 and 10.4, shall be referred to the Initial
Decision Maker for initial decision. The identity of the Initial Decision Maker shall be indicated in
the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, and shall not be the Architect unless
previously agreed to between Owner and Architect.”
F.Paragraph 15.2.4 of the General Conditions is supplemented by the addition of the following:
15.2.4.1 Failure to comply with the Initial Decision Maker’s requests, as stated, shall be
considered a waiver of the Claim.
G.In the second sentence of Paragraph 15.2.5 of the General Conditions delete the phrase “Architect, if
the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker,” and insert “and the Design Professional(s)
of Record”.
END 007300.
OAA-2020-159 ALTERNATES 012300-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.02.DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the
bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to
accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the
products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract
Documents.
1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.
2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum
to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
1.03.PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of
the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate the costs of related coordination, revision or adjustment to
related Work affected by alternate.
2. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of
alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of
the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later
consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
2. PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
3. EXECUTION
3.01.SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1: Omit steel mesh reinforcement for slabs-on-grade from Base Bid. Provide in its
place, fiber reinforcement for slabs-on-grade.
END 012300.
OAA-2020-159 SUBMITTALS 013300-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS
1.GENERAL
A.Contractor shall:
1.Review each submittal.
a.Verify field dimensions.
b.Verify compliance with Contract Documents.
2.Stamp submittals, certifying his review.
3.When requested and/or required, transmit reviewed submittals to Architect and Culver
Franchising System, LLC (CFS) by way of the agreed transmittal form.
2.SUBMITTALS SPECIFIED IN CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
A.The Contractor shall submit to the Owner all of the items required to be submitted under the Conditions
of Contract, as supplemented, including, but not necessarily limited to:
1.Certificates of Insurance.
2.Performance Bond and Payment Bond, if any.
3.Schedule of Values.
4.Name of safety officer (if not superintendent).
5.Partial & Final Waivers.
3.SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A.Architect’s Review of Submittals:
1.Submittals that have been requested on the drawings, and others as required by any authority
having jurisdiction, when received reviewed and stamped by General Contractor, will be reviewed by
the Architect, marked with revisions or corrections required (if any), and returned to General
Contractor.
2.Submitted items that have not been requested will be returned but may be considered
informational and not reviewed; should the Architect review and provide comment(s), General
Contractor shall comply with Architect’s review comments. Lack of submittal request and review by
the Architect does not in any way approve deviations from the contract documents.
B.Shop Drawings of fabricated work shall be prepared by the fabricator and submitted to the General
Contractor for review. All Shop Drawings shall bear verification of Subcontractor’s review and approval
prior to submittal. No work shall be fabricated by order of the Subcontractor, save at his own risk, until
review of Shop Drawings has been completed by the General Contractor, and Architect where required.
C.Submit shop drawings as electronic submittals prepared by fabricator and submitted through Contractor
to Architect for review. Shop Drawings shall bear verification of Contractor’s review and approval prior
to submittal. Architect will return annotated file. General Contractor shall annotate and retain one copy
of file as an electronic Project record document file.
D.Components Designed by Professional Engineer: Shop drawings, design calculations, and similar items
that require the professional seal of the designer shall be submitted both electronically and as “hard
copies”. For “hard copies” submit four (4) “wet sealed” copies / prints, unless another amount is
specified. All submittals shall be prepared by designer and submitted through Contractor to Architect
for review.
E.Submit product data as electronic submittal except for charts or brochures indicating color, texture,
pattern, finish or other characteristics of materials that cannot be accurately transmitted electronically.
013300-2 SUBMITTALS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
Submit, for Architect’s review, five (5) paper submittals of such charts or brochures. Architect will retain
two copies.
F.SDS (Safety Data Sheets) submitted with Product Data will be considered as product information only
and will not be accepted as being part of the SDS submittal requirements for O&M manuals.
G.Corrections or changes indicated on Shop Drawings and Product Data shall not be considered as an order
for extra work.
H.No Shop Drawing or Product Data will be considered reviewed unless it bears stamp and signature of
the General Contractor, and Architect if so reviewed.
4.OPERATION & MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS
A.At termination of work, the General Contractor shall submit to the Owner two (2) copies of an operation
and maintenance manual presenting full details of care, maintenance and operation of mechanical
equipment and other operable equipment of every nature. Manuals shall include such things as:
1.Manufacturer’s instructions for care.
2.Spare parts lists and sources of supply.
3.Wiring diagrams.
4.Control diagrams, etc.
B.For temperature control equipment, manuals shall contain narrative of the control cycle for the control
equipment as well as descriptive diagrams.
C.Include a section pertaining to door hardware, which shall contain the final approved Hardware Schedule,
Key Schedule and installation instruction sheets.
D.The O&M manuals shall be compiled into 3–ring binders for submission to the Owner.
5.SAFETY DATA SHEETS
A.Should any material be installed in the Work for which a Safety and Data Sheet (SDS) is required to be
retained by the Owner under State regulations, the installing subcontractor shall submit applicable forms
to the General Contractor for submission to the Owner upon completion of the Project.
B.Two (2) SDS forms shall be submitted for each item. Only official OSHA SDS forms shall be used;
copies will not be accepted.
C.The General Contractor shall compile the forms and bind them into the O&M manual submitted to the
Owner.
6.GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A.The Contractor shall compile two (2) copies of all guarantees and warranties and bind them into the
O&M Manuals.
7.RECORD DRAWINGS
A.At completion of work and prior to final payment, General Contractor shall provide Owner with complete,
accurate, clean and legible record drawings made from a complete set of marked up Contract Drawings
kept at the site, showing changes made to the Work during the course of the Contract.
B.The General Contractor shall verify completeness of record drawings before submission.
END 013300.
OAA-2020-159 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 015001-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 015001 - SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
1.JOB CONDITIONS & OPERATIONS
A.The Contractor and each subcontractor and material supplier shall inform himself of the conditions
relating to execution of his work. Neglect of this requirement will not be accepted as cause for
additional payment and/or additional time for completion.
B.Each manufactured article, material and item of equipment shall be applied, installed, connected,
erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by its manufacturer unless specified to the contrary.
C.All on-site welding shall conform to the requirements and techniques of Factory Mutual Engineering
Division.
D.General Contractor shall enforce all rules that Owner may establish for conduct of workers on premises
including the use of radios and like devices.
E.No permanent structures shall be loaded with materials or equipment or otherwise loaded so as to invite
damage.
F.Contractor shall be responsible for providing dust control for exterior excavating and grading work, in
accordance with appropriate codes and ordinances, for the duration of the project construction work.
2.GRADES, LINES & LEVELS
A.General Contractor shall take measurements at site as required for the work and to locate existing
utilities. General Contractor shall contact the city, the county, the Owner and all utility companies to
carefully review all records of exposed, concealed and buried points of connections, as to location,
size, type, depth, operating characteristics, etc.
B.General Contractor shall lay out the construction and establish all lines and levels for the work as
required by the Drawings and Specifications. General Contractor shall maintain proper base lines,
levels, and benchmarks outside and inside the building, where necessary, for the use of all trades.
C.General Contractor shall provide services of a registered surveyor to establish permanent benchmarks,
to check lines and elevations and to check locations of anchor bolts and similar devices.
D.Each trade shall lay out and establish all other lines and levels necessary for its work.
3.PROJECT MEETINGS
A.General Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and coordinating project meetings to be held at
times designated by Owner’s representative. Subcontractors, when requested, must attend these
meetings.
B.If the principal of a firm does not attend a project meeting, the person selected to represent the firm
must be authorized to bind the company to a decision at the meeting.
4.USE OF SITE
A.Space limitations: No areas outside construction limits may be used for any purpose by contractors or
subcontractors.
B.Contractors shall confine equipment, storage of materials, parking and operations of workmen to the
limits indicated by Owner. Site storage space shall be confined to area of site.
C.No signs will be permitted on the site, except for signs identifying architect’s, engineers’, contractors’
and Owner’s names, signs related to the processes necessary to accomplish the Work, signs for
protection of persons and property, signs required by law and signs otherwise approved by Owner.
015001-2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
5.MATERIALS DELIVERY & STORAGE
A.Store, place and handle the material and equipment delivered to job site so as to preclude inclusion of
foreign substances or causing of discoloration therein. Pile neatly and compactly; barricade to protect
public from injury. Protect materials as required to prevent damage from weather or the ground. Any
temporary storage facilities required on-site shall be stormproof and raised above the ground.
B.Owner assumes no responsibility for materials stored in building or on site. General Contractor
assumes full responsibility for damage due to storage of materials.
6.CLEANING
A.General Cleaning: The General Contractor shall remove loose rubbish and debris from the building
site promptly as it accumulates. The General Contractor shall perform an overall cleanup of the entire
site as frequently as required, but not less frequently than each Friday afternoon.
B.All dumpsters used on project site shall be covered with lids or tarps securely fastened to prevent
debris from blowing away.
C.Final Cleaning: General Contractor shall see to it that finished surfaces are clean and free of foreign
matter upon completion of the work.
1.Pavings shall be swept clean. Glossy surfaces and stainless steel shall be polished. Equipment
shall be free of spots and soil.
2.Drains, exterior and interior, shall be maintained clear of foreign matter.
3.Immediately prior to Owner occupying the project, General Contractor shall have all glass
cleaned by a professional window washing concern. Work shall include removal of labels, paint
spattering, excess glazing sealant, etc. Surfaces shall include mirrors, both sides of glass in
windows, and doors. Mirrors shall NOT be cleaned with ammoniated products.
4.Upon completion of the work, the General Contractor and each subcontractor shall remove and
dispose of all equipment and unused materials provided for his work.
5.After all outside clean-up work has been completed, interior clean-up shall be completed as
follows:
a.Subcontractor for plumbing work shall wash and leave fixtures free of stains and all
piping, etc., free of dust.
b.Subcontractor for heating work shall replace all filters with new filters if units have been
used for temporary heating or cooling during construction; and clean all motors.
c.Subcontractor for electrical work shall wash and clean all plates on switches and
receptacles, light fixtures, etc., and shall vacuum clean insides of panels, etc.
d.The General Contractor shall, after the above work has been done, completely vacuum all
floors and walls, dust and clean all cabinet and wall materials as well as exposed wood,
and then shall clean all glass and scrub and clean all floors.
7.PROTECTION
A.The General Contractor shall:
1.Provide and maintain barricades, warning signs, planking, and guard lights as necessary for
protection of stored materials, curbs, sidewalks, streets and drives, the public, vendors, the
Owner’s employees and the new constructions.
2.Use caution at all times to protect persons against injury resulting from job operations,
equipment and materials moving onto and off the site, and standing equipment.
3.Provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing for existing underground utilities, sewer, etc.,
encountered during excavation work, to protect them from collapse or other type of damage
OAA-2020-159 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 015001-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
until such time as they are to be removed, incorporated into work for new construction, or can be
properly backfilled.
4.Provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing as required to prevent earth from caving or
washing into excavation, and/or undermining existing structures until such time as they are to be
removed, incorporated into work for new construction, or can be properly backfilled.
5.Protect existing trees, shrubs, lawns and landscape work from damage, (except those indicated to
be removed or altered) by providing guards and covering and maintaining plank covering over
newly installed utility services, etc., to prevent damage by trucking or otherwise, including areas
outside of grading and/or construction limits. Repair or replace existing vegetation and
landscaping indicated to remain that has been damaged by construction activities.
6.Provide protection against rain, snow, wind, ice, storms, or heat so as to maintain work,
materials, apparatus and fixtures free from injury or damage. At end of each day’s work new
work likely to be damaged shall be covered. Snow and ice shall be removed as necessary for
safe and proper execution of work.
7.Protect building from damage at all times from rain water, ground water, backing up of drains or
sewers, and other water, by providing enclosures, pumps and other equipment of sufficient
capacity and configuration.
8.Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply
with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil
contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
9.Notify, in writing, the owners of property which interfere with work and arrange with them for
disposition of such property.
B.Any contractor or subcontractor causing damage to any of the Work of the Contract or site shall have,
at his own expense, the damaged work replaced or repaired to its original condition. Property damaged
outside of Owner’s property line shall be repaired in accordance with requirements of its owner or the
authority having jurisdiction.
C.Temporary Weather Closures:
1.General Contractor shall protect openings in exterior building enclosure with temporary
weatherproof closures to exclude damage from inclement weather and to retain interior heated
and/or air conditioned air. Suitable provision shall be made for air passage to permit proper
drying out of building. General Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to the
construction or its contents due to the insufficiency of such protection.
2.Closures in designated emergency exits shall have plywood or other solid doors equipped with
exit devices and exit signs as required by Code for the actual occupancy existing during the
work.
D.Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of
construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and
similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
8.TEMPORARY HEAT & VENTILATION
A.The General Contractor shall provide and maintain heat and ventilation in enclosed construction areas
throughout construction period as required to facilitate curing and drying of completed installations or
to protect installed constructions from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Maintain
an even temperature of at least 50°F for use of all trades. The General Contractor will be held
responsible for damage to all materials and work due to improper heat and ventilation.
B. Use of gasoline-burning or other fuel oil fired space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type
heating units is prohibited.
015001-4 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
C.Heating devices shall be smokeless units approved by Fire Marshall and Factory Mutual (FM) or
Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Each fuel burning heating unit shall be properly vented through
temporary ducts as required to dissipate noxious fumes and prevent discoloration of building materials.
Propane fueled heating units shall only be used as approved in writing by Owner. Each heating unit
shall be provided with the normal safety devices to prevent injury to building and workmen.
D.Costs of energy consumed for temporary heating shall be assumed by the General Contractor.
E.Temporary heaters shall not be placed so close to permanent constructions as to discolor surfaces or
cause materials to be over-dried.
F.The permanent heating system shall not be used until dust-creating operations and painting are
complete. Then, upon Owner's written approval for use of permanent heating system, General
Contractor shall pay for all maintenance, and attendance required for operation of the permanent
heating system up to the time of Substantial Completion. The permanent heating system shall not be
operated without filters. Filters shall have a minimum MERV of 11.
G.When the building is ready to be accepted by the Owner, the contractor for heating and ventilating
work shall leave the heating system clean and in like-new condition, with new filters fitted throughout.
H.Guarantee period for the permanent heating and ventilating systems shall not begin until Substantial
Completion of total project.
I.The General Contractor shall remove all temporary heating and ventilating equipment upon conclusion
of its use.
9.TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A.The General Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary electric power service from public utility
sources for general power and light as required for site security and carrying on the work of all trades.
Power service shall be at least 400 amps, single phase, 120/240 volts.
B.Cost of current used shall be paid by Contractor, direct to the utility company.
C.In addition to lighting required for security and for safe access around the areas of construction, the
General Contractor shall provide an average illumination of at least 15 foot-candles on surfaces being
constructed except that where exposed finishes are being installed, the average illumination provided
shall be at least 30 foot-candles of WHITE LIGHT.
D.All temporary service wiring and equipment shall be installed and maintained in accordance with rules
of the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and the local electrical utility company.
E.Remove temporary electrical facilities as rapidly as allowed by the installation of the permanent
electrical work.
F.Use of the permanent electrical system will be permitted for construction purposes. However, any use
of the permanent electrical system before the project is accepted by the Owner, shall be subject to the
approval of the Owner; and the Contractor shall replace all burned out bulbs, tubes or any other
damaged elements, fixtures, receptacles, etc., and turn the entire electrical system over to the Owner
whole and undamaged.
10.CONSTRUCTION WATER
A.The General Contractor, at his own expense, shall provide connections and extensions of services as
required for drinking and construction operations. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a
condition acceptable to Owner. Before final acceptance, temporary connections and piping shall be
removed and the source of supply restored to its original or better condition.
11.CONSTRUCTION TOILETS
A.Permanent toilets shall not be used for construction toilet facilities.
OAA-2020-159 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 015001-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B.The General Contractor shall furnish temporary hand wash and toilet facilities for the use of all
personnel engaged on the Work. Commercially serviced portable chemical units shall be used unless
approved otherwise. Quantity shall be sufficient for the maximum number of workers engaged for any
particular day.
C.Toilet facilities shall be serviced at least twice weekly, including emptying of tanks, recharging of
germicidal and deodorizing solutions, and scrubbing entire interior with a germicidal solution.
12.TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A.During construction period, the General Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate fire protection
per the requirements of jurisdictional authorities, for the construction site. The General Contractor
shall also provide and maintain fire extinguishers and fire watches per the requirements of the Owner’s
facilities insurance company.
B.Similarly, the General Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate fire protection for his temporary
offices. In addition, each contractor who maintains an enclosed shed or trailer on the site for storage of
materials, or workshop, or for the convenience of workmen, or office space, shall provide and maintain
fire protection in each shed and trailer.
13.REPLACEMENT OF BROKEN GLASS
A.The General Contractor will be held responsible for glass that is damaged, broken or scratched due to
the Work of this Contract and at completion of Contract shall replace such glass without charge to
Owner.
B.It shall be the General Contractor’s prerogative to charge cost of replaced glass to the party
responsible. The Work shall be turned over to the Owner with glazing complete and in perfect
condition.
14.INCIDENTAL CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.All cutting and patching shall be closely coordinated and superintended by the General Contractor.
B.Holes required by any contractor to be cut through completed construction shall be cut and patched by
that contractor, except as directed otherwise by General Contractor.
C.Patching of cut surfaces shall be done by the subcontractor who did the cutting except as directed
otherwise by the General Contractor, using mechanics accomplished in the kind of work being patched.
Repairing and refinishing of disturbed surfaces shall use materials and workmanship conforming to
that of the original work, according to industry standards and the standards for similar work on the
Project.
1.Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable.
D.Do not cut and patch construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-
carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
E.Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting
and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
END 015001.
OAA-2020-159 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Formwork.
2.Steel bar reinforcement.
3.Steel mesh reinforcement for slabs-on-grade (base bid).
4.Fiber reinforcement for slabs-on-grade (where offered as an alternate).
5.Concrete foundation walls and footings.
6.Reinforced interior slabs-on-grade.
7.Under-slab vapor retarder.
8.Floor screed in cooler and freezer rooms.
9.Exterior entrance platform foundations and platform slabs.
10.Embedded items, such as sleeves, anchors, ties, etc., including items furnished by other trades
for embedment.
11.Preparation of concrete foundation surfaces to receive insulation.
12.Setting and filling pipe guards (bollards).
13.Concrete splashblocks.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Furnishing of anchor bolts for wood sill plates ........................................Section 055000.
2.Furnishing of pipe for bollards .................................................................Section 055000.
3.Perimeter insulation on foundation walls .................................................Section 072100.
4.Ceramic tile flooring.................................................................................Section 093013.
5.Resinous flooring......................................................................................Section 096724.
6.Fill under slabs and backfill......................................................................Section 312000.
7.Concrete pavings and curbs......................................................................See Civil Drawings.
8.Concrete for site utilities constructions ....................................................See Civil Drawings.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Cooperate with other trades regarding installation of embedded items. Obtain templates, dimension,
instructions, etc., from other trades or other contractors as required for setting items in concrete work.
B.The Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform concrete inspections and tests as
hereinafter specified.
C.Comply with the latest edition of each of the following:
1.“Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary” (ACI 318)
2.“Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete” (ASTM C 94)
3.“Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction” (ACI 302.1)
4.“Specification for Hot Weather Concreting” (ACI 305.1)
5.“Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting” (ACI 306.1)
6.“Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete” (ACI 304R)
7.“Specifications for Structural Concrete” (ACI 301)
D.Inform personnel that may be working with concrete as to requirements and the availability of ACI
301.
E.Provide protection during the construction period for all floor slabs, from oil, grease, stains,
discoloration and other physical damage.
033000-2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A.Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings pertaining to fabrication, bending and placement of concrete
reinforcements.
1.Comply with the ACI 315 “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete
Structures.”
2.Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangements of concrete reinforcement.
Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures.
C.Test Reports: Submit 3 copies of laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design tests
including potential for alkali-silica reaction (ASR).
D.Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on fiber reinforcement (if used), additives, curing agents,
sealers, grouts, joint materials and similar pre-manufactured products.
E.Certificates: Submit purchase receipt verifying grade and quantity of under-slab vapor retarder.
F.Concrete Truck Delivery Tickets: Submit delivery tickets indicating:
1.Delivery date and time dispatched
2.Name and location of project
3.Name of Contractor
4.Name of ready-mixed concrete producer
5.Truck number
6.Number of cubic yards of concrete in load
7.Class of concrete
8.Cement content in bags per cubic yard of concrete
9.Type and brand name of cement
10.Names and quantities of admixtures used
11.Maximum size of aggregate
12.Amount of water added at job, if any, and who authorized the addition.
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.FORM MATERIALS
A.Form Facings for Unexposed Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.
B.Form Coatings: Commercial formulation intended for form coating which will not bond with, stain,
or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and which will not impair bond or adhesion of subsequent
treatments nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compound.
C.Form Ties: Configured so as to leave no metal closer than 1" to the surface of the concrete.
2.02.REINFORCEMENT
A.Materials:
1.Bars: Deformed new billet steel meeting ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
2.Tie Wire: Cold drawn steel wire meeting ASTM A 1064.
3.Reinforcement Fiber (if used): 100% virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers, MD Graded, with a
specific gravity of 0.91, containing no reprocessed olefin, meeting ASTM C 1116 requirements
for Type III, Performance Level I (I5), with a residual strength of 50 psi when tested on 4
beams from a single batch. Subject to requirements, provide one of the following:
a.“Fibermesh” by Propex Concrete Systems, Corporation.
b.“Nycom” by Nycom Corp.
OAA-2020-159 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
4.Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
5.Reinforcing Bar Holders: Galvanized or plastic coated when within 3/4" of exposed concrete
surface.
B.Fabrication: Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice”.
1.No lapped splices for tension and compression bars unless noted on the Drawings or approved.
Locate splices in temperature bars so that no more than half the bars are spliced at any point.
Splices shall be lapped distances as indicated on Drawings.
2.Label bars to identify grade of steel and to facilitate placing.
C.Storage: Store reinforcing steel on supports above ground.
2.03.CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.General: No unspecified cementitious materials or admixtures shall be allowed unless indicated by
local conditions, and then only if approved by Architect prior to acceptance of mix design.
B.Cementitious Materials:
1.Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I for normal and Type III for high-early-strength.
2.Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C based on mix design requirements. Fly ash shall be
limited to no more than 25% of the total quantity of cementitious materials in all service
conditions.
C.Mixing Water: Fresh, free of oil, acid, alkalis, salts, organic matter and potable.
D.Aggregates: Per ASTM C 33, including freedom from potentially reactive constituents, as well as
soft, thin elongated or laminated pieces, disintegrated stone, plant matter, trash and lumps of frozen or
partly cemented material.
1.ASR Tested: Per ASTM C 1260. Submit test results.
2.Fine Aggregate: Natural hard, clean sand.
3.Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed rock.
a.Size 57 (1-1/2" top size) for structural elements 6" or more in thickness.
b.Size 67 (3/4" top size) for slabs less than 6” in thickness and all other concrete.
4.Furnish 3 copies of testing laboratory reports showing sieve analysis.
E.Admixtures:
1.Air-Entraining Admixture: Per ASTM C 260. Use one of the following:
a.“Darex AEA” by W.R. Grace
b.“Sika AER” by Sika Corporation.
c.“MasterAir VR 10” Master Builders Solutions by BASF.
2.Water-Reducing Admixtures: Per ASTM C 494; one of the following:
a.“MasterPozzolith Series” Master Builders Solutions by BASF.
b.“Plastocrete Series” by Sika Corporation.
c.“WRDA Series” by W.R. Grace
3.Calcium Chloride: Shall NOT be used. Neither calcium chloride nor admixtures containing
chloride salts shall be added to concrete.
2.04.ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.Sheet Vapor Retarder:
033000-4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B.ASTM E 1745, Class A, minimum thickness of 10 mils, with a maximum permeance of 0.03 perms.
Include manufacturer's recommended pressure-sensitive tape. Provide one of the following or
approved comparable product:
1.“Stego Wrap Class A Vapor Retarder” by Stego Industries LLC.
2.“Perminator (10 mil)” by W.R. Meadows.
C.Curing Materials:
1.Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq.
yd., conforming to AASHO M 182, Class 3.
2.Moisture-Retaining Cover: Waterproof paper, polyethylene film or polyethylene coated burlap
conforming to ASTM C 171.
3.Curing Compound: Liquid, membrane forming compound conforming to ASTM C 309, Type
1, with fugitive dye, and guaranteed to not affect the bond, adhesion or effectiveness of floor
hardeners or other applied finishes or surface treatments. Product shall be one of the following:
a. “MasterKure CC 180 WB” Master Builders Solutions by BASF.
b. “CS-309” by W.R. Meadows
c. “Resi Chem Clear Cure” by Symons Corp. (Dayton Superior)
d.“Dress and Seal WB by L&M Construction Chemicals.
D.Non-Shrink Grout: For setting dowel bars and where noted.
1.Pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout having a minimum compressive
strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. Use one of the following:
a.“Masterflow 713” Master Builder Solutions by BASF.
b.“Five Star Grout” by Five Star Products, Inc.
c.“588-10K Grout” by W.R. Meadows
d.“L & M Duragrout” by Laticrete International, Inc.
E.Joint Fillers:
1.Provide preformed joint filler and sealant at all concrete floor slab joints.
2.Provide closed cell thermosetting polyurethane joint filler with removable strip on top edge that
forms a reservoir, 1/2 inch deep from slab surface, for sealant. Material shall act as bond
breaker for sealant. Water absorption of material shall not exceed 0.5% volume per ASTM D
1622. Provide “Flat Rod” by Nomaco EFS (Engineered Foam Solutions), “Deck-O-Foam” by
W.R. Meadows, or approved comparable product.
3.Fill top 1/2 inch of joint with a polyurethane based sealant, complying with ASTM C 920,
Type M (multicomponent), Grade P (pourable), Class 25 (plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability), Uses T (traffic) and NT (non-traffic), of W.R. Meadows, W.R. Grace &
Co., or Master Builders Solutions by BASF. Where joints extend vertically, provide non-sag
sealant of same type.
2.05.PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A.Concrete Mixes shall be designed by an independent testing facility experienced in concrete mix
design and acceptable to Owner for preparation of proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not
be the same used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to Owner.
B.Allow a minimum of 14 days prior to placing concrete for testing laboratory to design the mix for
each type of concrete required.
C.The adequacy of the design mix shall be verified by tests on a minimum of 6 cylinders; 3 tested at
least 7 days and 3 at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C 192 and C 39 and by slump tests in
accordance with ASTM C 143.
D.Submit 3 copies of the mix design and test results to Owner's Representative for review before any
concrete is placed.
OAA-2020-159 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
E.Concrete for interior concrete constructions shall have a maximum water-cementitious material ratio
of 0.46 and shall maintain a slump of 4" maximum, prior to addition of any admixtures.
1.Concrete for Slabs on Grade where Fiber Reinforcement is Used: Add 1.5 lbs of fiber
reinforcement per cubic yard except where wire mesh reinforcement is to be used.
F.Concrete for exterior foundations shall have a maximum water-cementitious material ratio of 0.52 and
shall maintain a slump of 4" maximum, prior to addition of any admixtures. Incorporate an air
entraining admixture yielding a total air content by volume of 4.5% to 7.5% for 3/4" top-sized
aggregate and 4% to 7% for 1-1/2" top sized aggregate.
G.Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride salts shall not be used.
2.06.CONCRETE MIXING
A.Ready-Mixed Concrete: Mix and transport in accordance with ASTM C 94, “Specification for Ready-
Mixed Concrete” and the established mix design.
B.Batch mixing at the site will not be allowed except on prior approval
C.Use admixtures only as specified in the established mix design.
3.EXECUTION
3.01.INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER
A.Install vapor retarder directly under all interior concrete slabs on grade. Place retarder over the
granular fill just before placement of the concrete; but do not place retarder until the granular fill has
been inspected for compaction and grading per the requirements of Section 312000 “Earthwork.”
B.Lap the membrane sheet edges at least 12", with the top placed in the direction of the spreading of the
concrete, and seal each seam continuously with approved waterproof tape. Turn membrane up on to
wall and seal with tape to wall.
C.Seal all around pipes, conduits and other penetrations with tape.
D.Apply tape only to dry surfaces cleaned of dirt and other contaminates.
E.Just before membrane is to be covered, inspect membrane and repair all tears and visible holes with
membrane manufacturer’s recommended sealing tape. For tears more than 12" long, lap a scrap piece
of material to 12" beyond each side of the tear and seal all of the edges with tape.
3.02.FORMWORK
A.The design and engineering of the formwork as well as its construction shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor.
1.Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 and ACI 347R, to
support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,
until structure can support such loads.
2.Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
3.Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
a.Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces (exposed surfaces and surfaces
receiving items such as insulation, waterstops and/or applied membranes/sheets).
b.Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces (concealed surfaces except surfaces
receiving items such as insulation, waterstops and/or applied membranes/sheets).
B.Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys into concrete to depth indicated on Drawings.
033000-6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
C.Side forms of footings may be omitted and concrete placed against the neat excavation only when
acceptable to Soils Engineer and when appropriate credit is allowed.
D.Coat forms with form-coating compound or non-staining form oil before setting reinforcing.
3.03.PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A.Reinforcing Bars: Do not place steel until after forms have been coated with the form release agent.
1.Place in accordance with CRSI “Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars” and
approved Shop Drawings. Do not place bars that have not been fabricated to required
tolerances.
2.Use bar supports, ties, anchors and other accessories to hold bars securely to prevent
displacement by construction loads or the placing of concrete.
B.Welded Wire Fabric:
1.Slabs on Grade: Except for slabs reinforced with fiber reinforcing, reinforce with the welded
wire fabric specified, whether or not shown on Drawings.
2.Splices: Lap adjoining pieces amount indicated on Drawings and lace the splices with wire. If
not indicated on Drawings, lap a minimum of two full mesh squares. Offset the end laps in
adjacent widths to prevent continuous lap in either direction.
C.Clean reinforcing steel of oil, grease, scale, rust or other coating that will impair the bond.
D.Obtain approval of reinforcement placement before concrete is ordered.
3.04.INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that
is attached to, or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions
and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached or embedded.
B.The concrete work shall be coordinated with the work of other trades to allow reasonable time to set
sleeves, inserts and other accessories that must be in position before concrete is placed.
C.Setting Bearing Plates:
1.Clean bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces.
2.Set loose bearing or setting plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices
and then grout into place.
D.Form holes to receive handrail posts with specified non-corroding inserts.
3.05.JOINTS
A.Construction Joints: Maximum spacing as shown on Drawings, or if not shown, not to exceed 25'-0".
In general, locate joints on column centerlines, under partitions, etc.
1.Locate construction joints so as not to impair the strength of the structure.
2.Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement
across construction joints unless detailed otherwise.
B.Control Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Saw to 1/5 slab thickness, 1/8" wide, but not less than 1" deep.
Maximum spacing as indicated on Drawings. Saw the joints as soon as the concrete hardens
sufficiently to prevent raveling. In no case shall the sawing be delayed beyond 12 hours after
completion of the pour. Additional joints subject to approval.
C.Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions
with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations,
as indicated.
OAA-2020-159 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-7
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished
concrete surface and fill with joint sealants, specified herein.
2.Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
3.06.CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.Pre-Placement Inspection and Preparation of Soils: Do not place concrete until bearing soil, and/or
compacted subgrades have been inspected, and forms and reinforcing have been cleaned and
inspected. Verify that vapor retarder under slabs has been approved. Thoroughly wet wood forms
immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used.
B.Placing Footings: Place on undisturbed clean surfaces, free from frost, ice, snow mud and water.
When foundation is on dry soil or absorptive material, cover the area with waterproof sheathing paper
or wet down the surfaces receiving concrete.
C.Placement by Chute: Maintain continuous concrete flow down chutes. Use metal or metal lined
wood chute, sloped to not less than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal, nor more than 1 vertical to 2 horizontal.
Provide discharge chute and baffle plate to prevent segregation. Maintain discharge end as near
deposit surface as practicable. If discharge height is more than 60" above concrete being deposited,
use spout. When pouring is intermittent, discharge the chute contents into hoppers. Clean the chute
thoroughly before and after each run. Discharge waste material and flush water outside of the forms.
D.Cold Weather Placement: Per ACI 306.1 “Recommended Practice for Winter Concreting.”
1.Do not place concrete when ambient temperature may fall below 40°F within 24 hours of
placement or below 30°F during the succeeding 6 days unless proper provision has been made
for heating and/or insulating concrete.
2.Temperature of concrete immediately after placement shall be 50°F to 70°F.
E.Hot Weather Placement: Per ACI 305.1 “Specification for Hot Weather Concreting.”
F.Consolidation: Vibrate, spade and rod the concrete so that concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and corners, eliminating air and stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting,
or planes of weakness. Using vibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. Insert
and withdraw vibrators vertically only.
3.07.FINISHING
A.Form Removal:
1.Formwork for walls may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist
damage from removal operations.
2.Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, the exposed concrete shall be
cured by one of the methods specified under CURING AND PROTECTION.
B.Finishing of Formed Surfaces: Remove all form tie ends and fill form tie holes and holes more than
1/2" deep with mortar made from 1 part portland cement to 2 parts sand.
1.Rough Form Finish: After ties are removed and tie holes filled with mortar, surfaces not
exposed to view and not receiving insulation, or dampproofing, or waterproofing may be left
with texture imparted by the form’s facing material.
2.Smooth Form Finish: After ties are removed and tie holes filled with mortar, surfaces receiving
insulation, or dampproofing, or water proofing, as well as surfaces to receive smooth-rubbed
finish, shall have fins and other projections removed, honeycombs filled and other defects made
smooth. Where water proofing is included in the project; comply with the requirements of
ASTM D 5295.
a.Smooth-Rubbed Finish (where noted on Drawings): Not later than one day after form
removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive
033000-8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that
created by the rubbing process.
C.Slabs:
1.Float Finish: Apply to all interior slabs and to exterior platform slabs.
a.After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until surface water
has disappeared. Float the concrete with a wood bullfloat to an even surface without
drawing laitance-producing fines to the surface.
b.At exterior slabs, re-float surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Leave surfaces
free of ridges created by edges of float.
c.Finished surface shall be flat to a tolerance of 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with 10-ft
straightedge. Unless indicated otherwise, slope floors toward drains at 1/8" per foot
starting 15" from drains.
2.Trowel Finish: Apply to all interior slab surfaces.
a.After floating, begin first troweling after slab has hardened such that laitance-producing
fines will not be worked to the surface.
b.Where carpet or resinous flooring are to be installed, trowel again after first troweling is
complete and surface has hardened sufficient to ring the trowel, troweling to a burnished
finish (but without “burning” the surface).
c.Leave surfaces free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance. Finish and
measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled,
freestanding, 10 foot long straightedge resting on two high spots, and placed anywhere
on the surface, does not exceed 1/8 inch.
d.Grind smooth any surface defects that may telegraph through applied floor covering
system. Except where slabs will be exposed to view, fill depressions outside of
tolerances with filler that is compatible with (and approved by) flooring manufacturer.
3.08.CURING AND PROTECTION
A.Restrict rate of moisture loss and maintain relatively constant temperatures as necessary for the
hydration of the cement to achieve the required strength and hardness. Protect freshly deposited
concrete from premature drying and excessive hot or cold temperatures. Prevent rapid drying at the
end of the curing period.
B.Curing of Floor Slabs Scheduled to Receive Ceramic Tile or Resinous Flooring: Immediately
following any finishing operations, keep concrete continuously moist by any of the following methods
until end of curing period:
1.Burlap covering kept continuously wet.
2.Wetting and covering with polyethylene or waterproof paper covering.
3.Moisture resistant insulating blankets.
4.Spraying with curing compound: NOT ALLOWED.
C.Curing of Floor Slabs to Receive Carpet: Immediately following the finishing operation, keep
concrete continuously moist by any of the following methods until end of curing period:
1.Burlap covering kept continuously wet.
2.Wetting and covering with polyethylene or waterproof paper covering.
3.Rewetting concrete as required.
4.Moisture resistant insulating blankets.
5.Spraying with curing compound at rate required to meet ASTM C 309 criteria.
D.Curing of Footings and Foundation Walls: Same as for floors receiving carpet.
E.Duration of Curing: At least 165 cumulative hours, not necessarily consecutive, during which
temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50°F. If high-early strength concrete has
been used, the final curing shall continue for an accumulated 3 days.
OAA-2020-159 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-9
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
F.Cold Weather: Protect and cure in accordance with ACI 306.1. Protect subgrade beneath footings,
foundations, slabs, etc., from frost action. Backfill, insulate, and/or heat as required to prevent
damage due to frost heaving and unequal settling after thaw.
G.Hot Weather: Protect and cure in accordance with ACI 305.1.
3.09.FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTS
A.Cooperate with the laboratory in every respect by arranging material for sampling and supplying
necessary facilities at the job site for making the field tests and storing specimens.
B.Tests shall be made for each 50 cubic yards of concrete or fraction thereof, but not less than 2 for each
day’s pour. Perform the following tests:
1.Compression Test: Make a minimum of 3 standard 6"x12" cylinders for testing, one at the age
of 7 days, and one for testing at 28 days, unless otherwise directed. If compression tests are to
be used for determining when forms may be removed, make at least 2 additional cylinders and
cure on job site in accordance with ASTM C 31.
2.Tests for Air-Entrainment: Per ASTM C 231, on a random basis, as determined by the Owner's
Representative.
3.Slump Test: Per ASTM C 143. Contractor shall provide cone and make tests whenever
requested by Owner's Representative. Test each and every truckload. 1/2" tolerance allowed
each way.
4.Additional Tests: If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative there is any question as to the
quality of the concrete already placed, make additional tests as directed. Tests may be either
compression tests on cored cylinders, per ASTM C 42; or load tests as outlined in ACI 318; or
as directed. These tests shall be paid for by the Contractor.
C.Evaluation of Tests: In accordance with ACI 214-83.
D.Test Reports: Furnish for all tests. Report must show exact location of work represented by samples
and tests.
E.Concrete Floor Slab Water Test: Water testing of the interior concrete floor slabs shall be performed
by the Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense, and in the presence of the Owner and the resinous
flooring Installer. The Contractor shall coordinate scheduling of testing with the Owner and the
resinous flooring Installer.
1.After curing, the concrete floor slabs in the back of the house, and at other areas as directed by
Owner, shall be water tested to determine if the slab has depressions where water will pond.
The Contractor shall confirm with Owner areas to be tested.
2.If ponding at a depth of more than 1/8” occurs, the Contractor shall fill the depressions with a
filler compatible with, and approved by, the flooring system to be installed above the
depression.
3.After the filler has cured, the Contractor shall perform another water test in the presence of the
Owner and the resinous flooring Installer. If ponding in excess of 1/8” depth is still present, the
Contractor shall repeat the fill and test procedure until the Owner is satisfied that water in
excess of 1/8” depth will not pond on the floor.
4.The Contractor shall mark locations of interior walls for reference. Where water ponds at a
depth less than 1/8” deep, but occurs in an area where it will not be easily accessed for removal
(as determined by Owner), the resinous flooring installer shall mark the location and fill with
specified patching material to minimize water ponding in finish floor.
3.10.MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE WORK
A.Concrete Splashblocks: Provide precast concrete splashblocks under all exterior downspouts.
033000-10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B.Bollards:
1.Anchor bollards (furnished under Section 055000 “Metal Fabrications”) in concrete with pipe
sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with non-
shrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Erect
bollards vertical in all planes and brace until grout and concrete fill sets. Grout shall be evenly
sloped away from bollard to provide approximately 1/8 inch slope for water drainage.
2.Fill bollards solidly with concrete.
a.Bollards to Receive Cover: Strike concrete flat with top of pipe to allow for installation
of bollard cover.
b.Bollards to be Painted: Slope top of concrete fill to drain water.
C.Curbs (at housekeeping pad, etc.): Provide finish to interior curbs with profile as required by resinous
flooring manufacturer.
END 033000.
OAA-2020-159 UNIT MASONRY 042000-1
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Concrete masonry units.
2.Glass block.
3.Mortars and grouts.
4.Masonry ties and reinforcing.
5.Cold weather protection including any heat or temporary shelters required.
6.Installation of work furnished under other Sections for embedment into masonry.
7.Masonry anchorages.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Setting of dowels at base of vertically reinforced walls ................................Section 033000.
2.Manufactured stone veneer............................................................................Section 047300.
3.Metal cap at top of enclosure wall.................................................................Section 076200
4.Control joint sealants .....................................................................................Section 079200.
5.Painting ..........................................................................................................Section 099000.
6.Electrical ........................................................................................................Division 26.
1.02.CODES AND STANDARDS
A.In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the standards of masonry
installation described in the recommendations of:
1.National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA)
2.Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) Spec. (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602).
1.03.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Pre-Construction Conference: Masonry installers shall meet with Architect before construction begins to
review the materials and methods that the contractor will establish to meet the requirements specified
herein below.
B.Sources of Supply: Obtain each kind of masonry unit from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color
or uniform blend in the variation thereof, for each kind required, for each continuous area or visually
related areas.
C.Coordination: Coordinate with concrete installers with respect to installation of bar reinforcement in
concrete foundations to be extended up into reinforced masonry walls.
1.04.SUBMITTALS
A.Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Submit Product Data for:
1.Concrete masonry units.
2.Glass block.
3.Mortar and grout materials including additives.
4.Mortar and grout mix compositions.
5.Masonry ties and reinforcing.
6.Masonry clip angles.
C.Certificates: Along with Product Data submit:
042000-2 UNIT MASONRY OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.Letter of certification from concrete masonry manufacturer confirming that the concrete masonry
supplied to the site will be manufactured in the same manner as the concrete masonry tested and
found to conform to the performance requirements specified herein below. Attach test reports to
letter.
2.Letter of certification from manufacturer of ties confirming the quality of coating furnished on the
ties delivered to the site.
D.Submit laboratory test results for masonry materials.
1.Submit design data for grout mixes when grout is to be pumped.
1.05.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.Cement, Lime, Etc:
1.Deliver in original unopened packaging, plainly marked with manufacturer’s original product
identification labels.
2.Mortar materials in broken or water-stained packages or which have hardened shall not be
incorporated into the work but shall be immediately removed from the site.
B.Protection from Damp: Protect all masonry materials from precipitation and dampness.
1.Concrete Masonry Units: Store at site under well-ventilated cover so as to maintain concrete
masonry moisture level at or under values specified herein below for concrete masonry at time of
delivery.
2.Sand And Aggregates: Store on clean surfaces isolated from below-grade moisture.
3.Cement and Lime: Store cement and lime isolated from below-grade moisture and away from cold
concrete floors and masonry.
C.Handling: Handle masonry units so as to avoid chipping and breakage.
D.Store glass block in unopened cartons on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. If units are
not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.
1.06.JOB CONDITIONS
A.Protection From Precipitation:
1.Maintain masonry free of accumulations of water.
2.During erection, cover tops of walls with strong, weatherproof membranes, extending a minimum of
2 feet down both sides and securely held in place.
B.Masonry deemed to be frozen shall be removed from the site.
C.Comply with hot and cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
D.Environmental Limitations for Glass Block: Proceed with installation of glass unit masonry assemblies
only when ambient and material temperatures are 40 deg F or higher.
1.Maintain temperature in installation areas at 40 deg F or above for 48 hours after installing.
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.MASONRY UNITS
A.Concrete Masonry Units (CMU):
OAA-2020-159 UNIT MASONRY 042000-3
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.Type: Medium weight hollow load bearing units made with ASTM C 33 and ASTM C 331
aggregates to conform to ASTM C 90, including a total linear drying shrinkage less than 0.045%.
a.Normal weight units made with ASTM C 33 aggregates and meeting the same requirements
may also, at contractor's option, be used.
2.Size and Shape: 8" x 16" nominal face size; thicknesses as indicated.
3.Cores: Use only 2 core concrete masonry units for concrete masonry walls with vertical
reinforcement; otherwise, 2-core or 3-core concrete masonry may be used.
4.Moisture Limits: Units shall be cured in a moisture-controlled atmosphere so that when delivered to
job site the weight of water contained in the units shall not exceed 35% of the fully saturated
capacity of the concrete masonry.
a.Moisture content of units stored at the site shall be maintained so as to not exceed 35% of
concrete masonry saturation capacity.
B.Glass Block:
1.Provide products manufactured by one of the following manufacturers:
a.Vitrablok s.r.o. (Seves Glass Block)
b.Mulia, Inc. (Mulia Glass Block)
c.or other manufacturer as approved by Owner.
2.Glass Block: Partially evacuated hollow units, 7-3/4 inches square by 3-1/8 inches thick, pattern and
color as selected by Owner.
3.Pre-assembled option: Contractor may provide pre-assembled glass block “ring”, 21-1/16” square
by 7-3/4” high, as fabricated by GBA Architectural Products & Services (877) 280-7700. Pattern
and color of glass block in assembly shall be as selected by Owner.
2.02.ANCHORAGES
A.2” x 2” galvanized steel clip angles.
2.03.CONCRETE MASONRY LINTELS
A.Concrete Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam concrete
masonry units matching adjacent concrete masonry units in color, texture, and density classification, with
reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and
installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.
2.04.REINFORCEMENT AND TIES
A.Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Specifications and Drawings,
provide products by the following:
1.Hohmann & Barnard
2.Heckman Building Products
3.Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America (Wire-Bond)
B.Bar Reinforcement (if any):
1.Reinforcing Bars: Deformed new billet steel bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
2.Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Prefabricated units formed from #9 galvanized steel wire, specifically
fabricated for holding steel reinforcing bars in proper relationship to concrete masonry cores.
C.Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: Factory welded units fabricated from cold drawn steel wire complying
with ASTM A 82.
042000-4 UNIT MASONRY OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.Type: Ladder type, truss type not allowed.
2.Side Rods: Two deformed #9 wires.
3.Cross Rods: Plain #9 wire.
4.Width: 2" less than nominal thickness of wall.
5.Finish: Hot-Dip Galvanized after fabrication per ASTM A 153, Class B2 (1.50 oz per sq ft).
6.Corners: Factory fabricated matching “L” units only. Field fabricated corner units and lapped units
at corners NOT allowed.
2.05.CONCEALED FLASHINGS
A.Flashing for In-Wall and Thru-Wall Conditions: Self adhering, cold-applied membrane, minimum 40 mil
total thickness, consisting of 32 mil rubberized asphalt membrane laminated to 8 mil thick cross-laminated
high density polyethylene film with release liner. Overall membrane puncture resistance per ASTM E 154
shall be not less than 80 pounds; peel adhesion per ASTM D 903 shall be not less than 5lbs/in width; and
membrane tensile strength per ASTM D412 shall be not less than1200 psi. Provide one of the following:
1.Carlisle “CCW-705-TWF”
2.GCP Applied Technologies “Perm-a-Barrier Wall Flashing”
3.Heckmann Building Products, Inc “No. 82 Rubberized Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing”
B.Surface Primer: Flashing membrane manufacturer’s recommended surface conditioner.
C.Mastic Sealant: Flashing membrane manufacturer’s recommended mastic sealant for repairing membrane
and sealing edges, joints and punctures.
D.Drip Edge for Concealed Flashings: Shop fabricated 26-gauge stainless steel, depth as required for
masonry thickness, formed with loose hemmed drip edge on one side and projecting out 1/2” at 45°; or
pre-manufactured drip edge such as “Drip Plate” by Hohmann & Barnard, “#4165 Drip Edge Flashing” by
Wire-Bond, or “Drip Edge” by IPCO.
E.Setting Mastic For Metal Drip: Same mastic as used for repair of flashing membrane.
F.Metal Termination Bar: One piece, surface mounted, 0.090" thick mill finish aluminum, “Trufast TB-
90F” flat termination bar, as manufactured by Altenloh, Brinck & Co., Inc., or Architect approved
comparable product. Install aluminum termination bar in lengths not more than 4 ft long.
1.All fasteners shall be installed with neoprene washers.
2.06.MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.Expansion Control Joint Accessories:
1.Bond Breaker Strips: No. 15 asphalt roofing felt conforming to ASTM D 226, or No. 15 coal tar
roofing felt conforming to ASTM D 227.
2.Premolded Control Joint Strips for Concrete Masonry Units: Solid rubber strips with a Shore A
durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit standard sash masonry units and maintain lateral
stability in masonry wall, size and configuration as indicated.
B.Compressible Joint Filler: Fire-rated safing insulation (mineral fiber insulation), full width and thickness
of joint.
C.Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of head joint
and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
One of the following:
1.“Mortar Trap Weep Vents” by Hohmann & Barnard.
2.“Weep Vent” by Mortar Net Solutions.
OAA-2020-159 UNIT MASONRY 042000-5
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.“Mortar Break Weep Mesh” by Advanced Building Products, Inc.
4.“Driwall Weep Vents” by Keene Building Products
5.“CavClear Weep Vents” by CavClear / Archovations, Inc.
2.07.MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, non-staining, Type I, gray.
B.Masonry Cement: Not permitted.
C.Hydrated Lime: Conforming to ASTM C 207, Type S.
D.Sand: Conforming to ASTM C 144, except that 100% shall pass the #8 sieve and 15% - 30% shall pass the
#50 sieve.
E.Grout Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone well graded from 1/2" to #16 and conforming to ASTM C 404.
When fine aggregates are required, conform to ASTM C 404.
F.Additives: Not allowed, including calcium chloride or other chloride bearing formulations, as well as any air
entraining agents.
G.Water: Clean, potable, free from oil, soluble salts, acids, alkalis, organic impurities and other deleterious
materials.
2.08.MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A.Mortar Mix Proportions: Non-staining, portland cement/lime mortar, complying with ASTM C 270, Type
N, having average (in-field, not lab) compressive strength of 750 psi at 28 days, using specified materials,
mixed in following proportions by volume: one (1) part non-staining Portland Cement, one (1) part
hydrated lime and six (6) parts mason’s sand.
B.Grout Mix Proportions:
1.For Embedment of Reinforcing Bars and Filling CMU Cores: Coarse Grout per ASTM C 476: 1 part
portland cement, up to 1/10th part hydrated lime, 2-1/4 to 3 parts damp loose sand, 1 to 2 parts coarse
aggregate, by volume.
a.Slump: 8" to 10".
b.Compressive Strength: 2000 psi at 28 days.
2.For Filling Hollow Metal Door Frames: Use mortar, the same as used for adjacent masonry.
C.Combining Ingredients:
1.Measurements: Measure ingredients precisely.
a.Keep water-cement ratio precise from batch to batch.
b.Accurately measure sand in damp, loose condition; measurement of sand by shovelful will
NOT be allowed. Allow for contraction and expansion of sand’s volume as it dries out and it
gains moisture.
2.Mixing Mortar: Mix ingredients thoroughly in motorized mechanical batch mixer according to
ASTM C 270 procedures for at least 3 minutes but no more than 5 minutes after all material is in
mixer. Mix only as much mortar as needed for immediate use.
a.Cold Weather: When air temperature is 40°F or below, keep water warmed to above 70°F but
do not allow it to exceed 160°F. When heating sand, heat slowly and evenly. Scorched sand
shall be discarded.
3.Mixing Grout: Mix thoroughly in mechanical batch mixer according to ASTM C 476 procedures;
hand mixing not allowed without approval. Grout may be premixed and delivered per ASTM C 94.
Use only enough water to produce a workable consistency, except that for placement by pump more
water may be added.
042000-6 UNIT MASONRY OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
a.Cold Weather: When air temperature is 40°F or below, mix grout according to cold weather
restrictions for mortar, and deliver at 70°F-120°F.
4.Admixtures: Do not use except as specifically allowed by Architect.
5.Pre-Mixed Mortars: In addition to regular on-site motor-mixed mortars, “Silo-Mix” or PCI “Spec-
Mix” may be used. Truck delivered batch mixing shall conform to ASTM C 1142.
6.Repointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix dry materials together before adding any water. Then add only
enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball.
Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 1 to 2 hours. Add additional water in small portions
until a workable but stiff consistency is reached.
7.Mortar Mixers, Boxes and Tools: Keep clean; thoroughly clean equipment and tools between
batches and at end of each day’s work.
D.Re-tempering:
1.Partially hardened mortar may be re-tempered to replace water lost through evaporation.
2.Do not retemper mortars out of mixer for more than 2-1/2 hours; but, rather, dispose of such mortar.
3.Repointing mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially
hardened repointing mix.
3.EXECUTION
3.01.INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A.Do not build with wet or damp masonry units. Use only thoroughly dry units.
B.Lay-up masonry plumb and true to line and to levels indicated, with level courses and accurately spaced
units. Coordinate with work of other trades. Exposed work shall show no chips. Do not use cut masonry
units where full units can be used.
C.Cutting: Make all unit cuts exposed to view, including those for boxes, with motor-driven saw designed to
cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. After cutting, clean sawdust from pores of concrete
masonry.
D.Frost: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Remove and replace
masonry work damaged by frost or freezing. Do not build on frozen work. Removed ice and snow from
masonry beds by applying heat until the surface is dry to the touch.
E.Organic Materials: Do not build materials subject to deterioration into the work.
F.Stopping and Resuming Work: Step unfinished work; use toothing only when approved. Remove loose
masonry and mortar. Clean joining area and lightly dampen brick before starting new work.
G.Mortar Boxes and Tools: Thoroughly clean between batches and at end of each day’s work.
H.Temporary Bracing: Brace new masonry constructions against damage by winds until mortar reaches its
required strength and adjacent structures can provide permanent bracing.
I.Bearing: Where structural members bear on concrete masonry walls, provide solid concrete masonry units
or hollow concrete masonry filled solid with concrete grout, unless otherwise noted or shown.
3.02.BEDDING AND JOINTING
A.Apply force to masonry units when setting into place in order to maximize bed bond and head bond.
B.Adjustments: Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must
be made, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar.
OAA-2020-159 UNIT MASONRY 042000-7
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
C.Concrete Masonry Units: Use only sound units, free of cracks. Do not use chipped faces in work exposed
to view.
1.Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
Apply enough mortar at bed and end joints to allow excess mortar to be forced out both sides of face
shell. Completely fill head joints.
2.Bed webs in mortar in starting course on foundation walls, and where adjacent to cores or cavities to
be reinforced or filled with concrete grout.
3.Mortar beds for solid concrete masonry units shall cover 100% of the horizontal surface.
Completely fill head joints.
4.Fill cores solid with mortar where indicated on Drawings.
5.Do not dampen concrete masonry units.
D.Corners: Fully bond and interlock corners. Fill snap-line holes. Do not expose cut masonry faces to
weather.
E.Intersections: In load bearing walls, interlock by at least 4" the masonry units in intersecting walls. If
abutting load-bearing walls are carried up separately, intersections may be interlocked with 1-1/2" x 1/4" x
24" “Z” or “flat-U” steel slats grouted into cells at 24" o.c. vertically.
F.String Lines: Set lines in manner to avoid making holes in mortar.
3.03.COURSING, BOND PATTERNS AND SPECIAL SHAPES
A.Place masonry to levels indicated. Keep vertical joints aligned and plumb from course to course.
B.Joint Widths: 3/8", unless shown otherwise, except for minor variations up to 1/8" required to maintain
bond alignment. This also specifically includes head joints.
C.Bond for Concrete Masonry Units: Lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units
in courses above and below. Course one concrete masonry unit and one mortar joint to equal 8”.
D.Tolerances for Concrete Masonry Units: Masonry shall be installed within the following tolerances:
1.Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit at Finish Side: 1/16" maximum at concrete masonry units.
2.Variation of Linear Wall Line: 1/4" in 10ft; 1/2" in 20ft or bay greater than 20ft; 3/4" in 40ft or
more; non-cumulative.
3.Variation from Plumb: 1/4" in 10ft but not more than 1/2" in 40ft or more.
4.Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8" in 3ft; 1/4" in 10ft; 1/2" in 20ft or more.
5.Single Wythe Masonry Partitions:
a.Install concrete masonry units to create smooth surface on side indicated to receive thin brick
veneer or manufactured stone masonry veneer.
3.04.JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete masonry walls and partitions as follows:
1.Spacing: Install wire reinforcement in horizontal joints, spaced 16" o.c. vertically, unless closer
spacing is indicated.
2.Tops and Bottoms of Walls: Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint above
bottom of walls and below top of walls.
3.Openings: Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings greater than 1' 0" wide, extending reinforcement at least 16" beyond each side of opening.
042000-8 UNIT MASONRY OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
4.End Laps: Lap joint reinforcement ends a minimum of 6", placing a cross wire of each piece within
the lap.
5.Intersections and Corners: Use only preformed welded units at corners and intersections, extending
at least 18" each way; do not lap straight units at “T” intersections nor cut and bend joint
reinforcement at “L” corners.
6.Mortar Coverage: Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length: minimum
cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls after tooling and 1/2" at other locations.
7.Control and Expansion Joints: Break reinforcement at control joints. Do not bridge control or
expansion joints with reinforcing except at wall openings and where otherwise shown.
3.05.BAR REINFORCED MASONRY
A.Concrete Masonry Placement:
1.Set masonry unit webs in full mortar beds to maintain leak-free cells. Fill end joints to the full depth
of face shell thickness.
2.Lay masonry units to pour height, up to bottom of bond beam, but not more than 5ft high.
3.Maintain grout spaces free of excess mortar and debris. When pours exceed a height of 5 feet,
provide cleanouts in face shells of each vertically reinforced cell, at bottom of each lift, in order to
remove excess mortar before grouting in accordance with Masonry Standards Joint Committee
(MSJC) Specifications.
B.Bond Beam Reinforcement (if any):
1.Make bond beams continuous.
2.Reinforce bond beams, when not indicated otherwise, with two No. 4 bars placed 1" from bottom
web.
3.Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315. Return bars around corners a minimum of 8". Do
not use defective bars or bars bent incorrectly.
4.Lap the splices to provide at least a Class A splice per ACI 318. Weld reinforcement in accordance
with AWS D12.1 to obtain full strength of reinforcing bar.
5.Construct bond beams so as to pass vertical reinforcing rods for walls.
C.Concrete Masonry Lintels:
1.Install reinforced concrete masonry lintels over openings exceeding 24 inches in width in masonry
walls and partitions, unless noted otherwise or indicate to receive steel lintels. Construct lintels
using grout fill and bar reinforcing indicated. Maintain minimum 8" bearing on each side of
opening.
2.Support the grouted lintels with temporary braces. Allow built-in-place lintels to reach structural
strength before removing temporary supports (at least 10 days).
D.Vertical Reinforcement for Walls (if any): Reinforce concrete masonry walls with vertical steel bar
reinforcement where indicated on Drawings.
1.Base Dowels: Coordinate with work under Section 033000 “Cast-In-Place Concrete” to assure that
steel bar dowels shown on Structural Drawings to be cast into the concrete will align with masonry
cores.
2.Wall Reinforcement: Place bars before grout is placed, keeping bars at least the following distance
from walls of cells: 1/2" for #4 bars in interior walls, 1” for #4 bars in exterior walls, and 1-1/4” for
#5 bars or larger. When bars will not maintain vertical alignment, fix bars with bar aligner clips or
jigs. Place steel bars in sections as masonry progresses upward. Lap successive bars a minimum of
12" and tie together with wire.
OAA-2020-159 UNIT MASONRY 042000-9
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.Locate reinforcing splices at points of minimum stress. Review location of splices with Architect.
Lap splices to provide at least Class A splices per ACI 318. Weld reinforcement in accordance with
AWS D12.1 to obtain full strength of reinforcing bar.
4.Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315.
5.Secure reinforcing bars against displacement, spacing supports at not more than 160 bar diameters
nor more than 10ft apart, whichever is less. Maintain position within 1/2" of true dimension.
6.Extend reinforcement continuous for full height of wall, unless noted otherwise. When an overhead
obstruction prevents placement of masonry units around reinforcing bars at top course, terminate
bars just below top course and fill top course with 100% solid concrete masonry units.
7.Maintain distance between bars equal to 1.5 times the nominal bar size but not less than 1-1/2",
except as shown otherwise.
E.Grouting:
1.Remove loose rust and scale from reinforcing bars and remove mortar protruding into the cavity. Remove
rust, ice, water and dirt from cavities before pouring grout.
2.Grout walls using low-lift grouting technique in lifts not more than 5ft high, allowing at least 24 hours to
pass between successive lifts.
3.Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Do not disturb
reinforcement while placing grout. Terminate vertical pours 1" to 2" below the joints between courses of
masonry.
4.Consolidate grout 5 to 10 minutes after pouring. Puddle and rod the grout with each 12" depth of pour.
When lifts exceed 12", vibrate the grout using a low velocity mechanical vibrator having a pencil head
(3/4" to 1" diameter) and then reconsolidate the grout after it has lost its initial water.
5.Place grout in bond beam course before filling cores above bond beam. Terminate grout pours for
reinforced vertical cells 1" to 2" below bond beam course.
3.06.EXPANSION CONTROL JOINTS (CJ):
A.Exterior Concrete Masonry Walls: Locate expansion control joints (designated “CJ” on Drawings) as
indicated and as required to limit spacing to 18 feet, consistent with building lines with at least one control
joint within 4 feet of each external corner. Also, locate a control joint within each offset in the plane of
any wall..
B.Where expansion control joints occur at openings in walls, place joint at one side of opening when less
than 6ft wide and at both sides of opening when opening is over 6 ft. wide.
C.Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcing across expansion control joints.
D.Remove all mortar from expansion control joints. Where control joints are adjacent to door/window
openings, rake out mortar from joint in front of lintel, next to control joint.
E.Install resilient control joint filler in continuous lengths into vertical expansion control joints.
3.07.BUILT-IN WORK
A.General: As work progresses, build in hollow metal door frames, metal joist anchor plates, sleeves and
other items supplied under other Sections to be built into masonry work. Build in items plumb and level.
042000-10 UNIT MASONRY OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B.Sleeves for Pipes, Conduits, Etc.: Mortar the sleeves solidly in place, accurately fit to the alignments
requested by other trades. Extend sleeves 1/2” beyond each face of wall or partition.
C.Hollow Metal Frames: Bed anchors of hollow metal frames in mortar joints. Grout-in frames by filling
frame voids solid with mortar. Rake out excess grout from joint between frame and wall after grout has
achieved initial set.
3.08.MASONRY FLASHING
A.Flashing Fabrication: Form typical thru-wall flashings by adhering self-adhesive flashing membrane to a
stainless steel edge drip adhering membrane all across the top of the sheet metal without wrinkles or
fishmouths. Trim membrane at face of masonry.
1.Install the metal edge drip to make continuous runs. Make “dollar” lap joints, overlapping joints 6"; or
lap the metal joints 1" and fill with the mastic used to set the edge drip. Trim the metal length to match
the width of the flashing.
B.Flashing Installation:
1.Comply with flashing membrane manufacturer’s temperature limitations.
2.Use sufficient membrane material to loosely extend flashing to backup construction and to extend
flashing at least 12" up backup construction.
3.Do not stretch flashing when applying.
4.Install in one piece to the extent practicable. Lap flashing a minimum of 6" at joints and seal joint edges
continuously with mastic recommended by membrane flashing manufacturer. Cut out fishmouths and
wrinkles, patch and reseal.
5.Set metal edge strips in continuous beds of waterproof mastic with drip extending out 1/2” from face of
wall.
6.Clean surface of backup construction. Bond the flashing membrane to backup construction, using
adhesive recommended by membrane manufacturer for the type of substrate shown. Anchor top of
flashing membrane to backup with metal termination bar and seal top of termination bar with mastic.
7.Press fresh, clean surface of membrane firmly onto substrates and roll-in with a metal-wheeled roller.
8.Seal all around bolts, anchors, brick ties, sill anchors, holes and punctures with mastic recommended by
membrane manufacturer.
3.09.MORTAR JOINT FINISHING
A.Tooled Joints: Tool all mortar joints not concealed by other work. Joints to be concealed shall be struck
flush.
1.At time of laying, strike all masonry joints flush. For surfaces to receive exterior insulation finish system,
stucco and manufactured stone masonry veneer, after cutting joints flush, lightly rake joints —to avoid
bulging of mortar as wall construction progresses— and rub joint smooth.
2.Where joints are not concealed by other work, when mortar in joints becomes thumbprint hard, tool to a
hard, concave finish, using sled-type jointer at least 16" long, with diameter 1/8" to 1/4" larger than joint.
3.10.FITTING AND PATCHING
A.Do all cutting and patching of masonry required by other trades.
OAA-2020-159 UNIT MASONRY 042000-11
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B.Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated on Drawings or where
appearance or strength of masonry may be impaired
3.11.REPAIR AND FINAL POINTING
A.At completion of the work, cut out and re-point all holes, cracks and defective joints, using mortar colored
to match after it dries. Cut out hardened mortar to a depth of 1/2" and dampen the hardened mortar before
patching.
1.Replace damaged masonry. Spot patching of exposed units with mortar not allowed.
2.Retool and reclean joint patches to match adjacent work. Leave exterior walls watertight.
3.12.CLEANING
A.Remove excess mortar and droppings as work progresses, avoiding stains and smears. Do not allow excess
mortar lumps or smears to harden on finish surfaces.
B.Protect exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities.
C.When concrete masonry placement is complete, rub masonry with carborundum brick to remove all sharp
edges and then clean work with stiff bristle (non-metallic) brushes, or other approved method, removing
loose granules, building dust, loose efflorescence, etc. Comply with recommendations of NCMA TEK
Bulletin 08-04A.
3.13.PROTECTION
A.At day’s end and when precipitation is anticipated, cover tops of unfinished walls with plastic sheeting to
prevent moisture infiltration.
B.Protect exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities.
C.Brace and shore masonry constructions until they are able to withstand ambient wind loads.
D.Do not allow uniform structural loads to be applied to unbraced or unshored masonry for at least 12 hours
after construction.
END 042000.
OAA-2020-159 MAUFACTURED STONE & BRICK VENEER 047300-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
SECTION 047300 - MANUFACTURED STONE & BRICK VENEER
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Exterior wall manufactured stone veneer facing with sill/watertable, and trim pieces.
2. Exterior wall manufactured thin brick veneer facing.
3. Interior wall manufactured stone veneer facing with non-structural lintel and trim pieces.
4. Mortars and grouts.
5. Concealed flashings and metal drips.
6. Hot and/or cold weather protection including any heat or temporary shelters required.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Wood framing, sheathing and weather resistive barrier..........................Section 061000.
2. EIFS.........................................................................................................Section 072400.
3. Joint sealants............................................................................................Section 079200.
1.02. CODES AND STANDARDS
A. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the standards of
masonry installation described in the recommendations of:
1. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA)
2. Masonry Veneer Manufacturer Association (MVMA) Installation Guide for Adhered
Concrete Masonry Veneer.
3. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) Spec. (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602).
4. International Code Council-Evaluation Service, ICC–ES Evaluation Report, or comparable
testing service report, for manufactured stone and brick veneer systems provided.
5. ASTM C1780 – Standard Practice for Installation Methods for Adhered Manufactured Stone
Masonry Veneer.
1.03.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall verify the pattern selection and color of the manufactured stone and brick with
the Owner.
B. Sources of Supply: Obtain primary manufactured stone veneer and trim and thin brick veneer from
one source and manufactured by one firm, of uniform texture and color or uniform blend in the
variation thereof, for each kind required, for each continuous area or visually related areas. Provide
secondary materials only of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary
materials.
C. Manufacturer:
1. Must have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in the supply of comparable stone veneer and
thin brick veneer.
2. Must provide field service representative.
D. Installers:
1. Must have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience installing manufactured stone masonry
veneer and thin brick veneer and have completed a minimum of ten (10) projects of similar
size and complexity. Installer shall be approved by the manufactured stone veneer and thin
brick veneer manufacturer.
047300-2 MANUFACTURED STONE & BRICK VENEER OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2. Must examine all parts of supporting structure and conditions which stonework and brickwork
is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with stonework or brickwork
installation until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3. Must review Installation procedures and coordination of other related work with the Architect,
Contractor and subcontractors whose work will be affected by the stonework and brickwork.
4. Must, when directed by the Architect and/or Contractor, meet at the site and review installation
and coordination procedures, prior to the start of stonework or brickwork.
1.04.SUBMITTALS
A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Product Data: For each type of product provided, including:
1. Mortar and grout materials including additives.
2. Mortar and grout mix compositions.
3. Concealed wall flashings and metal drips.
4. Manufactured stone and trim components.
5. Manufactured thin brick components.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing dimensions, sections and provisions for application to
back-up substrate. Indicate layout, show profiles and product components, including anchorage,
accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures.
D. Samples: Based upon preliminary manufactured stone and thin brick selections, as indicated on
Drawings, the supplier shall:
1. Submit 3 sets of samples not less than 8” x 12” in size of each color, grade and finish of
manufactured stone and thin brick required. Include in each set the full range of exposed color
and texture to be expected in the completed work.
2. Submit samples with at least one mortar bonded joint per set.
E. Submit manufacturer’s proof of qualifications.
F. Submit installer’s proof of qualifications.
G. Submit manufacturers written maintenance instructions.
H. Submit executed copies of product and installation warranties.
1.05.MOCKUP
A. Provide mock up as described below and as illustrated on Drawings. Owner may choose to reduce
the scope of the mock up.
B. Contractor shall coordinate with the exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS), aluminum
storefront system, glazing, joint sealant and other material contractors and suppliers in erecting a
minimum 4’ x 4’ mockup for approval by the Owner. The mock up shall include:
1. For manufactured stone portion: field of stone showing full range of stone color and shapes to
be provided, mortar, stone sill/watertable, return of sill/watertable at pier, vertical control joint
through stone and sill/watertable, penetration detail, flashing/ weep screed/ drip at bottom of
stone.
2. For EIFS portion: field of EIFS showing color and texture, vertical joint between EIFS and
manufactured stone, backwrap and flashing with drip at bottom of EIFS.
3. For manufactured thin brick portion: field of manufactured thin brick showing full range of
color, mortar, penetration detail, flashing and drip condition at stone sill/watertable, vertical
joint with thin brick and with EIFS.
C. Mockup shall be erected in a location as approved by Owner.
OAA-2020-159 MAUFACTURED STONE & BRICK VENEER 047300-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
D. Mockup shall be erected prior to construction of the exterior walls and shall be independent of the
building. The approved mockup shall remain in place to be used to compare with the completed
exterior wall surfaces. Upon approval of the Owner, the mockup shall be removed from the site.
1.06.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Cement, Lime, Etc:
1. Deliver in original unopened packaging, plainly marked with manufacturer’s original product
identification labels.
2. Mortar materials in broken or water-stained packages or which have hardened shall not be
incorporated into the work but shall be immediately removed from the site.
B. Deliver stone and thin brick materials in manufacturer’s original unopened and undamaged
containers with identification labels intact. Protect all stonework and brickwork materials, from
weather, moisture and contamination with earth and foreign materials.
C. Handle stone and thin brick to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling or other damage.
D. Store stone and thin brick on non-staining wood skids or pallets, covered with non-staining
waterproof membrane. Place and stack skids and stones to distribute weight evenly and to prevent
breakage or cracking of stone or thin brick.
1.07.JOB CONDITIONS
A. Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations and limitations for environmental conditions.
B. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace stonework and brickwork damaged by frost or
freezing.
C. Protect stonework and brickwork against freezing. Heat materials and provide temporary protection
to prevent freezing of stonework and brickwork materials. Comply with requirements of governing
code.
D. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not use calcium
chloride to thaw ice in anchor holes or slots. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of
admixtures or anti-freeze agents, nor use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
E. During all seasons, protect partially completed stonework and brickwork against weather when work
is not in progress. Cover tops of walls with strong waterproof, non-staining membrane extending at
least 2 feet down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place.
1.08.WARRANTY
A. Provide Manufacturer’s standard fifty (50) year warranty against defects in workmanship and
materials of manufactured stone veneer and manufactured thin brick veneer products.
B. Provide Installer’s standard one (1) year warranty against defects in installation of manufactured
stone veneer and manufactured thin brick veneer products.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer:
1. Provide manufactured stone veneer and trim of manufacturer and in category, style and color
indicated on Drawings.
2. Provide manufactured thin brick veneer and trim of manufacturer and in category, style and
color indicated on Drawings.
047300-4 MANUFACTURED STONE & BRICK VENEER OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B. Manufactured stone veneer, manufactured thin brick veneer, sill/watertable, lintel and trim: Meet
ICC-ES AC-51. All trim shall be manufactured of materials and colors to match field stone. Provide
units as noted and identified on drawings and as follows:
1. Preformed outside corners with alternating long and short legs.
2. Sills/watertables with positive slope away from building (minimum 12%) and complying with
details on Drawings.
3. Specially formed units with flat face for use at penetrations.
C. Mortar and Grout Materials:
1. Cement: Provide white cement of one of the following kinds.
a. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except complying with the staining requirements
of ASTM C 91 for not more than 0.03% water soluble alkali.
b. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, and complying with the non-staining requirements.
2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
3. Sand: ASTM C 144, except graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve for 1/4" and narrower
joints.
4. Additive for Moisture Resistance: Ammonium stearate, aluminum tri-stearate or calcium
stearate.
5. Water: Clean and free of deleterious materials which would impair the work.
6. Mixes for Scratch Coat, Stone and Thin Brick Installation Mortar, and Grout: Comply with
building code requirements of 50 PSI shear bond when tested in accordance with ASTM C482.
Components shall be non-staining. Provide mixes as recommended in stone and thin brick
manufacturer’s printed instructions for each step of installation and as required for specific job
conditions.
7. Mortar Mix (for scratch coat and setting bed): Non-staining, portland cement/lime mortar,
complying with ASTM C 270, Type N, having average (in-field, not lab) compressive strength
of 750 psi at 28 days, using specified materials, mixed in following proportions by volume:
one (1) part non-staining Portland Cement, one (1) part hydrated lime and six (6) parts mason’s
sand.
8. Grout Mix: Non-staining, masonry cement/sand mortar, Type N, using specified materials,
mixed in following proportions: one part non-staining Masonry Cement, two and one half
parts finely graded clean mason’s sand as per manufactured stone and thin brick
manufacturer’s installation instructions.
D. Stonework and Brickwork Accessories:
1. Expanded Metal Lath: 2.5 lb/sq. yd., self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C
847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653, G60.
2. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant fasteners, of size recommended by manufactured stone and thin
brick manufacturer for substrate and condition and complying with ASTM C1063.
3. Anchorages: 2” x 2” galvanized steel clip angles, unless noted otherwise. Provide clip angles
as detailed and as needed to support manufactured stone trim components that are deeper than
2-5/8”.
4. Weep Screed: Hot-dip galvanized, minimum 26 gauge with minimum 3-1/2” vertical
attachment flange.
E. Concealed Flashings:
1. Flashing for In-Wall and Thru-Wall Conditions: Self adhering, cold-applied membrane,
minimum 40 mil total thickness, consisting of 32 mil rubberized asphalt membrane laminated
OAA-2020-159 MAUFACTURED STONE & BRICK VENEER 047300-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
to 8 mil thick cross-laminated high density polyethylene film with release liner. Overall
membrane puncture resistance per ASTM E 154 shall be not less than 80 pounds; peel
adhesion per ASTM D 903 shall be not less than 5lbs/in width; and membrane tensile strength
per ASTM D412 shall be not less than1200 psi. Provide one of the following:
a. GCP Applied Technologies “Perm-a-Barrier Wall Flashing”
b. Carlisle “CCW-705-TWF”
c. Heckmann Building Products, Inc “No. 82 Rubberized Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing”
2. Surface Primer: Flashing membrane manufacturer’s recommended surface conditioner.
3. Mastic Sealant: Flashing membrane manufacturer’s recommended mastic sealant for repairing
membrane and sealing edges, joints and punctures.
4. Drip Edge for Concealed Flashings: Shop fabricated 26-gauge stainless steel, depth as
required for masonry thickness, formed with loose hemmed drip edge on one side and
projecting out 1/2" at 45°; or pre-manufactured drip edge such as “Drip Plate” by Hohmann &
Barnard, “#4165 Drip Edge Flashing” by Wire-Bond, or “Drip Edge” by IPCO.
5. Setting Mastic For Metal Drip: Same mastic as used for repair of flashing membrane.
F. Fabrication: Fabricate stone and thin brick as shown and in compliance with the recommendations
of the stone and thin brick supplier.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive manufactured stone and thin brick masonry, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of manufactured stone and thin brick masonry.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02.INSTALLATION
A. Install manufactured stone and manufactured thin brick over stud wall sheathing and weather
resistive barrier in accordance with the recommendations of the stone and thin brick supplier,
Masonry Veneer Manufacturers Association “Installation Guide for Adhered Concrete Masonry”, all
applicable codes and as follows:
1. Dry stacked installation will NOT be allowed.
2. Before application of stone, layout stone to assure a consistent variety of shapes and colors.
3. Do not use stone or thin brick units with chips, cracks, voids, stains or other defects which
might be visible in the finished work.
4. Clean stone and thin brick before setting by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes followed
by a thorough drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no
caustic or harsh fillers or abrasives. If not thoroughly wet at time of setting, drench or sponge
stone and thin brick. Do not wet expansion or control joint surfaces.
5. Execute stonework and brickwork by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone fitters at the
site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set.
6. Install concealed flashing membrane as shown on drawings.
7. Fasten metal lath, over the weather resistant barrier, to vertical structural members (and
concrete unit masonry where shown) in compliance with ASTM C1063, except fasteners shall
penetrate the vertical structural members a minimum of 1 inch (not including the depth of the
sheathing) as recommended by the Masonry Veneer Manufacturers Association “Installation
Guide for Adhered Concrete Masonry”.
047300-6 MANUFACTURED STONE & BRICK VENEER OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
a. Where manufactured stone / thin brick masonry substrate is concrete unit masonry, fasten
lath to masonry with corrosion resistant concrete screws in accordance with ASTM C
1063.
b. Overlap lath a minimum of 6 inches at vertical seams and 2 inches at horizontal seams.
The overlapping lath must begin or end on a framing member. Seams shall not occur at
corners (inside or outside).
c. Fastener spacing shall be a minimum of every 6 inches vertically on each framing member
and on each side of both inside and outside corners.
8. Install clip angles, in accordance with requirements of International Building Code and
Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) Specifications, to provide anchorage for
manufactured stone units that are deeper than 2-5/8 inches.
9. Apply scratch coat to lath. Make certain lath is covered completely with a thin coat (1/2” to
3/4” thick).
10. Use a metal scraper to lightly rake horizontal grooves in the scratch coat once mortar is
thumbprint hard.
11. Moist cure scratch coat to reduce cracking.
12. When scratch coat is cured and immediately before applying the manufactured stone / thin
brick veneers, dampen scratch coat so surface appears wet but has no standing water, re-
dampen as needed while applying stone / thin brick. Apply the manufactured stone / thin brick
veneers as follows:
a. Mix mortar to a creamy consistency. Mix for a minimum of 5 minutes.
b. Prepare stone / thin brick as required. Make certain surfaces are free of dirt, sand or loose
particles. If necessary, wash stone / thin brick completely. If surface is dry damping with
brush, but do not saturate.
c. Trowel mortar onto scratch coat 1/2” thick.
d. Clean stone / thin brick and slightly dampen the back side.
e. Apply thick coat of mortar onto back side of stone / thin brick.
f. Press stone / thin brick into mortar, rotating slightly, forcing some of the mortar to
squeeze out. Any mortar forced out beyond the finished point or on the stone / thin brick
surface must be removed with trowel, joint tool or brush before the mortar is allowed to
set up.
g. Use a grout bag or trowel to fill all joints. As mortar stiffens, tool to desired depth and
brush off all excess. Do not allow any mortar to harden on the face of the stone / thin
brick.
3.03.REPAIR AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace stone / thin brick units which are broken, chipped, stained or otherwise
damaged. Where directed, remove and replace units which do not match adjoining stonework /
brickwork. Provide new matching units, install as specified and seal joints to eliminate evidence of
replacement. Reseal defective and unsatisfactory joints and as required to provide a neat, uniform
appearance.
B. Clean stonework / brickwork using clean water and stiff-bristle brushes. Do not use wire brushes,
acid type cleaning agents or other cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers.
3.04.PROTECTION
A. Installer shall advise Contractor of proper procedures required to protect the stonework / brickwork
from deterioration, discoloration or damage until final acceptance of work.
OAA-2020-159 MAUFACTURED STONE & BRICK VENEER 047300-7
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B. Normal weathering of stonework / brickwork, which will be exposed to the weather after completion,
will be acceptable, provided other conditions and activities do not interfere and result in and
unacceptable condition.
END 047300.
OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana STEEL CONSTRUCTIONS 051200-1
DIVISION 5 – METALS
SECTION 051200 - STEEL CONSTRUCTIONS
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Fabrication and erection of structural steel as enumerated in the AISC “Code of Standard
Practice for Structural Steel Building and Bridges” (current edition), such as beams, columns,
bearing plates and miscellaneous structural shapes.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Unit masonry ...........................................................................................Section 042100.
2. Canopy roof decking system ...................................................................Section 053101.
3. Misc. steel & aluminum framing and items ............................................Section 055000.
4. Finish painting ........................................................................................Section 099000.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Welders: Welding operators shall be qualified, in accordance with AWS “Standard
Qualifications Procedure.”
B. Allowable Tolerances: Comply with the AISC “Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel
Buildings and Bridges,” current edition.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Product Data: Submit copies of producer’s or manufacturer’s specifications and installation
instructions for products. Include laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance
with these specifications.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following:
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment Drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and
show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and
supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. Indicate grinding, finish, and profile
of welds.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify
pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. Indicate orientation of bolt
heads.
5. Indicate exposed surfaces and edges and surface preparation being used.
6. Indicate special tolerances and erection requirements.
D. Welders' Certifications: Submit to Owner's representative, upon request, current certifications
verifying that welders employed on the site have passed all required AWS qualification tests within
the previous 12 months.
1.04.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting, warping, nicking and other damage. Store materials
to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using
pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion
and deterioration.
OAA-2020-159
051200-2 STEEL CONSTRUCTIONS Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.MATERIALS
A. Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36; or, when ASTM A 36 is not available, ASTM
A 992, Grade 50, in the sizes shown.
B. Steel Tubes (Hollow Structural Sections): ASTM A 500, Grade B.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; type as selected; Grade A; standard weight (Schedule 40), galvanizing, 1.25
oz./sq. ft unless otherwise indicated.
D. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low-carbon steel bolts and ASTM A
563, nuts with hexagonal heads.
E. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts and nuts with
matching tempered washers, all complying with ASTM A 325.
F. Welding Electrodes: E70XX.
G. Filler: Polyester filler intended for use in repairing dents in automobile bodies.
H. Shop Primer Paint: SSPC Paint #23, Latex Primer, by PPG Pittsburgh Paints, Sherwin-Williams, Rust-
Oleum, Tnemec, Valspar, Carbit or Benjamin Moore.
I. Touch-Up Paint for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich, inorganic cold galvanizing compound having a
minimum of 80% zinc dust in the dry film, such as Carboline Carbozinc 11 Series or Carboweld Series;
or Z.R.C. Worldwide Galvilite.
2.02.FABRICATION
A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble assemblies by welding in the shop to the
greatest extent possible. If field joints are necessary and approved by Architect, locate field joints at
concealed locations if possible. Detail assemblies to minimize handling and to expedite erection.
Fabricate items of steel in accordance with AISC Specifications, as indicated herein and as indicated
on the final Shop Drawings.
1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting,
rust, scale, and roughness.
2. Grind sheared, punched, and flame-cut edges of exposed steel to remove burrs and provide
smooth surfaces and edges.
3. Fabricate steel with exposed surfaces free of mill marks, including rolled trade names and
stamped or raised identification.
4. Fabricate steel with exposed surfaces free of seams to maximum extent possible.
5. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating,
and shop priming.
6. Fabricate with piece marks fully hidden in the completed structure or made with media that
permits full removal after erection.
7. Fabricate exposed steel to the tolerances specified in AISC 303.
8. Seal-weld open ends of hollow structural sections with 3/8-inch closure plates.
B. Curved Members: Fabricate indicated members to curved shape by rolling to final shape in fabrication
shop.
1. Distortion of webs, stems, outstanding flanges, and legs of angles shall not be visible from a
distance of 20 feet under any lighting conditions.
2. Tolerances for walls of hollow steel sections after rolling shall be approximately 1/2 inch.
C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass
through steel members.
OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana STEEL CONSTRUCTIONS 051200-3
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or
enlarge holes by burning.
2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel
surfaces.
E. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1, and AWS D1.8 in high seismic applications, for
tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in
correcting welding work, and comply with the following:
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding specified tolerances.
2. Use weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment for exposed that limit distortions to
allowable tolerances for exposed steel.
3. Provide continuous, sealed welds at angle to gusset-plate connections and similar locations
where steel is exposed to weather.
4. Provide continuous welds of uniform size and profile where exposed steel is welded.
5. Make butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surfaces within tolerance of plus 1/16 inch, minus
zero inch for exposed steel. Do not grind unless required for clearances or for fitting other
components, or unless directed to correct unacceptable work.
6. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth for exposed steel.
7. At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed connection of exposed steel occurs,
grind distortions and marking of the steel to a smooth profile aligned with adjacent material.
8. Make fillet welds for exposed steel of uniform size and profile with exposed face smooth and
slightly concave. Do not grind unless directed to correct unacceptable work.
2.03.GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to
ASTM A 123.
1. Do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
2. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as
weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
2.04.SHOP PAINTING
A. Shop paint all items furnished under this Section, before shipping, unless galvanized and not indicated
for finish painting. Apply one coat (except where two coats are recommended by primer manufacturer)
of shop paint per Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Painting Application Guide PA 1.
1. Exceptions:
a. Surfaces to be welded or bolted with friction-type connections: Do not paint.
b. Paint only the initial 2 inches of areas to be embedded in concrete or mortar.
B. Surface Preparation: After inspection, clean steel to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale,
and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Society for Protective Coatings
(SSPC) standards, using any of the following:
1. SP-2 “Hand Tool Cleaning”
2. SP-3 “Power Tool Cleaning”
3. SP-7 “Brush-off Blast Cleaning”
C. Preparing Galvanized Steel for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean steel of grease, dirt,
oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
D. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply shop primer paint in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and so as to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use methods
that will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
OAA-2020-159
051200-4 STEEL CONSTRUCTIONS Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2. Apply a minimum of two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or
erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations
of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.
B. Examine Architectural Exposed Structural Steel for twists, kinks, warping, gouges, and other
imperfections before erecting.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02.PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel
secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to
design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing
are in place unless otherwise indicated.
1. If possible, locate welded tabs for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling where they
will be concealed from view in the completed Work.
3.03.ERECTION
A. General: Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein specified.
B. Set exposed steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and
AISC 360.
C. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
D. Weld Connections: Comply with requirements in "Fabrication" Article.
1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth for exposed steel.
2. Remove erection bolts in exposed steel, fill holes, and grind smooth.
3. Fill weld access holes in exposed steel and grind smooth.
E. High-Strength Bolts (if required): Install high-strength bolts according to Research Council on
Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490
Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
3.04.REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove welded tabs that were used for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling and that are
exposed to view in the completed Work. Grind steel smooth.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing
to comply with ASTM A 780.
C. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
END 051200.
OAA-2020-159 STEEL DECKING 053100-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 5 – METALS
SECTION 053100 – STEEL DECKING
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Metal roof decking and accessories.
2.Fabrication of openings in metal deck not shown on Drawings but required by other trades.
3.Reinforcement of small openings in metal deck.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Structural steel framing ......................................................................................Section 051200.
2.Wood blocking for roofing.................................................................................Section 061000.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Qualifications of Welders:
1.Qualify welding operators in accordance with AWS B2.1 “Specification for Welding Procedure
and Performance Qualification.”
2.Submit to Architect, upon request, current certifications that welders employed on site have
passed all required AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months.
3.If recertification of welders is required, retesting will not be Owner’s responsibility.
B.Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following except as otherwise indicated:
1.AISI “Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”
2.AWS “Structural Welding Code”
3.SDI “Design Manual for Floor Decks and Roof Decks”
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A.Make Submittals under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals”.
B.Manufacturer’s Literature:
1.Submit manufacturer’s specifications, section properties, load tables, diaphragm shear tables,
dimensions and finishes for each type of decking and accessory. Include installation instructions.
2.Include manufacturer’s certification as may be required to show compliance with these
specifications.
C.Shop Drawings:
1.Submit detailed Shop Drawings, for each type of deck, showing panel placement, profiles,
material thicknesses, finishes, layout, anchorage and openings.
2.Show conditions requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, cut openings, special jointing
and other accessories.
D.Submit field quality control reports.
1.04.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.Storage: Off ground with one end elevated to provide drainage. For prolonged storage, cover with
waterproof covering and keep well ventilated.
053100-2 STEEL DECKING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B.Placement of Decking Bundles:
1.Coordinate and cooperate with steel erector in order to prevent overloading of structural
members.
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.TYPES AND MANUFACTURERS
A.Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.Epic Metals Corp.
2.ASC Profiles, Inc.
3.Canam Steel Corporation
4.Nucor Corp.
5.DACS, Inc.
B.Roof Deck Units: Deck configurations complying with “SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel
Roof Deck” in SDI Publication No. 31, of profile, gauge, depth and width shown on Drawings,
galvanized.
2.02.MATERIALS
A.Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 653, Grade A, min. yield strength 33 ksi, with grade
G60 zinc coating.
B.Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 653, commercial quality, galvanized.
C.Fasteners:
1.Side Laps Between Supports: Self-drilling, self-tapping #10 machine screws with galvanized
finish.
2.03.FABRICATION
A.Lengths: Form deck units to span 3 or more supports, with flush, telescoped or nested 2" laps at ends
and interlocking or nested side laps, unless otherwise indicated.
3.EXECUTION
3.01.INSTALLATION
A.General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with applicable specifications and
commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer’s written instructions, approved Shop Drawings,
and as specified herein.
B.Shoring: Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.
1.Precaution: Preserve deck unit capacities. Do not use deck units for storage or working
platforms until permanently secured.
2.Cleaning: Erected deck units shall be cleaned of dirt and mud.
3.Placement: Place deck units on top and bottom of supporting steel framework square and curved
to match curve of supporting steel structure. Keep units in straight alignment for entire length of
run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units. Maintain rib spacing
on a 2'-0" module; do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.
4.Warp or Excessive Deflection: Shall not be evident after securing.
5.Welding: Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc
welding for appearance and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
OAA-2020-159 STEEL DECKING 053100-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
a.Welding Washers: Use where recommended by deck manufacturer.
C.Where mechanical fasteners are indicated, install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
D.Roof Deck Unit Fastening: Install roof deck units by welding, with spacing as indicated on Drawings,
and as follows:
1.Uplift Loading: As indicated on Drawings.
2.Mechanical Fastening: Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members per SDI
recommendations, spacing fasteners not more than 12" o.c. at supports, and at closer spacing
where required for lateral force resistance.
3.Welding: Weld roof deck units to steel supporting members by not less than 5/8" diameter fusion
welds or elongated welds of equal strength, spaced not more than 12" o.c. at supports, unless
noted otherwise.
4.Side Laps: Lock the side laps of adjacent deck units between supports at 30" o.c. using 1/8"
diameter self-drilling sheet metal screws.
5.End Laps: At least 2".
E.Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through
or adjacent to the decking.
F.Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for
strength, continuity of decking and support of other work.
1.Around Openings of 6" to 12" Size: Reinforce decking by fastening flat galvanized 18-gauge
steel sheet to top of deck all around opening. Steel sheet shall be same quality as deck and at
least 12" wider and longer than opening. Place welds at each corner and not more than 6" o.c.
along each side; or place 2 screws of 1/8" shank diameter at each corner and screw at not more
than 6" o.c. along each side.
G.Provide metal closure strips at all open uncovered ends and edges of decking, and in the voids between
decking and other construction. Weld or screw closures into position to provide a complete decking
installation.
H.Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install finish strips, and reinforcing channels according to deck
manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck
installation.
1.Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.
3.02.FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C.Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.03.TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A.General: After decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on
top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members.
B.Galvanized Surfaces: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanized repair paint
according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
END 053100.
OAA-2020-159 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 5 – METALS
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Items fabricated from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes and pipes which are not
part of the steel structural framing or other metal systems in other Sections of the
Specifications. The items of this Section include but are not necessarily limited to the
following:
a. Sill plate anchor bolts.
b. Steel pipe bollards.
c. Supports for solid surface countertops.
d. Aluminum ladder.
e. Dumpster gate galvanized steel framing.
f. Aluminum or galvanized steel guard rails.
g. Miscellaneous steel shapes as noted on Drawings.
2. Anchorages of type appropriate to the supporting structure and as required to provide a sturdy
installation resistant to all reasonable loads.
3. Cutting, reinforcing, drilling and tapping as required to erect the work and to fit it with work
provided under other Sections of the Specifications.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Concrete fill for bollards and casting of anchorages in concrete ..............Section 033000.
2. Cedar or plastic boards for dumpster gate.................................................Section 062000
3. Finish painting...........................................................................................Section 099000.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Measurements: Take prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication, where possible.
Take measurements in time, so as to avoid delaying job progress. Allow for trimming and fitting.
B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other
work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including
sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
C. Qualifications of Welders: Welding operators for shop fabrication shall be qualified, in accordance
with AWS “Standard Qualifications Procedure.”
D. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. AISI, Steel Products Manual, Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel.
2. ANSI A58.1, Minimum Design Loads in Buildings and Other Structures.
3. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code - Steel.”
4. AWS D1.2 “Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.”
5. AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel.”
6. ASTM B 429 - Aluminum Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube.
7. ASTM B 209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
8. ASTM B 221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
9. OSHA: 1910.27 – Fixed Ladders.
055000-2 METAL FABRICATIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
10. ANSI A 14.3 Safety Requirements for Fixed Ladders.
11. All applicable building codes having jurisdiction.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A. Make Submittals under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for all miscellaneous metal fabrications. Include plans, elevations and
details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include reaction loads for
attachments of ladders and guard rails. Indicate compliance with referenced standards.
1. Submit shop drawings for:
a. Steel bollards.
b. Aluminum ladder and accessories.
c. Aluminum or galvanized steel guard rail.
d. Metal frames for dumpster gate.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.PERFORMANCE
A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes
acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.02.MATERIALS
A. General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work that will be exposed to view, use only
materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
rolled trade names and roughness.
1. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36, in sizes shown.
2. Steel Plate and Bar: ASTM A 572, Grade 50.
3. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E or Type S as selected; Grade A; standard weight (Schedule
40) unless noted otherwise, galvanized per ASTM A 123, 1.25 oz./sq. ft unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304, #4 finish where
exposed.
6. Stainless-Steel Shapes: ASTM A 276.
7. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A 269, Type 304 for round tubing.
8. Aluminum Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429.
B. Fasteners, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for
exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941,
Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum and stainless steel regardless of
location.
2. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts
ASTM A 563; and where indicated, flat washers.
OAA-2020-159 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,
ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.
C. Anchor Bolts: Unfinished threaded fasteners per ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, nonheaded type unless
otherwise indicated, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat
washers.
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened
is indicated to be galvanized.
D. Rail Post Sleeve Forms: “EZ Sleeve” as produced by Auciello Iron Works, Inc., Hudson,
Massachusetts, tel. 508-568-8382.
E. Gate Hardware: All gate hardware shall be stainless steel. If stainless steel hardware is not available,
hardware shall be hot dip galvanized.
F. Non-Metallic, Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout having
a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days and complying with ASTM C 1107.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. “Masterflow 713” by Master Builders Solutions from BASF.
2. “Five Star Grout” by Five Star Products, Inc.
3. “588 Grout-10K” by W.R. Meadows.
G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight,
air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
H. Shop Primer Paint: SSPC Paint #23, Latex Primer, by PPG Pittsburgh Paints, Sherwin-Williams,
Rust-Oleum, Tnemec, Valspar, Carbit or Benjamin Moore.
I. Touch-Up Paint for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich, inorganic cold galvanizing compound having a
minimum of 80% zinc dust in the dry film, such as Carboline Carbozinc 11 Series or Carboweld
Series; or Z.R.C. Worldwide Galvilite.
2.03.SHOP FINISH
A. Shop paint all items furnished under this Section, before shipping, unless galvanized and not
indicated for finish painting. Apply one coat (except where two coats are recommended by primer
manufacturer) of shop paint per Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Painting Application Guide
PA 1.
1. Exceptions:
a. Surfaces to be welded or bolted with friction-type connections: Do not paint.
b. Paint only the initial 2 inches of areas to be embedded in concrete or mortar.
c. Provide minimum of two coats of paint on surfaces that will be inaccessible after
assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish from first coat.
2. Galvanized Items: Shop prime paint the following galvanized items:
a. Dumpster gate metal framing.
b. Supports for solid surface countertops.
c. All galvanized items that are scheduled for painting in the field.
3. Surface Preparation: After inspection, clean steel to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill
scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits and other deleterious materials before applying shop
coat of paint. Clean steel in accordance with Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) standards
as required by paint system to be applied, but not less than the following.
a. SP 2 “Hand Tool Cleaning”
b. SP 3 “Power Tool Cleaning”
c. SP 6 “Commercial Blast Cleaning”
055000-4 METAL FABRICATIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
d. SP 7 “Brush-off Blast Cleaning”
4. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply shop primer paint in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions and so as to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils
per coat. Use methods that will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed
surfaces.
B. Galvanizing (exterior items and items in exterior walls):
1. Coating Weights: Items indicated to be galvanized shall be hot-dip galvanized according to
the following specifications:
a. Assembled steel products: ASTM A 123, 1.25 oz./sq. ft.
b. Structural steel shapes: ASTM A 123, 1.25 oz./sq. ft.
c. Steel hardware: ASTM A 153, 1.25 oz./sq. ft.
2. Fabrication: Galvanize only after fabrication. Drilling, welding and other fabrication, except
bolting, shall be completed before galvanizing. Welds shall be free of slag and residue.
Provide vent holes as required.
3. Quenching: DO NOT QUENCH GALVANIZED ITEMS TO BE PAINTED. Newly
galvanized items NOT scheduled for painting shall be passivated in a water quench.
4. Galvanizer's Affidavit: Galvanizer shall inspect galvanizing after dipping and submit
notarized affidavit certifying compliance with these specifications.
5. Grade Stamp: Stamp each item, indicating ASTM designation and weight of coating.
2.04.FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Sizes and Thicknesses: As shown, or, if not shown, as required to produce adequate strength and
durability in the finished products. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of
temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
B. Preassembly in Shop: Preassemble the items in the shop to greatest extent possible, to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Dissimilar Metals: Wherever dissimilar metals come into contact, insert lead washers, spacers or
gaskets between them to provide electrolytic insulation.
D. Workmanship: Form exposed work true to line and level, with accurate angles and surfaces and
straight, sharp smooth edges.
E. Welds: Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with recommendations of American
Welding Society. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush.
2.05.FABRICATION SPECIFICS
A. Aluminum Ladder: As detailed and noted on drawings and as follows:
1. Acceptable Model & Manufacturer: “No. 502 Tubular Rail Low Parapet Access Ladder with
Roofover Rail Extensions” by O’Keeffe’s Inc. with the following accessories:
a. “SD” Security Door.
b. “OMB” Off-Floor Mounting Bracket.
c. “AIB” Additional Intermediate Brackets or “EIB” Extended Intermediate Brackets as
required for conditions.
2. Acceptable Other Manufacturers: Comparable models of UPNOVR, Inc. Precision Ladders
LLC.
3. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with OSHA 1910.27, ANSI A 14.3 and requirements of
state and local authorities having jurisdiction.
OAA-2020-159 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
4. Material Standards:
a. Aluminum Sheet: Alloy 5005-H34 to comply with ASTM B 209.
b. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy 6063-T6 to comply with ASTM B 221.
5. Ladder and accessories shall be manufactured by one source and one manufacturer.
6. Components:
a. Size: 1'-8" wide, height as shown on drawings.
b. Rungs: Shall be 1 1/4” square, tubular aluminum extrusion with serrated slip-resistant
surface. Each rung shall withstand 1,500 pound load without deformation or failure.
Rungs shall be attached to rails in manner to achieve loading requirements.
c. Tubular Side Rails: 1-3/4” by 3” rails consisting of two interlocking aluminum
extrusions with minimum1/8” wall thickness.
d. Roof Rail Extensions: Extend 3’-6” above roof edge surface and 1’-7” horizontally
from face of ladder rail. Rail extension shall be constructed of square serrated tubular
grab rails. Rail extension shall be supported entirely from ladder rails, requiring no
additional support from the building.
e. Construction: Self-locking stainless steel fasteners and full penetration TIG welds. All
surfaces shall be clean, smooth and burr-free.
f. Offset Brackets: Provide minimum 3/16” thick aluminum offset brackets, attached to
ladder, that will attach ladder to wall at distance from wall shown on Drawings.
Provide off-floor bracket, top bracket and intermediate brackets to provide support at
spacing indicated on Drawings.
g. Security Anti-Access Door: 7’-6” tall, formed of 1/8” thick aluminum sheet, security
door shall be attached to ladder rail with full height continuous aluminum piano hinge.
Door shall have heavy duty forged stainless steel hasp near bottom for locking with
padlock by others (see Drawings for padlock hasp height). Locking system shall
include mechanism for latching near top of door, without requiring a second padlock,
for two point latching. Provide security side panels, mounted to back of ladder rail and
extending to within 2 inches of the wall. Security side panels shall be full height of
security door.
h. Finish: Mill finish.
i. Fasteners: Stainless steel fasteners of type and size to attain designed operational and
structural performance. Fasteners shall also be of type appropriate to the substrate and
compatible with all materials they will be in contact with.
j. Warranty: Provide 5 year manufacturer’s warranty against defects in or deterioration of
materials and workmanship.
B. Dumpster Gate Framing: Metal components as detailed and noted on the drawings, galvanized steel.
C. Bollards (Pipe Guards):
1. Construction: Schedule 80 steel pipe of sizes indicated, hot dip galvanized.
2. Pipe Guards (Bollard) Coverings: Minimum 1/8” thick, high density polyethylene (HDPE)
pipe and cap covering of sizes as shown on drawings. Covers shall not have reflective strips.
Provide covers in color as indicated on the Drawings. Acceptable products as supplied by:
a. Ideal Shield:
Ph: 1-866-825-8659
Email: info@idealshield.com
b. Post Guard:
Ph: 1-866-737-8900
055000-6 METAL FABRICATIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
Email: info@postguard.com
c. Glass City Plastics:
Ph: 1-877-292-8272
Email: info@glasscityplastics.com
D. Guard Rails: Contractor’s option to provide natural aluminum or powder coated galvanized steel as
follows:
1. Galvanized Steel Rail System: Nominal 1-1/4" steel pipe, except as indicated otherwise on
Drawings. Use standard weight and heavy weight pipe as required to withstand loads
established by all applicable codes. Design the connections to withstand all uniform and
concentrated loads required by codes with:
a. Post Receivers: Furnish pipe post sleeves or post hole forms to concrete installers for
setting of pipe posts and verify proper placement in formwork; or core the cured
concrete to receive the pipe posts.
1) Rail Post Sleeve Forms: “EZ Sleeve” as produced by Auciello Iron Works, Inc.,
Hudson, Massachusetts, tel. 508-568-8382.
2) Pipe Sleeve Material: Same material and finish as pipe rails.
b. Finish: Powder coated prime and finish shop coat or, if Owner selected colors not
available, powder coat prime shop coat with finish coats by Section 099000 “Painting”
Contractor.
2. Aluminum Rail System: Nominal 1-1/2" pipe, except as indicated otherwise on Drawings.
Use weights of pipe as required to withstand loads established by all applicable codes. Design
the connections to withstand all uniform and concentrated loads required by codes with:
a. Post Support: Set railings in aluminum pipe sleeves anchored in concrete using non-
shrink setting grout sloped away from railing to provide for water drainage.
b. Finish: Natural aluminum finish.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.INSTALLATION
A. General: Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of
rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork
for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction.
B. Joints: Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairlines joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat.
C. Galvanized Items: Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of units which have been hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
D. Guard Railings: Set in holes formed with “EZ Sleeves” or in sleeves of matching metal, using non-
shrink setting grout. At exterior railings, grout shall be evenly sloped away from railing to provide
for water drainage.
E. Ladder: Install ladder and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
Coordinate bracket and fastener lengths to assure that ladder is anchored to solid backing and is able
to support loads as required by applicable codes.
F. Bollards: Setting of pipe guards and filling with concrete is specified under Section 033000 “Cast-
In-Place Concrete”.
OAA-2020-159 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-7
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.02.TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, remove identifying marks, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for
shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness per coat.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, abraded areas and repair with zinc-rich
primer applied to 4 mil dry film thickness in accordance with its manufacturer’s instructions and
ASTM A 780. Where galvanizing will be exposed to view, top the repair paint with aluminum paint.
END 055000.
OAA-2020-159 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Wood framing, furring and blocking.
2. Engineered wood beams.
3. Plywood or oriented strand board (OSB) wall sheathing.
4. Plywood or oriented strand board (OSB) roof sheathing.
5. Drainage membrane (for EIFS) / air infiltration barrier.
6. Weather resistive barrier.
7. Hardware for wood framing such as anchors, hangers, straps, etc.
8. Edge blocking for membrane roofing.
9. Framing and blocking for sheet metal work.
10. Furnishing and setting of frames, wood bucks, etc., required for masonry work.
11. Miscellaneous carpentry for protection and for temporary constructions.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Concrete formwork..................................................................................Section 033000.
2. Installation of anchor bolts for sill plates ................................................Section 033000.
3. Wood trusses, including connectors........................................................Section 061753.
4. Batt and blanket insulation......................................................................Section 072100.
5. Installation of hollow metal door frames.................................................Section 081113.
6. Non-load bearing metal stud framing......................................................Section 092116.
7. Curbs for air handling equipment............................................................See Drawings.
8. Shoring for excavations...........................................................................Section 312000.
1.02.SUBMITTALS
A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Product Data: Submit technical product data for each manufactured product provided. Include
material description, performance characteristics, and installation details and instructions.
C. Wood Treatment: Submit certification from treatment plant stating chemicals and process used, net
amount of salts retained and conformance with specified standards.
1.03.MOCKUP
A. Refer to Section 047300 “Manufactured Stone Veneer” and coordinate with other Contractors in the
furnishing of materials for and the installation of the specified mockup.
1.04.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with
damp surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood to provide air circulation within stacks.
B. Delivery of lumber that deviates from grade standards or is in any way defective and inappropriate to
its intended use, such as wood with excessive moisture content, loose knots, decay, insect damage,
splits and pitch pockets shall not be accepted and shall be immediately removed from the site.
C. Deliver pressure treated wood marked to comply with AWPA Quality Mark requirements. Deliver
lumber stamped with grade, mark of mill identification, and trademark of association under whose
rules the material is produced.
D. Handling of Preservative Treated Wood:
061000-2 ROUGH CARPENTRY OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1. According to processors’ suggested safety precautions, including use of impervious gloves and
dust masks.
2. Borate pressure treatment is water soluble, exposure to water can leach treatment from wood.
Protect preservative treated wood to minimize exposure to water, including condensation, in all
phases of construction.
1.05.JOB CONDITIONS
A. Work Related to Other Trades:
1. Fit carpentry work to work of other trades. Provide furring, nailers, blocking and similar
supports as required for proper attachment of the work of other trades. Coordinate with other
trades for locations and kinds of blocking required.
2. Furnish lumber and set all wood frames, wood blocks, wood bucks, etc., required for masonry
work.
3. Coordinate installation of wood trusses.
B. Protection: Provide temporary protections, as specified in this Section and elsewhere in these
Specifications, including, but not limited to:
1. Temporary coverings at window and door openings while gypsum board and other finish work
is in progress until windows and doors are installed. Arrange closures to permit ventilation.
Provide hinged batten doors at exterior door openings. Maintain such protection in good repair
until all glass and permanent doors and sash are in place.
2. Temporary railings and barriers around openings and edges of roof, etc. Also, protect around
excavations.
3. Temporary sheeting and lumber for protection of doorways, floors and other finish work.
4. Temporary protection for bench marks. Maintain the integrity of permanent benchmarks
throughout the Work.
C. Coordination: Other trades shall not be allowed to drill or otherwise alter framing so as to diminish
its strength or integrity.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.MATERIALS
A. Lumber: Worked and graded in accordance with American Lumber Standard PS 20 (U.S. Dep.
Comm.), S4S, seasoned to moisture content not exceeding 19% and stamped “S-DRY.”
1. Studs: Type and grade as indicated on Drawings. Use 2x6 size for exterior walls and 2x4 size
for interior partitions except as noted otherwise.
2. Headers, Joists, Rough Frames, Framing Sills, etc.: #1 Common Southern Yellow Pine, or
equivalent SPF, or Douglas Fir, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3. Nailers at Membrane Roofing and Coping: #1 Common Southern Yellow Pine or equivalent
Douglas Fir, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL): Wood veneers laminated with exterior type adhesive; design
stresses as indicated on Drawings and as required to meet use intended.
C. Wood Furring and Grounds: Type and grade as indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, #2 white
pine.
D. Plywood Sheathing: Type, grade, glue and thickness as indicated on Drawings. Moisture content
shall not exceed 18% at time of air infiltration barrier installation.
OAA-2020-159 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
E. Oriented Strand Board (OSB) Sheathing: Compliance with standards; product rating, grade and
thickness as indicated on Drawings. Moisture content shall not exceed 18% at time of air infiltration
barrier installation.
F. Drainage Membrane (for EIFS) / Air Infiltration Barrier (behind EIFS, thin brick, and manufactured
stone): “Tyvek CommercialWrap D” by Dupont.
1. Self-Adhered Flexible Flashing: “Tyvek FlexWrap NF” conformable flashing tape for sealing
penetrations and for flashing around openings.
2. Self-Adhered Flashing: “StraightFlash” flashing tape for:
a. Flashing around openings in flat plane application as recommended by manufacturer in
written installation instructions.
3. Provide manufacturer’s recommended joint tape for products used and intended application.
G. Weather Resistive Barrier (at manufactured/natural stone veneer and where noted): #15 Asphalt
saturated felt, non-perforated, conforming to ASTM D 226, Type I.
H. Sill Sealer: 1/4" thick closed cell neoprene foam gasket sill sealer, width to match stud, equal to
“Neoprene Sill Seal” as manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc..
I. Connector Brackets:
1. Joist Hangers: Size and profile as noted on Drawings or as required to suit application;
galvanized finish.
2. Plywood Sheathing Clips: Galvanized steel, Simpson Strong Tie, PSC Series, or equal.
3. Galvanizing: Hot dipped galvanized, ASTM A153 – Class D.
J. Nails, Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Hardened steel; size and type best suited to conditions; galvanized
at exterior locations, food service areas and treated nailers; cement-coated or plain finish ring-
shank or twist-shank for other interior locations; size and head to suit application. Drywall
screws are not acceptable.
2. Fasteners for Interior Sills: Powder-actuated stud-pins of sufficient length to penetrate
concrete floor slabs as noted on Drawings.
3. Galvanizing: Hot dipped galvanizing per the following:
a. For Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners: ASTM F
2329.
b. For All Other Fasteners: ASTM A 153 – Class D.
2.02.WOOD TREATMENT
A. Comply with applicable requirements of American Wood Protection Association (AWPA).
B. Wood Preservative Treatment: Waterborne Sodium Borate based type preservative complying with
AWPA-U1.
1. Acceptable products include:
a. “Advance Guard” by Koppers Performance Chemicals.
b. “Sillbor” by Lonza Group.
2. Drying: After pressure treatment, kiln dry the treated wood:
a. Lumber to a maximum moisture content of 19%.
b. Plywood to a maximum moisture content of 18%.
3. Field Treatment for Holes and Cuts: Waterborne Sodium Borate based type rate as
recommended by manufacturer.
061000-4 ROUGH CARPENTRY OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
4. Grade Marking: Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency
approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
a. Scope: Treat all wood members to a retention of 0.17 pcf (B2O3)
3. EXECUTION
3.01.INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Wood Framing: Comply with recommendations of NFPA “Manual for House Framing,”
NFPA “Recommended Nailing Schedule,” and NFPA “National Design Specifications for
Wood Construction.” Place work accurately, level, plumb and true.
2. Plywood Installation: Comply with recommendations of APA Form No. E30, "Engineered
Wood Construction Guide," including current revisions.
3. Execute rough carpentry in a manner to achieve greatest stability.
4. Discard material with defects that might impair the strength or accuracy of the work, including
wane, twist, bends and warp.
5. Do not shim sills, joists, short studs, trimmers, headers, lintels or other framing components.
B. Treated Wood:
1. Brush apply 2 coats of the specified preservative treatment on cuts, holes and site-sawn ends.
Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.
C. Stud Framing:
1. Space the studs 16" o.c. except as indicated otherwise. Extend partition studs to the structure
above.
2. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates of matching 2x material; except single top
plate may be used for non-load bearing partitions. Joints in top plates shall be lapped at least
6"; do not join over wall openings.
3. At exterior walls, anchor the bottom plate with foundation bolts over sill sealer.
4. Construct corners and intersections with not less than 3 studs.
5. Space jack studs over door and window frames at same spacing as partition studs.
6. See Drawings for additional framing requirements at openings.
D. Joist Framing:
1. Crowns: Install with crown edge up.
2. End Support: Not less than 1-1/2" of bearing on wood or metal, nor less than 3" on masonry.
Attach joists to wooden bearing sills by toenailing or metal connectors. Butt connections shall
be hung with metal connectors. [Fire-cut members built into masonry pockets.] Notches cut
for bearing shall not exceed one-fourth the joist’s depth.
3. Openings: Frame with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers, doubling
headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 4 ft.
4. Drilling and Notching for Conduits: Do not notch in middle third of joists; otherwise, limit
notches to 1/6 depth of joist. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist or locate closer
than 2" from top or bottom.
5. End Blocking: Provide solid 2x blocking, the depth of joist, at ends of joist unless joist is
nailed to header or band member.
6. Bridging: Provide bridging between joists where nominal depth-to-thickness ratio of joist
exceeds 4. Place bridging in continuous rows at intervals of 8 ft. Make bridging with bevel
OAA-2020-159 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
cut 1x4 or 2x3 wood bracing, double-crossed and nailed both ends to joists; or use solid 2x
material of same depth as joist, end nailed to joist.
E. Nailers and Blocking Within Walls and Partitions:
1. Provide wherever required for attachment of work of other trades. Cut and fit as required for
true line and level of work to be attached.
2. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Bolts and nuts shall be
countersunk flush with surfaces.
F. Plywood or OSB Wall Sheathing:
1. Install as recommended by the APA’s “Guide to Plywood Sheathing for Floors, Walls, and
Roofs” for the spacing of supports or types of substrates involved in the work, using hot-dip
galvanized 6d ring shank or threaded nails 6" o.c. at panel edges and 12" o.c. at intermediate
framing, unless otherwise noted on Drawings or required to satisfy design loads.
a. Install wood-based sheathing to maintain 1/8" space between end and edge joints of
sheets on walls. This joint spacing requirement is especially critical where
manufactured stone masonry or stucco is being installed.
2. Install panels with all edges over solid framing.
G. Plywood or OSB Roof Sheathing:
1. Install as recommended by the APA’s “Guide to Plywood Sheathing for Floors, Walls, and
Roofs” for the spacing of supports or types of substrates involved in the work.
a. Nail the roof sheathing at the perimeter of roof with 10 penny nails at 6” o.c., unless
otherwise noted on Drawings or otherwise required to meet design loads for roof
system.
2. Before laying panels, verify that surface to be covered is an even plane and framing members
are not twisted or bent. Add blocking as required and shim as required to provide a smooth,
flat plane on which panels may be nailed.
3. Nail panels to framing with hot-dip galvanized 8d rink shank or threaded nails at 6" o.c. along
edges and 12" o.c. elsewhere unless otherwise noted on Drawings or required to meet design
loads for roof system. Drive nails tight to panel faces.
4. Edge joints perpendicular to the direction of framing shall be supported halfway between
framing members with metal edge clips.
5. Install panels perpendicular to framing, with all edges supported on solid framing as noted on
drawings. Tongue and groove panels may be allowed in lieu of solid blocking at interlocked
panel edges in certain areas as noted on Drawings. Stagger joints and maintain a 1/8" gap
between roof sheathing sheets.
H. Roof Nailers: Treated wood nailers shall be installed at the perimeter of the single-ply membrane
roof, at the base of roof projections, around roof penetrations and as required otherwise.
1. Roof nailers shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/SPRI ED-1, FM Global Loss
Prevention Data Sheet 1-49, and in accordance with roofing membrane manufacturer’s
requirements, whichever is more stringent, for design loads and uplift pressures indicated on
Drawings.
3.02.INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE MEMBRANE / AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER
A. Prior to installation of air infiltration barrier, verify that 1/8” gap between plywood sheathing panels
(at end and edge joints) is present. If 1/8” gap is no longer present, rout joints to achieve 1/8” gap.
B. Apply the air infiltration barrier material over sheathing on exterior walls, providing a barrier to
water intrusion as well as a barrier to air passage.
1. Install air infiltration barrier in one layer on entire exterior surface of exterior wall sheathing.
061000-6 ROUGH CARPENTRY OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2. Install barrier with grooves oriented vertically.
3. Attach with air infiltration barrier manufacturer’s recommended fasteners and washers based
on material of framing.
C. Install air infiltration barrier in accordance with manufacturer’s latest printed instructions. Do not
use building paper or bitumen impregnated felts except for secondary layers where indicated.
D. Begin the installation at the bottom of walls. Lap the joints of the air infiltration barrier, higher
course over lower course.
1. Provide 6 inch overlap at all terminations, seams, penetrations and transitions to maintain a
continuous downward drainage plane and weather barrier.
2. Seal all seams, terminations and penetrations with manufacturer’s approved tape in order to
create a continuous air infiltration barrier.
E. Assure a thorough air seal at perimeters of windows, doors and other penetrations through the
sheathing.
1. Before placing air infiltration barrier over openings, cover edges of sheathing with self-
adhered flexible flashing strips without making joints at the corners of the opening.
2. Apply air infiltration barrier over openings. Then make an “I” cut in the air infiltration barrier
and wrap it around the jambs and window sills. Tape over all cut edges.
3. Tack and staple the air infiltration barrier (Tyvek) as required to keep it in place until finish
systems can be installed.
3.03.INSTALLATION OF WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER
A. Install two separate layers of weather resistive barrier material over air infiltration barrier on portion
of exterior walls to receive manufactured stone veneer in accordance with weather resistive barrier
manufacturer’s printed instructions and as indicated in manufactured stone veneer manufacturer’s
printed installation guide.
B. Begin the installation at the bottom of walls; working up the wall, apply upper courses such that the
bottom edge overlaps the top edge of the course below. Install two separate layers of weather
resistive barrier. Alter size of bottom course in second layer to offset joints between the two layers.
Apply horizontally with a minimum 2-inch overlap and a minimum 6-inch end lap; securely fasten to
substrate with galvanized staples or galvanized roofing nails. Inside and outside corners must be
overlapped a minimum of 16 inches past the corner in both directions.
C. Where weather resistive barrier does not extend to the top of the wall, lap air infiltration barrier over
top edge of weather resistive barrier layers. Outer/lapping course of air infiltration barrier must
extend to top of wall, as described in paragraph B above, to maintain barrier seal.
D. Assure a thorough seal at perimeters of windows, doors and other penetrations through the sheathing.
E. Apply weather resistive barrier as follows:
1. Cut back weather resistive barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at
expansion- or control-joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing at manufactured stone veneer with a minimum 4-inch
overlap unless otherwise indicated.
END 061000.
OAA-2020-159 FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES
SECTION 061753 - FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Factory fabricated wood roof trusses.
2. Temporary bridging between trusses.
3. Erection of wood trusses, including erection hardware.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Wood stud walls and roof sheathing........................................................Section 061000.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the American
Lumber Standard Committee (ALSC) Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified
by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory stamps shall be clearly visible on finished products.
B. Design Standards (most current edition):
1. American National Standards Institute / American Wood Council “ANSI/AWC NDS - National
Design Specification (NDS) for Wood Construction” and it’s “Supplement.”
2. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC) “TCM - Timber Construction Manual.”
3. American National Standards Institute / Truss Plate Institute “ANSI/TPI 1 - National Design
Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction.”
C. Fabricator’s Qualifications: TPI member in good standing, participating in TPI Quality Control Test
Criteria Program or equivalent program which inspects all phases of truss fabrication including lumber
storage, fabrication equipment and fabrication processes.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Test Data: Submit reports of truss performance tests as may be applicable to the Work.
C. Shop Drawings: Include:
1. Truss framing elevations; species and grades of lumber used; design loading and allowable stress
increase; force analysis of each member; pitch, span and spacing of trusses.
2. Nominal sizes and locations of connectors at joints; gauge thickness; bearing and anchorage
details.
3. Permanent bracing and bridging.
4. Truss designer’s recommendations for erection and handling.
5. Seal of Structural Engineer registered in the state in which the Project resides, along with copies
of manufacturer’s design analyses.
1.04.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in SBCA BCSI, "Building Component
Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal
Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
061753-2 FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B. Store trusses flat, off the ground with adequate support to prevent lateral bending. Protect from weather
and provide air circulation around stacks and under covers.
C. Remove trusses that have been subjected to bending and other loads sufficient to weaken connections.
Replace with new trusses except as approved otherwise by manufacturer and Owner.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Roof trusses shall be as manufactured by Alpine Engineered Products (div. of ITW Building
Components Group), Cascade Mfg. Co., or equal.
2.02.MATERIALS
A. Lumber: WWPA, WCLB, SPIB or NLGA graded softwood lumber, S4S, S-Dry, complying with PS
20, stress rated as required for loads imposed.
B. Connection Plates: ASTM A 446, Grade A steel; minimum 20-gauge (.036" thick); G-60 galvanized
per ASTM A 525 or AZ 50 aluminum-zinc alloy coated per ASTM A 792.
2.03.FABRICATION
A. Ensure that members are accurately cut to length, angle and true to line, ensuring tight joints.
B. Joints shall all be set with jigs for uniformity and accuracy.
C. All joints shall be sound, tight and securely fastened upon delivery to site.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.ERECTION
A. Comply with recommendations of American National Standards Institute / Truss Plate Institute
ANSI/TPI 1 “National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction”
manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings.
B. Set and secure wood trusses level, plumb and in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate
with work of other Sections.
C. Ensure that truss ends have sufficient bearing area.
D. Do not impose onto trusses any loads for which they were not designed.
E. Cutting and altering of members will not be permitted.
F. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold trusses in place until permanently secured.
G. Furnish and install truss manufacturer’s recommended permanent bridging.
END 061753.
OAA-2020-159 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES
SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Finish carpentry work of every character, including, but not necessarily limited to:
a. Install standing and running trim in dining areas.
b. Glazing stops for openings in interior partitions, for swooped glazing only, if included.
c. Interior paneling for walls.
d. Fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) panels and trim.
e. Plastic or cedar lumber boards (as noted on drawings) for dumpster enclosure gate.
f. Furnish and install gate hardware.
g. Solid surface finished window stools, vanity tops and shelves.
h. Plastic laminate construction as noted on Drawings.
i. Removal of hardware prior to and reinstallation after painting.
2. Installation of toilet accessories, both those provided as part of this contract and those provided
by Owner.
3. Installation of Artwork, provided by Owner.
4. Installation of Food Service Cabinet bases, provided by Food Service Equipment Contractor
(not included if project is located in Minnesota).
5. Installation of miscellaneous Food Service Items as noted on drawing FS-1, provided by
Owner.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Wood grounds and concealed wood blocking.........................................Section 061000.
2. Vapor retarder on interior of exterior wall studs.....................................Section 072100.
3. Plastic laminate-faced doors, some hardware installation.......................Section 081513.
4. Installation of hardware on aluminum doors...........................................Section 084113.
5. Furnishing & installation of finish hardware not installed by door mfr..Section 087100.
6. Standards for installing door hardware....................................................Section 087100.
7. Finish painting and staining, except back-priming specified herein.......Section 099000.
C. Related Work By Others:
1. Owner will furnish and install all items of furniture and furnishings, unless specifically noted
on drawings, including trash receptacles for trash cabinets in Men's and Women's Rooms.
2. Owner will furnish and install all metal storage shelving not furnished by food service
contractor.
3. Food Service Contractor will furnish standing and running trim for dining areas.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standards: Except as otherwise noted or specified, comply with “Custom Grade” provisions
of Architectural Woodwork Institute’s (AWI) “Architectural Woodwork Standards,” current edition.
B. Measurements: Before proceeding with millwork to be fitted to other construction, obtain field
measurements and verify dimensions and Shop Drawing details as required for accurate fit.
C. Workmen: Use only tradesmen experienced in the installation of millwork.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Attachment of toilet accessories shall comply with applicable provisions
in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility
062000-2 FINISH CARPENTRY OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 and with the Accessibility Code of the state
in which the project resides.
E. Adhesives, Sealants, and Sealant Primers: Comply with SCAQMD (South Coast Air Quality
Management District) Rule 1168.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Samples under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Samples: Upon request, submit Samples of each of the following items:
1. High Pressure Plastic Laminate: Three finished 8" square samples of each type and surface
finish, in colors selected.
2. Paneling: Three finished 8" x 10" square samples of each type and 6” length of each trim
shape.
3. Solid Surface: Three 6 inch square samples with at least one edge showing edge profile to be
provided.
4. Fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) panels and trim.
C. Shop Drawings for Solid Surface Materials: Submit fully dimensioned shop drawings showing
vanity tops, window stools, shelves, etc. layouts, joinery, terminating conditions, substrate
construction, cutouts and holes. Show plumbing installation provisions. Include elevations, section
details, and large scale details.
D. Maintenance: Submit manufacturer’s cleaning and maintenance instructions for each finish material.
1.04.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage,
soiling and deterioration.
B. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials until painting, wet work, sanding and grinding have been
completed in installation areas and relative humidity in those rooms can be maintained between 25%
and 55% until Final Acceptance.
C. Store materials in manner recommended by manufacturer to avoid staining, warping or other damage
to materials.
1.05.JOB CONDITIONS
A. Advise Contractor of the temperature and humidity required to be maintained in order to hold
moisture content of finish carpentry within 1% of the optimum moisture content required until Final
Acceptance.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.WOOD BASED MATERIALS
A. General: Interior woodwork shall be AWI Premium Grade, unless otherwise indicated, of an average
moisture content within the range of 5% to 10%.
B. Paneling: Prefinished type as noted on drawings.
1. Adhesive: Titebond construction adhesive of type recommended by panel manufacturer for
type of substrate.
2. Trim: Aluminum trim, with anodized silver finish, in shapes as provided by panel
manufacturer for each separate edge condition. All panel edges shall be covered with
aluminum panel trim or wood trim as detailed on Drawings.
C. Cedar Gate Boards (if included): NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA, C and Better Clear western red cedar,
surfaced four sides (S4S), maximum 15% moisture content.
OAA-2020-159 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2.02.PLASTIC MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA type Ld3.
1. Exposed Faces: .028" thick (+ .004") vertical-surface, high pressure type (GP28 Grade); in
colors/patterns listed on drawings:
2. Edging: Plastic laminate, to match exposed faces.
3. Adhesive: Waterproof; use type recommended by laminate manufacturer. Products made with
urea-formaldehyde or melamine-formaldehyde must comply with HPMA Standard FTM 2 for
emissions.
B. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Panels: 3/32” thick fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels
type as noted on drawings by Marlite, Class A.
1. Provide matching trim for joints, corners and exposed edges.
2. Adhesive: Panel manufacturer’s recommended adhesive based on substrate type.
3. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing or acid-curing silicone sealant
recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
C. Plastic Lumber Gate Boards (Recycled HDPE) (if included): “Bear Board” as manufactured by
Engineered Plastic Systems, LLC (Ph: 800-480-2327) with color as selected by Architect from
manufacturer’s submitted color samples.
D. Solid Surface Material:
1. Cast, non-porous, homogeneous solid sheets of filled acrylic resin, not coated, not laminated
and not of composite construction, complying with ICPA SS-1 and the following:
a.Through body colors and patterns.
b. Superficial damage to a depth of 1/32 inch shall be repairable by sanding or polishing.
c. Manufacturer and Color: As noted on Drawings.
d. Material Thickness: As noted on Drawings but not less than 1/2 inch.
e. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with ISSFA-2 and CSA B45.5 / IAPMO Z124, without a
precoated finish.
2. Joint Adhesive: Methacrylate-based adhesive for chemically bonding solid surfacing seams.
Color complementary to solid surfacing sheet material. UL 2818 GREENGUARD Gold
certified and complies with SCAQMD Rule 1168.
a. Product: “Wilsonart Hard Surface Adhesive.”
3. Siliconized Acrylic Sealant: Siliconized acrylic latex sealant. For general applications to fill
gaps between countertops and at terminating substrates. Complies with ASTM C 834, Type
OP, Grade NF, and SCAQMD Rule 1168.
a. Product: “Wilsonart Color Matched Caulk”.
b. Color: Complementary to solid surfacing color selected from sealant manufacturer’s
standard offerings.
4. Construction Adhesive: Countertop manufacturer’s recommended silicone-based construction
adhesive for backsplashes and endsplashes (if included in the project), and other applications
according to manufacturer’s published fabrication instructions.
5. Trash Grommet: Provide satin stainless steel finished #TM1B-SSS stainless steel trash
grommet as manufactured by Doug Mockett and Company, Inc.
2.03.FASTENERS
A. Nails: Ring-shank or rough coated finish, size and type to suit application. Non-ferrous or hot dip
galvanized for exterior.
B. Interlocking Mechanical Fasteners: Conforming to 400B-S-8.A or 1600B-S-4.A or to Sections 14
and 25 of the Woodwork Institute of California’s manual of millwork; corrosion resistant finish.
062000-4 FINISH CARPENTRY OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2.04.SHOP FABRICATION
A. General: Locate loose joints so as to render them as inconspicuous as possible in the finished work.
B. Solid Surfacing: Shop fabricate solid surface items in one piece with shop-applied edges unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for
adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
1. Rout ends for ease of scribing in the field.
2. Rout holes and cutouts, shown on Drawings, and complete by sanding all edges smooth.
3. Where solid surface material has plywood backing, seal plywood backing with varnish at sink
and trash cutouts. Install stainless steel grommet in trash cutout.
C. Interior Standing and Running Trim:
1. The reverse side of trim members shall be routed out or grooved (backed out), except for
members with ends exposed in the finished work.
2. Members shall be single lengths except as approved otherwise by Owner, and then shall be
tight and so formed as to conceal shrinkage.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Ensure that mechanical and electrical items affecting millwork are properly placed, complete, and
have been inspected and approved prior to commencement of installation.
C. Condition the wood items and paneling to the temperature and humidity conditions of the installation
areas a minimum of 48 hours before installing. Temperature and humidity of installation areas shall
be the same as final building operation conditions.
3.02. INSTALLATION
A. General: Secure work to grounds and blocking as required, holding to correct surfaces, lines and
levels. Make finished work flat, plumb, and true. Install items tight to adjoining surfaces except as
approved otherwise. Cope and scribe for tight fits.
1. Fastening: Conceal fastenings; where not possible, locate them in inconspicuous places.
Where nailing is permitted through woodwork face, conceal nail heads. Do not nail adjacent
woodwork to paneling.
2. Miter external corner of flat horizontal members; house internal corners. Miter external
corners of molded members; cope internal corners. Glue mitered corners; secure with
corrugated metal fasteners.
3. Thoroughly sand finished wood items smooth. Touch up edges and make smooth.
B. Millwork:
1. Install millwork in a manner consistent with the specified quality grade, plumb, level, true and
straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Scribe and cut for
accurate fit to other finished work.
2. Install running trim in maximum lengths; do not use short pieces or splicing of scraps. Bevel
splices and join only where solid fastenings can be made. Make all joints tight. Offset joints
between adjacent members.
3. Sink nail heads 1/16" deep in running trim, using nail set. Fill with putty stained so that it will
blend in with surrounding surfaces after application of the specified varnishes. Countersink
screw heads and cover with matching wood plug sanded flush.
OAA-2020-159 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
C. Paneling: Comply with requirements of most current editions of ANSI/NEMA LD3 and
AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. Install as shown and noted on drawings.
1. Trim panels to fit while allowing for expansion and contraction. Joints between panels and
between panels and dissimilar materials must allow a minimum of 1/8 inch for panel
movement to avoid stress cracking of panels. Allow additional space for movement where
recommended by panel manufacturer. Holes for fasteners shall be predrilled and oversized.
2. Cut and install trim as recommended by manufacturer. If a moisture resistant installation is
required, place silicone sealant in channel of trim prior to installation of panels as
recommended by panel manufacturer. Remove excess extruded sealant from face of panels.
3. Apply adhesive to back of panels at rate, and using trowel of size, as recommended by panel
and adhesive manufacturers to achieve 100% coverage. Adhere paneling to substrate and roll
face of panel to remove air pockets.
D. Solid Surfacing:
1. Install solid surface material level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
2. Fasten vanities and shelves by screwing through support frames and brackets into underside of
top. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Where joints cannot be
avoided, align adjacent surfaces and, using seam adhesive in color to match countertop, form
seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth,
remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
a. Install backsplashes and endsplashes (if included in the project) to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
3. Scribe ends of window stools to window jamb with minimum 1/8 inch for expansion space at
each jamb. Fill expansion space with specified sealant. Fix in place with sufficient waterproof
construction adhesive to resist prying off with a 300-pound weight on the end of a 30" crow
bar.
4. Completed work to be plumb, level and true with edges eased and sanded smooth.
E. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panel Installation:
1. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even
surface for panel installation.
2. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and
dust.
3. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according
to manufacturer's written recommendations.
4. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not
less than 12 inches wide.
5. Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
6. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.
7. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails. Do not fasten through panels.
8. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim
in a bead of sealant.
9. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
10. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended
by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.
3.03.INSTALLATION OF TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. Attach all toilet accessories securely to walls and partitions in locations shown. Secure each item in
accordance with its manufacturer’s instructions for each type of substrate construction, except as
specified otherwise.
062000-6 FINISH CARPENTRY OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1. Anchor only into solid wood blocking.
2. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible.
B. Grab Bars: Install bars at proper dimensions above floor to comply with accessible facilities
standards. Install all grab bars with a maximum nominal clearance of 1–1/2" between bar and wall.
Attachment of grab bars shall support a minimum load of 250 pounds downward force.
3.04.ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Repair damaged or defective work.
B. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation.
C. Clean exposed interior and exterior surfaces according to surface manufacturer’s written instructions.
Remove excess adhesives, sealants, and similar materials.
D. Clean plastic laminate and paneling with a damp cloth or ordinary bar-soap and water. Harsh
abrasive cleansers must not be used. More stubborn dirt, greasy fingerprints, glue spills, etc. shall be
removed as recommended by plastic laminate and paneling manufacturers.
3.05.PROTECTION
A. Protect installed finish carpentry from damage by other trades until Owner’s acceptance of the work.
END 062000.
OAA-2020-159 BUILDING INSULATION 072100-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 072100 – BUILDING INSULATION
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Rigid perimeter foundation insulation.
2.Rigid continuous wall insulation (if included in the project).
3.Blanket and batt insulation for walls, partitions and where shown.
4.Rigid insulation for cooler and freezer floors.
5.Vapor retarder at exterior walls.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Preparation of concrete to receive insulation .....................................................Section 033000.
2.Insulation for membrane roofing........................................................................Section 075419.
3.Backfilling over foundation insulation...............................................................Section 312000.
1.02.SUBMITTALS
A.Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Manufacturer’s Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer’s specifications for each type of insulation required.
1.03.DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A.Do not allow insulation materials to become wet or soiled, or covered with ice or snow.
B.Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1.Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.
2.Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until just
before installation time.
3.Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of
construction.
C.Insulation shall bear manufacturer’s label or stamp.
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.MATERIALS
A.Rigid Perimeter Foundation and Continuous Wall Insulation: Closed cell extruded polystyrene foam board
insulation in thicknesses noted on Drawings, complying with ASTM C 578, Type IV, in manufacturer’s
standard sizes.
1.Minimum R-value, per 1" thickness at 40°F: 5.4.
2.Minimum compressive strength: 25 psi.
3.Maximum water absorption: 0.3% by volume.
B.Rigid Insulation for Cooler/Freezer Floors: Closed cell extruded polystyrene foam board insulation,
thickness per Drawings, complying with ASTM C 578, Type VII, in manufacturer’s standard sizes.
1.Minimum R-value, per 1" thickness at 40°F: 5.0.
2.Minimum compressive strength: 60 psi.
3.Maximum water absorption: 0.3% by volume.
072100-2 BUILDING INSULATION OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
C.Batt Insulation:
1.Thermal Insulation / Fireblocking for Exterior Stud Walls – Non-Fire Rated (concealed within framing,
at roof curbs and where shown): Unfaced blankets of glass or other inorganic fibers and resinous
binders formed into flexible blankets complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, Class A. Provide blankets
of thickness to match stud depth and with minimum R-value as noted on Drawings. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.Knauf Insulation EcoBatt “R-21 HD”.
b.Owens Corning Insulating Systems “Thermal Batt Fiberglas Insulation”.
c.Johns Manville “Unfaced Formaldehyde-free Thermal and Acoustical Fiber Glass Insulation”.
d.CertainTeed Saint-Gobain “Fiber Glass Thermal and Acoustical Building Insulation”.
2.Thermal Insulation to cover exposed Continuous Insulation (exposed on face of studs above ceiling):
FSK-faced, thickness as required to provide minimum R-value as noted on Drawings, ASTM C 665,
Type III (reflective membrane covering), Class A (0-25 flame spread), Category 1 (membrane is vapor
retarder).
a.FSK faced batts, UL listed for Fire Hazard Classification (FHC) of 25/50 and intended for
exposed applications.
b.Permeance of Facing: ASTM E 96, less than or equal to 0.19 perms.
c.Provide manufacturer’s recommended tape for joints in FSK faced batt insulation that
maintains UL rating, maintains permeance requirements and adheres to all surfaces being
taped.
d.Provide “FSK-25” as manufactured by Jonhs Manville or comparable products meeting
specified requirements by one of the following: CertainTeed Saint-Gobain, Owen Corning
Insulating Systems, Knauf Insulation.
3.Acoustical Insulation / Fireblocking for Interior Partitions: Unfaced blankets of glass or other
inorganic fibers and resinous binders formed into flexible blankets complying with ASTM C 665, Type
I, Class A. Provide blankets of thickness to match stud depth. Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide one of the following:
a.Knauf Insulation EcoBatt “R-21 HD”.
b.Owens Corning Insulating Systems “Thermal Batt Fiberglas Insulation”.
c.Johns Manville “Unfaced Formaldehyde-free Thermal and Acoustical Fiber Glass Insulation”.
d.CertainTeed Saint-Gobain “Fiber Glass Thermal and Acoustical Building Insulation”.
2.02.MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.Adhesive for Bonding Perimeter Insulation: Type recommended by the insulation manufacturer for substrate
indicated.
B.Vapor Retarder (if required, see Drawings): Clear low-density polyethylene film at least 6 mils (.006")
thick, having a vapor resistance no larger than 0.19 perms.
1.Vapor Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for
sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2.Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer and has
demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarder securely to substrates indicated. Verify compatibility
with continuous insulation.
3.Vapor Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.
C.Fasteners for Insulation used as Fireblocking: Screw attached, angle-shaped, spindle-type anchors consisting
of angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in
position with self-locking washer of minimum 1” diameter / square. “90-Degree Insulation Hangers”
manufactured by Gemco; 90° Insulation Angle Hanger” by AGM Industries, Inc.or product approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
OAA-2020-159 BUILDING INSULATION 072100-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.EXECUTION
3.01.INSPECTION
A.Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed. Notify the
Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B.Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02.INSTALLATION OF INSULATION
A.General: Extend insulation full thickness shown over entire surface to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation.
B.Rigid Perimeter Foundation Insulation:
1.Apply insulation to the inside of exterior foundation walls, from under the floor slab down to the top of
the footing.
2.Butt joints tightly. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Apply
insulation with adhesive directly to concrete so as to hold it in place until backfilling is complete.
3.Replace insulation damaged by backfilling or any other operation, at no additional charge to Owner.
C.Insulation for Cooler/Freezer Floors:
1.Apply insulation in 2 courses, alternating joints at least 8" between courses.
2.Keep joints tight, including intersections with walls.
3.Carefully cut for penetrations, keeping insulation tight to penetrating pipes.
D.Blanket and Batt Insulation:
1.Provide batts of appropriate width to fit in stud spaces tightly. Batts shall extend full height of wall,
full width of roof curb, and completely fill all spaces indicated to receive batt insulation leaving no
voids.
2.Install acoustical insulation in interior partition stud spaces where indicated. Insulation shall extend
full height of wall and fill all voids. Place insulation behind and around electrical and mechanical items
within partitions and tight to items passing through partitions.
3.Penetrations at ducts or structural framing, cut insulation shall be stuffed all around with acoustical
insulation.
4.Electrical penetrations and other wall penetrations shall be surrounded with acoustical insulation
extending 12" around the opening.
5.Fill control joints with insulation.
6.Where batt insulation has FSK facing acting as a vapor retarder, install batts with vapor retarder at
interior side of insulation at all exterior walls as shown on drawings. Lap facing / flanges and seal with
manufacturer’s recommended tape. Cover all fastener penetrations and repair all punctures and tears
with tape. Fit vapor retarder tight around all pipes, conduits and other penetrations and seal with tape.
7.Where batt insulation is used for fireblocking within walls, batts must be installed in a manner causing
them to be securely retained in place. Install ‘90 degree’ type insulation hangers with mechanical
fasteners to studs on each side of insulation to be held in place. Space insulation hangers at no more
than 6” vertically.
E.Rigid Continuous Wall Insulation:
1.Attach rigid continuous wall insulation to interior face of exterior wall studs, extending from top of
floor slab to bottom of roof deck.
072100-4 BUILDING INSULATION OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2.Butt joints tightly. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Install
insulation, with manufacturers recommended method of attachment, directly to wood studs so as to
hold it in place until vapor retarder and gypsum board can be installed.
3.Exposure: Rigid continuous insulation cannot remain exposed. Unless detailed to be covered by
another material, all rigid continuous insulation shall be covered by vapor retarder and 5/8 inch thick
gypsum wall board.
3.03.VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION
A.Install a vapor retarder sheet, if required or shown on drawings, to provide a continuous vapor retarder
enclosure (including connection to vapor retarder at roof deck) around the occupied spaces.
B.Install vapor retarder at location within exterior wall construction as indicated on Drawings.
C.Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarder in
place with adhesives, vapor retarder fasteners, or other anchorage system as recommended by manufacturer.
Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-
fiber insulation.
D.Seal vertical joints in vapor retarder by lapping no fewer than two studs and sealing with vapor retarder tape
according to vapor retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Locate all joints over framing members or
other solid substrates.
E.Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarder with
vapor retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.
F.Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarder immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor
retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder material.
G.Exposure: Vapor retarder cannot remain exposed. Unless detailed to be covered by another material, all
vapor retarder shall be covered by 5/8 inch thick gypsum wall board on interior and 5/8 inch thick plywood
sheathing on exterior.
END 072100.
OAA-2020-159 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM 072400-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 072400
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. A weather-tight drainable type exterior insulating and finish system (EIFS) for wall surface,
trim and accent featuring the following components:
a. Moisture drainage membrane (See Section 061000).
b. Insulation board base and shapes to receive finish coating system.
c. Reinforcing mesh and edge trims.
d. Synthetic, stucco-like finish.
e. Control joint and perimeter joint sealant work.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Stud framing, sheathing & air infiltration barrier/drainage membrane...Section 061000.
2. Other building insulations .......................................................................Section 072100.
3. Metal coping............................................................................................Section 076200.
4. Joint sealant standards.............................................................................Section 079200.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. System Manufacturer: Shall have marketed the exterior insulation and finish system in the
United States for at least 5 years and have at least 1,000 completed projects.
2. Installer Qualifications: EIFS installer shall be certified in writing by EIFS system
manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers.
B. Source of Supply: All materials used shall be products of the system manufacturer or shall be
approved by the system manufacturer for the application applied.
C. Field Quality Control:
1. Manufacturer’s Inspection:
a. Regularly during the course of construction, work shall be inspected by system
manufacturer’s authorized representative for conformance to manufacturer’s
requirements.
b. System manufacturer’s representative shall have free access to all areas of EIFS work
including staging, storage and mixing rooms.
2. Specifications and Instructions: System manufacturer’s specifications, including installation
instructions, shall be available at the job site at all times.
3. State Code Evaluation Services’ Report: Report on the system shall be available at the job site
at all times.
D. Approvals, Listing and Classifications:
1. Underwriters Laboratories: Insulation board, with finish system, shall be classified by UL as
having a flame spread not more than 25 and smoke development index not more than 450
when tested per ASTM E 84.
2. Factory Mutual: Entire insulation and finish system shall be approved by FM and conform to
the listing in the Factory Mutual Approval Guide.
072400-2 EXTERIOR INSULATION. & FINISH SYSTEM OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3. System shall be a water drainable system listed as an approved product by State Code.
E. Tests: System shall have been tested for moisture resistance, absorption-freeze, accelerated
weathering, mildew resistance, salt spray resistance, chemical resistance, and abrasion resistance.
1. Impact Resistance: System shall have passed full scale tests per EIMA 101.
2. Wind Load: System shall have passed full scale tests per ASTM E 330 respectively.
3. Fire: System shall have achieved the Modified ASTM E 108: Flame height less than 6 feet.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data describing all products to be used in the application.
1. Manufacturer’s Application Instructions: Where manufacturer provides options, indicate
which option will be used for the work.
2. Color Charts: For all ancillary materials that will be exposed in finish work, submit charts
with complete range of colors for selection by Architect and as noted on drawings, including
joint sealant.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit details showing the following:
1. Jointing and fastenings. Show limits of finish coat at joints.
2. Dimensions and profile of insulation shapes, where included, such as for cornice and brackets.
D. Samples:
1. EIFS: Based on custom color selections indicated on Drawings, submit 2 samples 12" x 12" of
each finish, color and texture to be considered for installation, using same tools and
techniques, as for actual Project. Include in each sample panel a typical routed “EIFS reveal”
if reveals are included in the project.
2. Color and Texture: Adjust submittal and resubmit panels until approved.
E. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer and for Installer.
1. Provide written documentation, from EIFS system manufacturer, of EIFS Installers
certification as a qualified installer of manufacturer’s EIFS system proposed for this project.
F. Test Reports: Upon request, submit 3 copies of test reports performed on the EIFS.
1.04.MOCKUP
A. Refer to Section 047300 “Manufactured Stone Veneer” and coordinate with other Contractors in the
furnishing of materials for and the installation of the specified mockup.
1.05.DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Deliver all materials to installation site in original unopened and undamaged packaging
with labels intact.
B. Labeling of Insulation Boards: Boards shall bear UL label, name of raw material used and name of
molder.
C. Store all materials protected from sunlight and weather at temperatures not less than 40°F at all
times.
D. Vinyl Accessories: Protect from elements, keep clean and do not allow shape of units to be
deformed prior to installation.
OAA-2020-159 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM 072400-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.06.JOB CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Air Temperature:
1. 40°F or greater and rising at the time of installation of the system coatings and shall remain at
40°F or greater for at least 24 hours after application.
2. Temperatures below 40°F: Supplemental heat, including heat-containing enclosures, shall be
furnished when the ambient temperature falls below 40°F; and heat shall be maintained to keep
applied materials above 40°F until they are properly cured.
B. Weather Damage: Schedule work to avoid damage from sunlight and wet weather, especially with
respect to insulation boards and coating.
C. Scheduling: Schedule sufficient workers and equipment so that each area of work finished may be
concluded free of cold joints, scaffolding line, etc.
D. Protection: The system, especially open joints, shall be protected from the intrusion of water at all
times.
1.07.WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Exterior Insulation Finish System manufacturer shall provide an 8-year
written warranty against defective materials.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.MANUFACTURERS AND SYSTEMS
A. Basis of Design: Standard Watermaster LCR-GX EIFS Class PB Drainage System as manufactured
by Parex USA, Inc. Provide basis of design product or Architect approved comparable product of
Dryvit Systems, Inc., or Senergy of BASF Wall Systems Group.
B. The EIFS shall be applied in-place at the site on the substrates indicated.
2.02.MATERIALS
A. Drainage Membrane: As specified in Section 061000 “Rough Carpentry.”
B. Insulation Type: Grooved back expanded polystyrene boards meeting EIMA guideline specifications
and specifications of system manufacturer and meeting approval of EIFS manufacturer.
1. Fire Rating: Flame spread less than or equal to 25 and smoke development less than or equal
to 450 when tested per ASTM E 84.
2. Size: Maximum 2'-0" x 4'-0".
3. Thickness: 2" and as otherwise shown. Special shapes shall be cut from whole blocks of
dimensionally stabilized insulation except as otherwise allowed by system manufacturer.
C. Insulation Fasteners:
1. Mechanical Fasteners: Manufacturers standard, having thermal barrier cap over the head of
the fastener. Include manufacturer’s anti-corrosion coated screws suitable for anchoring to the
substrate indicated on the drawings, e.g. wood studs, metal studs, concrete masonry units.
D. Reinforcing Mesh: Typical fiberglass reinforcement mesh, corner and reinforcement mesh, edge and
light impact resistant reinforcing mesh: Minimum 4.5 ounce; treated to be alkali resistant, moisture
resistant, and to bond to base coat material, acceptable to exterior insulation finish system
manufacturer and as required for specified warranty.
E. Base Coat: Non-cementitious, 100% acrylic copolymer emulsion-based ground coat that is ready for
use without adding other materials.
F. Finish Coat: An acrylic-based, factory-mixed coating manufactured by system manufacturer, having
integral color and texture:
072400-4 EXTERIOR INSULATION. & FINISH SYSTEM OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1. Texture: Medium sand finish.
2. Colors: Custom colors as listed on drawings.
G. Aggregates for Finish Coat: Natural and/or machine made sands washed free of iron and chemical
deposits and otherwise free of deleterious substances.
H. Water: Clear and potable.
I. Vinyl Accessories: Starter track / casing, with perforations for drainage, shall be extruded vinyl,
exterior grade materials conforming to ASTM D 4216 and as approved by EIFS manufacturer.
1. Starter track / casing shall have perforations on the bottom for drainage with removable tape to
protect perforations during application of finish.
2. Face of starter track / casing shall have perforations for keying of and ridges for adhesion of
the finishing compound.
3. EIFS Starter Track / Casing (without drip edge), Model #AMST-**** with drainage holes, as
manufactured by Amico Building Products or comparable product acceptable to EIFS
manufacturer.
J. Joint Sealant:
1. EIFS manufacturer’s recommended silicone or StPe based liquid sealant tested per EIMA
Standard 300.01 and exhibiting 50% elongation after conditioning.
2. Sealants recommended by EIFS manufacturer for type of joint and materials involved, based
on testing.
3. Provide sealant with guaranteed 20-year life; colors as selected by Architect from sealant
manufacturer’s standard options.
4. Backer Rods: Include closed-cell polyethylene or extruded polyolefin foam backer rods
having non-absorbing skin as well as bond breaker tape.
5. Backer Rod Sizes: Provide sizes that will form optimum shape of sealant at bottom of joint
and will minimize possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed.
6. Priming: Include sealant primers as required and recommended.
2.03.MIXING AND PREPARATION
A. Equipment: Use only equipment approved by system manufacturer.
B. Materials: Mix only such materials as are approved by manufacturer and only in quantities
recommended by manufacturer. Use no accelerants, retarders, fillers or other additives.
C. Procedures: Carefully follow manufacturer’s recommended procedures for mixing.
D. Pot Life: Use materials immediately after being mixed.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.INSPECTION & PREPARATION
A. Substrate: Prior to installation of the EIFS, the substrate shall be examined for compliance with
manufacturer’s requirements. Report any substandard conditions, to Architect for determination of
how substrate shall be made compliant.
B. Soundness: The substrate shall be examined for soundness, such as tightness of connections,
crumbling or looseness of surface, voids and projections, etc.
C. Dryness: The substrate shall be tested using a moisture meter to determine if it meets manufacturer’s
requirements for moisture content and shall show no evidence of retaining moisture.
D. Flatness: The substrate shall be flat with no offsets greater than 1/4 inch in any 4 ft. distance.
OAA-2020-159 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM 072400-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.02.APPLICATION OF VINYL ACCESSORIES
A. Vinyl starter track casing shall be attached with lath nails or screws per ASTM C 1063. Components
shall be attached directly to studs.
B. All butt joints, intersections and ends of vinyl components shall be joined, embedded and sealed in
compatible sealant approved by vinyl accessory and EIFS manufacturers.
C. Remove tape (protecting drainage openings) after finish coats are completed.
3.03.APPLICATION OF DRAINAGE MEMBRANE
A. Refer to Section 061000 “Rough Carpentry” for the installation of the moisture drainage membrane.
3.04.INSTALLATION OF INSULATION
A. General: Apply insulation boards to substrate with mechanical fasteners. Methods of installation
and minimum penetration into framing members shall be as recommended by the system
manufacturer and approved by for the substrate indicated.
B. Joints: Apply insulation boards horizontally, with grooves vertical and vertical joints offset between
courses by at least 6". Butt joints tightly. Interlock board joints at corners. Align drainage grooves
in boards.
1. Remove edges of boards degraded by sunlight.
2. At penetrations, offset board joints at least 6" from edge of penetration.
3. Offset insulation boards with respect to substrate joints by at least 8", except at control joints
and expansion joints which shall be aligned.
4. Assure that all joints are tight. Rout out poorly fit joints and fill gaps with tight fitting slivers
taken from insulation boards or use approved foam-in-place seal to fill joints. Filling joints
with non-foam products will not be allowed.
5. Cut insulation back at caulked joints so that AFTER installation of base coat and mesh, the
joint width will be the dimension shown.
C. Expansion Joints: Continuous expansion joints shall be installed at the following locations in
accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations:
1. At building expansion joints.
2. At substrate expansion joints.
3. At floor lines in wood frame construction.
4. Where EIFS abuts other materials.
5. Where significant structural movement occurs, such as at changes in roof line or changes in
building shape and/or structural system.
6. Where substrate changes.
D. Ensure that edges are straight, plumb and true.
E. Shape backs of insulation boards as required to make way for any conduits, bracket mounts, etc. so
as to allow insulation to lay tight to the substrate.
F. Drip Bottoms: Form a positive drip at bottom of panels where suspended in space, such as at
window heads. Profiles other than those shown may be used provided that the panel sight lines
remain as shown.
G. EIFS Reveal Joints (if included in project): Cut out lines as indicated, maintaining an insulation
thickness of at least 3/4". Use jigs and straightedges as required for correct placement, accurate and
true lines.
072400-6 EXTERIOR INSULATION. & FINISH SYSTEM OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
H. Provision for Downspouts (if any) and Other Surface Mounted Items: Insert sleeves of 1/4" brass or
galvanized tubing to pass anchor screws for attachment of downspouts and other mounted items and
light fixtures.
I. Smoothing: Assure that the overall exposed surfaces are flat, with all edges aligned. Use
straightedge at least 10 feet long to check offsets. Fill any dents greater than 1/8" across, using
manufacturer’s recommended repair methods. Let filler dry and then sand high areas to produce flat
surface.
1. Sanding Parallel to Joints: Not allowed.
2. Residue: Vacuum away all sanding residue.
3. Low Spots: Filling with base coat material or other compound NOT allowed.
3.05.INSTALLATION OF BASE COAT AND REINFORCING MESHES
A. Preparation: Before applying base coat:
1. Surface Defects: Sand off any damaged areas, such as insulation degraded by UV exposure.
Feather the edges of sanded areas.
2. Priming: Prime the insulation board surface when so required by system manufacturer.
B. Initial Base Coat: Apply base coat material with a flat stainless steel trowel all across the insulation
to a uniform coat approximately 1/16" thick, tightly bonded to the insulation and free of voids and
thin spots.
C. Mesh: Apply mesh in continuous lengths over base coat while still fresh, to create a smooth, uniform
base not greater than 3/32" thick.
1. Embedding: Using a stainless steel trowel, embed mesh in the fresh base coat material,
ensuring that mesh is free of wrinkles and no mesh color is visible. Use additional base coat
material as required.
2. Joints: Overlap edges of mesh at least 2-1/2". Do not lap joints within 8" of a corner or within
4" of a horizontal insulation joint.
3. Joint Laps: Feather out embedding material to at least 8" each side of the overlap.
4. Corners: Ensure complete coverage of mesh at corners of insulation.
5. Smoothness: Repair any areas that are not flat.
D. Strip Mesh: Apply strip mesh all along decorative joint lines, all along outside and inside corners.
3.06.INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. Extent: Apply sealants to joints between panels within the field of the system and around perimeters,
to create a weathertight, leakproof construction.
B. Surface Conditions: Apply the sealants only to cured base coat material before the application of
finish coats. Apply sealants only to base coatings that COMPLETELY encapsulate the insulation
board as well as the reinforcing mesh.
C. Joint Sizes: Apply sealants only to joints of the required sizes.
1. Where EIFS abuts other materials, minimum width of expansion joint shall be 1/2”.
2. Expansion joints between sections of EIFS shall have a minimum width of 3/4”.
D. Backing: Do not allow sealant to adhere to bottom or back of joint; use backer rod and bond breaker
tape accordingly.
E. Workmanship: Conform to standards of Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”
OAA-2020-159 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM 072400-7
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.07.INSTALLATION OF FINISH
A. Inspection and Preparation: After base coat material is dry to manufacturer’s specifications, inspect
surface for flatness, protruding fibers, damage and deterioration due to weathering. Repair as
required to create even surfaces.
B. Prime Coat: Prime for the base coat surface as required by system manufacturer, using primer
colored to match finish coat.
C. Sealed Joints: Where sealants are to be applied, mask off the portions of base coat that are to be
bonded to the sealants. Do not apply finish over joint faces to be caulked.
D. Finish Coat Application: Apply tight to base coat with a clean stainless steel trowel, always working
to a wet edge, using sufficient workers and equipment to prevent cold joints, scaffolding lines, etc.
Terminate finish coat application only at a joint.
E. Finish Coat Texture: Texture the finish throughout the applications to match the approved sample.
3.08.PROTECTION OF FINISH
A. Protect finish coat from the weather until fully cured. Protect from rain and excessive sun with
plastic sheeting.
B. Anchor the protective sheeting in manner to avoid damage to completed work. Any damage to
completed work shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect without additional cost to
Owner.
3.09.CLEANUP
A. Clean adjacent materials and surfaces of spatter stemming from these operations.
B. Remove left over materials and equipment from the site.
END 072400.
OAA-2020-159 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM 075419-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 075419 - PVC ROOFING SYSTEM
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Fully adhered, single ply sheet roofing system.
2.Cover board (where required to meet performance specified).
3.Mechanically fastened board and tapered roof insulation.
4.Elastomeric membrane roof flashings, including base flashings and parapet flashings.
5.Elastomeric flashing boots at pipe penetrations.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Plywood roof sheathing & treated wood nailers and blocking...........................Section 061000.
2.Metal roofing......................................................................................................Section 076113.
3.Sheet metal coping, roof edges and related flashings.........................................Section 076200.
4.Sealants for general construction........................................................................Section 079200.
5.Prefabricated curbs for rooftop mechanical equipment......................................Div. 23 Sections.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Roofing Contractor's Qualifications:
1.The Duro-Last Roofing System must be installed by an authorized Duro-Last contractor capable
of providing the specified warranty for the new roofing.
2.Licensed in the state in which the Project resides (if applicable), specializing for at least 5 years in
the kind of membrane system involved, who is certified/licensed by roofing membrane system
producer and who can furnish for this installation a fulltime foreman, factory trained by the roof
membrane system producer.
B.Source Limitations: Obtain all roofing system components (including, but not limited to, membrane,
cover board, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, adhesives, flexible flashings and boots, metal
copings and roof edges, accessories and items as required to obtain an entire system warranty) from
same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.
1.Sheet metal flashing and trim included as part of roofing assembly, specified under Section
076200 “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim,” shall be included in roofing warranty.
C.Pre-Construction Conference: Roofing Installer shall meet with Owner’s representative, roof membrane
producer’s representative and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, before
construction begins to establish the techniques and methods required to complete the roofing work in
compliance with insurance and warranty requirements as well as the criteria to be used during
inspections.
D.Scheduling and Coordination:
2.Coordinate roofing installation with mechanical and electrical work associated with roof
penetrations.
3.No phased construction will be considered or approved.
E.Manufacturer’s Inspection: Membrane manufacturer’s qualified inspector shall inspect roofing during
its installation; and, upon completion, he shall do final inspection in company with Owner’s authorized
representative, to verify that roofing installation meets all requirements for warranty specified.
Contractor shall make all arrangements for inspections. Roofer shall pay all manufacturer's charges
related to inspections.
075419-2 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.As a minimum, membrane producer shall inspect:
a.Acceptability of deck / substrate.
b.Installation of insulation.
c.Adhering of membrane.
d.Construction of seams and base flashings.
e.Other critical points of construction as deemed necessary at the pre-construction
conference.
2.Copies of record photographs / inspection reports shall be made available to Owner upon request.
F.No wet or damaged materials shall be installed.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A.Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Product Data: Submit roofing materials producer’s technical data, material characteristics and
installation instructions for each product required, including fasteners and accessories.
C.Shop Drawings: Indicate:
1.Outline of roof and dimensions.
2.Typical and special details for flashings, roof curbs, penetrations, roof drains, perimeter
conditions, termination details, etc. Reference the locations of details on roof outline.
3.Number and mark of each factory prepared roofing sheet and flashing.
4.Fastener patterns for insulation at field, perimeter and corner conditions, as well as membrane
edges, as required to meet design requirements for wind uplift resistance.
5.Layout of tapered insulation, with finished slopes indicated.
6.Locations of walkway pads.
7.Locations of “apron” (second layer of roofing membrane) under all treated wood placed on top of
roof membrane, at indicated exhaust fans and where shown on Drawings.
D.Manufacturer’s Certificates:
1.Submit copy of membrane producer’s current approval of Installer.
2.Submit membrane producer’s letter, signed by an officer of the company, affirming that all
construction documents have been reviewed, the materials proposed for use comply with the
requirements of the construction documents and are acceptable to the company for issue of the
warranties specified.
3.Submit certification that the roof system installed conforms to the wind uplift resistance design
pressures indicated on Drawings and is listed by Underwriters Laboratories or Intertek as Class A
according to external fire tests conducted per ASTM E 108.
4.Submit list of foremen who have received factory training for installation of the system to be
installed, along with kinds and dates of training.
E.Field Quality Control Testing Reports:
1.Submit a copy of the Shop Drawing plans marked to show where each test strip was cut to verify
the integrity of welded seams.
2.Submit the test strips taken, each identified for location and date taken.
3.Submit final roof inspection report, prepared by manufacturer’s technical personnel, indicating
that all specified requirements and warranty requirements have been met.
F.Pre-Job Inspection Testing: Where testing is required by membrane manufacturer (such as fastener pull
out tests, etc.), submit copy of test results including plans indicating testing locations.
G.Warranties:
1.Submit roofing system manufacturer’s sample warranty illustrating proposed coverage.
OAA-2020-159 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM 075419-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2.At time of closeout, submit roofing system manufacturer’s executed warranty made out to Owner,
including required supplements.
3.Submit to Owner all documentation required for the making of claims against warranties
including, but not limited to, proof of purchase.
4.Submit registration requirements if required to activate warranty.
H.Maintenance Data: Submit roofing system manufacturer’s maintenance recommendations and
requirements to include in maintenance manuals. Include all maintenance, inspection, and similar
requirements required to keep roofing warranty in force.
1.04.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.All membrane system components shall bear FMRC-Approved marking.
B.Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, with legible labels
intact and indicating manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture and lot
number, warnings, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other
components.
C.Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and
within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material
from direct sunlight.
1.Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.
D.Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during
installation. Store in a dry location protected from direct sunlight, damage or deterioration.
E.No wet or damaged materials shall be used in the application.
F.Any warped or broken insulation boards shall be removed from the site.
G.Locate combustible materials away from and protected from ignition sources.
1.05.JOB CONDITIONS
A.Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty
requirements.
1.Winds: Do not weld membrane when gusty winds or broken skies cause rapid fluctuations in
ambient heat gain and heat loss.
2.Cold Weather: Follow membrane producer’s special recommendations when cold weather
retards free flow of adhesives and sealants. Do not apply adhesives below adhesive
manufacturers’ recommended ambient temperature ranges.
B.Electrical Power: Furnish power for heat welders by way of portable generator(s) producing at least 30
amps per welder supplied or at Contractor’s option, furnish power to 220V heat welders by way of #10
x 3 or greater power cords and boost the power with a step-up transformer when cord length exceeds
150 feet.
C.Fire Prevention: Take every precaution to prevent fire including, but not limited to, the following:
1.Maintain at least 2 portable fire extinguishers, rated 10-B:C-20 pounds, near area where adhesives
are being used and train applicators in their proper use.
2.Do not use open flames to heat adhesives. Allow solvents to air-dry.
3.Use only grounded spray equipment.
1.06.WARRANTIES
A.Roofing system shall be provided with a non-prorated, No-Dollar-Limit, entire system warranty to the
Owner, against leaks or defects of any kind due to faulty materials or workmanship, in which the
075419-4 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail within the warranty
period indicated.
1.Entire roof system warranty shall include roofing membrane, base flashings, roof insulation,
fasteners, cover boards, roof walkways, roof edge metals, and other components of roofing
system.
2.Provide wind speed warranty with coverage for minimum wind speed up to an including 72 miles
per hour.
3.As a supplement to the roofing manufacturer’s warranty and attached to the warranty for the
roofing for this project, the roofing manufacturer shall provide to the Owner, a letter on company
letterhead, signed by an officer of the company, stating that the use of vegetable oils for cooking
and/or frying will not void, limit or lessen the manufacturer’s warranty in any way.
4.Provide warranties of the following duration beginning at the date of Substantial Completion:
a.Roofing membrane system producer’s 15-year warranty for materials and workmanship.
b.Roofing Contractor’s 5-year warranty for workmanship.
B.Membrane system manufacturer shall issue to the Owner the specified warranties upon its receipt of
certification from installer that the entire roofing system was installed in accordance with manufacturer's
specifications.
2.PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture,
fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof system and flashings shall remain
watertight.
1.Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested
according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
2.Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to
ASTM D 3746, ASTM D 4272, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM Approvals 4470.
B.Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials
under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
C.Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system, including roof edge metals, to resist the design wind
uplift pressures, for each zone as indicated on Drawings, when tested according to FM Approvals 4474,
UL 580, or UL 1897:
D.Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.General: All roofing system components shall be provided by or approved by membrane manufacturer
for use in roofing system and meeting the requirements of manufacturer for specified warranty.
B.Membrane Type and Manufacturer: Fully adhered scrim reinforced, polyvinyl chloride polymer blend
(PVC) membrane, ASTM D4434 classified as Type III membrane, with a weft inserted polyester scrim,
not less than .060" thick, Duro-Last (DL60) as manufactured by Duro-Last, Inc. Colors shall be as
follows or as otherwise noted on drawings:
OAA-2020-159 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM 075419-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.Vertical surfaces and potentially visible surfaces such as entrance and drive-thru canopies: Tan.
2.Main Roof: White.
C.Base and Parapet Flashing: Same material as used for roof membrane.
D.Pipe Flashings: Premolded boots of synthetic material approved by system producer for the membrane
system, complete with stainless steel, screw tightened, pipe clamps.
E.Walkway Pads: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads
or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
F.Roof Insulation – General:
1.When Cover Board is Required: Provide roof insulation type A for all insulation layers between
the cover board and deck.
2.When Cover Board is Not Required: Provide roof insulation type B for the top layer of insulation
and provide roof insulation type A for balance of required insulation thickness.
G.Roof Insulation Type A: Rigid boards (tapered where required) with polyisocyanurate core and glass
fiber reinforced mat facers or organic/inorganic facers both sides; minimum aged R of 5.7 per 1" of
thickness. Comply with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, with minimum compressive strength of 20 psi
(Grade 2) when tested according to ASTM D1621.
3.Use manufacturer’s product, acceptable to membrane manufacturer for warranty specified, which
has a Class A rating.
4.Thickness: 1–1/2" to 2-1/2" for flat boards. No board shall be less than 1" thick.
5.Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered polyisocyanurate insulation boards, minimum 1 inch
thickness, fabricated to create a minimum installed slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless a
steeper slope is indicated.
6.Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
needed to create positive slope to drain.
H.Roof Insulation Type B: Rigid boards with polyisocyanurate core and coated glass facer designed for
use with fully adhered roofing membrane; minimum aged R of 5.7 per 1" of thickness. Comply with
ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, with minimum compressive strength of 20 psi (Grade 2) when tested
according to ASTM D1621.
1.Use manufacturer’s product, acceptable to membrane manufacturer for warranty specified, which
has a Class A rating.
2.Thickness: Provide insulation board in 1" thickness.
I.Mechanical Anchors: Anti-backout types recommended by roof system manufacturer, including stress
distribution plates, for indicated substrate. Anchors shall feature anti-corrosive materials.
1.Anti-Corrosion Coating: Zinc-free, hard epoxy, fluoropolymer or other coating meeting or
exceeding FMRC 4470 requirements.
2.Lengths: Selected to penetrate wood at least 1".
3.For Termination Bars: Furnish fasteners with neoprene washers.
J.Cover Board (where required to meet performance specified): ASTM C 1177, glass-mat, water-resistant
gypsum board, minimum 1/4 inch thick. Subject to compliance with requirements and acceptability of
membrane manufacturer, provide the following:
1.DensDeck Prime Roof Board.
K.Auxiliary Materials: Prefabricated flashing units, bonding adhesives, sealants, splicing cements, mastics
and other accessory materials shall be as recommended by producer of roof membrane for the system
installed.
075419-6 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
L.Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness,
and color as PVC sheet.
M.Flashing to Cover Corners in Substrates: Roof membrane manufacturer’s reinforced plastic sheet
flashing strips, .035" (35 mil) minimum thickness.
A.Grease Aprons: At kitchen exhaust hoods, adhere a second layer of roof membrane to first layer of
roofing, a minimum of 4 ft out from perimeter of the exhaust hood curb. Extend grease apron further if
recommended or required by roofing membrane manufacturer.
B.Termination Bar:
1.One piece, surface mounted, .125" thick, mill finished, extruded 6063-T6 alloy aluminum, with
angled lip on top creating a sealant ledge, equal to IB Aluminum Lip Termination Bar by IB Roof
Systems, or approved equal. Unit shall be FM approved. Furnish aluminum in lengths not more
than 4 feet long.
2.All exposed fasteners shall be installed with neoprene washers.
3.EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A.Verify that surfaces to receive roofing system are suitable for application of the materials and that wood
nailers have been properly installed. Notify General Contractor in writing of any unsuitable surfaces.
B.Perform all testing required by membrane manufacturer (such as fastener pull out tests, etc.) and submit
test results, including test location plans, to Owner.
C.Proceeding with roof system application shall designate acceptance of conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Prepare surfaces upon which roofing system is to be applied so that they will be clean, dry, and free of
fins, sharp edges, loose, damaged and foreign materials, oil and grease.
B.All surface voids in deck greater than 1/4" wide shall be filled flush with membrane producer’s
recommended pourable sealer.
C.Inspect underside of roof deck for conduits and pipes that might intersect new roofing fasteners.
Clearly identify on topside of roof where such intersections might occur.
D.Clean and maintain roof drains during roofing installation to prevent back-up of water. Prevent
materials from entering and clogging roof drains and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other
construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.
3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION
E.Install roofing system, including all components and accessories, according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
F.Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering
completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and
discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
1.Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at the end of the workday.
3.04 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.General: Lay insulation boards over entire surface to receive membrane roofing, with joints tightly
butted and staggered at least 50% between rows and at least 6” between layers. No joint shall exceed
1/4 inch in width. Do not allow difference in elevation between units at joints to exceed 1/16".
OAA-2020-159 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM 075419-7
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
2.Fill gaps between insulation boards, or between insulation and dissimilar materials, that exceed
1/4 inch in width, with insulation.
3.Provide tapered insulation of slope necessary to create minimum finish roof slopes as indicated on
Drawings. Final slopes less than 1/4" per foot in the field of the roof, before and after maximum
loading, shall not be accepted.
4.Even if not shown on Drawings, provide crickets or saddles that are needed to maintain a positive
water flow to drains, with minimum finish roof slope indicated on Drawings but not less than 1/4”
per foot, before or after roof deflection under full design load. Install additional tapered
insulation as necessary to assure the required flow. Take special care to correct flow patterns at
rooftop equipment.
5.Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does
not restrict flow of water.
6.Drive the screws perpendicular to the structural deck (not to the face of the insulation).
7.No more insulation shall be placed than can be covered with roofing membrane before the end of
the day’s work or before the onset of inclement weather.
B.Mechanically fasten the insulation using FMRC-approved spacing, usually a minimum of 1 approved
fastener for every 4 square feet of roof insulation board.
3.05 COVER BOARD INSTALLATION
A.Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints
staggered between rows. Offset cover board joints of from joints of insulation below a minimum of 6
inches in each direction.
1.Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting
sloping roof decks.
2.At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump. Trim cover board so that water flow is
unrestricted.
3.Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations.
B.Mechanically fasten the insulation and cover boards where cover boards using FMRC-approved
spacing, usually a minimum of 1 approved fastener for every 4 square feet of roof insulation board.
3.06 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A.General:
1.Install roofing membrane and flashings, with adhesive, sealants, splicing cements, mastics,
fasteners and other accessory materials as recommended by producer of roof membrane, in
accordance with details, specifications and best practices recommended by membrane producer.
2.Follow all recommendations and comply with all precautions specified by roofing producer
except that where conflict occurs between producer’s recommendations and these specifications,
the more stringent requirement shall prevail.
3.Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
4.Install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s Peel Stop Installation requirements as
required by manufacturer.
5.Application techniques may vary as long as the requirements described within this specification
are met:
a.Position the prefabricated roof section over the area to be covered without stretching.
Allow membrane to relax a minimum of 30 minutes prior to bonding.
075419-8 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
b.Fold the roof section back onto itself to expose half of the roof area to be covered by that
section.
c.Apply adhesive in front of the fold along its length. Be careful not to apply more of the
adhesive than can be covered prior to the adhesive setting up. Start with moderate amounts
of adhesive and adjust the amount as you get a feel for how fast the adhesive is setting up.
d.Lift the top layer of membrane and, starting at the fold, use a stiff squeegee or broom to
push the membrane into the adhesive. Care must be used to avoid wrinkles and air
pockets. Apply the membrane to cover the adhesive that has been applied and then repeat
steps “c” and “d” until the first half of the roof section is completed.
e.Repeat steps “c” and “d” for the second half of the roof section.
f.As each new roof section is added, overlap the adjacent sheets a minimum of 3 to 6
inches.
g.Do not contaminate the membrane where seams are to be welded together.
h.Do not thin adhesives.
6.Hot Air Welding:
a.Calibration: Do not begin welding with robot welders until tests on membrane scraps
have established the correct temperature, welder weight and speed of application
necessary for consistent, strong and continuous welds.
b.Position the membrane to allow an overlap of the top membrane onto the bottom
membrane, a minimum of 4 inches. Ensure the welding area is clean and free of foreign
debris.
c.Weld the top membrane to the bottom membrane using a hand-held welder or an
automatic welding machine and silicone roller. A minimum 1½ inch wide continuous
weld is required.
d.All field weld seams should be inspected with a tack claw and all deficiencies repaired.
e.Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet after field welded seams are tested and
approved.
7.Edge Attachment: In addition to adhesive application, mechanically attach edges of membrane
all around roof edges and roof openings, and at terminations, using screws and bonding plates
and/or termination strips according to membrane producer’s recommendations and approved
details.
a.Provide a continuous bead of sealant under edge of roofing membrane that terminates
under metal roof edge.
8.Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with
clamping ring.
3.07 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A.Flashing:
1.The previous sections, which outlined acceptable products and proper substrate preparation, also
apply to the walls.
2.The membrane is to be adhered as follows:
a.Walls:
1)Adhesive must be applied to both the wall/substrate and to the membrane. The
minimum coverage is 90 square feet per gallon between both surfaces. The actual
coverage may vary depending upon the type of substrate and atmospheric
conditions.
OAA-2020-159 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM 075419-9
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2)Do not adhere the same sheet of membrane that is covering the roof deck to a wall.
Instead, use a separate sheet, with fastening tabs and mechanically fasten through
one of the sheets at the roof-to-wall transition.
3)Provide mechanical fasteners and attachment spacing as recommended by
membrane manufacturer.
4)A row of mechanical fasteners (with termination bar) is required at all transitions
on the wall except at the top if the membrane will extend to the outside face of the
wall. These rows of fasteners can be installed through fastening tabs on
prefabricated sheets.
5)Fasten termination bars a maximum of 12" o.c. and within 2" of ends of units, using
neoprene washers with fasteners appropriate to substrate. Allow expansion space
between units of 3/16" when metal temperature is 70°F or below and 1/8" when
above 70°F. Provide sealant at top sealant ledge of termination bar.
b.Roof Penetrations:
1)Mechanical fastening is required at all roof penetrations. These include, but are not
limited to, pipes, drains, curbs and expansion joints.
2)Refer to manufacturer’s detail drawings for proper termination at roof penetrations.
c.Walkway Pads: Install membrane manufacturer’s recommended walkway pad in
locations shown and in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Heat weld to
substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and detail drawings.
B.Counterflashings, metal edges, and other perimeter or penetration sheet metal work shall be properly
fastened and sealed to maintain a watertight condition.
C.Temporary Closures: Install as needed to prevent water from flowing beneath the roof system during
breaks in installation such as due to inclement weather. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for
materials and methods.
3.08 GREASE “APRON” INSTALLATION
A.Grease aprons shall be installed around the kitchen exhaust hoods indicated on Drawings to protect
roofing membrane. Grease aprons shall extend from the exhaust fan curb to a point at least four feet out
from base of curb, on all sides.
B.Prior to installation of apron, clean roof membrane according to membrane manufacturer’s
recommendations. Do not use cleaning products that will adversely affect the adhesion of the apron
membrane.
C.Immediately after cleaned membrane has completely dried, fully adhere grease apron to roof membrane
surface with 100% adhesive coverage. Apply lap sealant to all cut edges of sheet. Lap sealant shall
cover and seal all edges that expose membrane’s reinforcing scrim.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
D.Maintain roof membrane system manufacturer’s workmanship quality control program throughout the
installation.
E.Seam Testing:
1.Seams: Probe ALL lap edges with approved tool and repair all edges which accept the probe;
AND cut out and test no less than 1 cross strip of seam immediately after each startup of heat
welder, including startups after break times, and major changes in weather. Take additional cuts
at irregular areas, T-joints and hand-welded areas.
2.Records of Tests: Save the test strips and label each one with date and time of test. Indicate on a
copy of Shop Drawing plans where each test strip was cut, and submit a copy of test locations to
Owner.
075419-10 PVC ROOFING SYSTEM OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
F.Final Roof Inspection:
1.Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on
completion to verify compliance with performance and warranty requirements.
G.Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not
comply with specified requirements.
H.Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or
additional work complies with specified requirements.
3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B.Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C.Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
D.Remove roof construction rubble, debris, and excess roofing materials and containers.
END 075419.
OAA-2020-159 METAL ROOFING 076113-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 076113 - METAL ROOFING
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Standing seam metal roofing and trim.
2.Provision of underlayments for metal roofing.
3.Installation of insulation for metal roofing.
4.Snow guards for metal roofing.
5.Sealants required to make systems leakproof.
6.Canopy soffit.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Roof decking for canopy..............................................................................................Section 053100.
2.Exterior insulation & finish system (EIFS)..................................................................Section 072400.
3.Furnishing insulation for metal roofing system ...........................................................Section 075419.
4.Sealants for general construction .................................................................................Section 079200.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer: Company specializing in Architectural Sheet Metal Products with ten (10) years minimum
experience.
B.Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by
manufacturer. The Foreman shall have 3 years’ successful experience in the installation of metal roofing of
similar type and equivalent scope.
C.Compatible Materials: All materials and accessories furnished shall be approved and recommended by the roof
panel manufacturer.
D.Details Not Shown On Construction Documents: Shall comply with applicable recommendations and details of
the manufacturer, “Construction Details” by NRCA and “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” by SMACNA.
E.UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment (if on-site roll forming is used): UL-certified, portable roll-
forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-
formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A.Make submittals per provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications, installation instructions and recommendations for the
following products:
1.Metal Roofing System and Metal Soffit System Components: For each, submit construction details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, trim, and finishes for each type
of panel and accessory. Include performance data on the panels, anchor clips and fasteners.
2.Snow guards and attachments.
3.Underlayments and attachments.
4.Sealants and accessories.
076113-2 METAL ROOFING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
C.Shop Drawings for Metal Roofing System: Submit for review, complete Shop Drawings and erection details
specific to the project. Scales shall be sufficiently large to show all components clearly.
1.Show methods of erection, diagrammatic plan and elevations, sections and details, anticipated loads,
flashings, sealants, gauges, finishes and interfaces with surrounding materials.
a.Details shall include edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment
system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special conditions.
2.Show details of EVERY intersection. Show step flashings. Use isometric and perspective drawings of
non-standard conditions.
3.Show how seals to reject water between components are to be made continuous.
4.Show fastener patterns for roof panel attachment clips. Show patterns at field, perimeter and corner
conditions.
D.Shop Drawings for Metal Soffit System: Submit for review, complete Shop Drawings and erection details
specific to the project. Scales shall be sufficiently large to show all components clearly.
1.Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal soffit panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel
profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special
details.
E.Submit calculations, sealed by engineer registered in the state in which the project resides, verifying roof panel
and attachment method resists wind pressures imposed on it pursuant to applicable building codes.
F.Samples: Submit 2 sets of samples of each initial color selection, using the specified finish on the same metal as
will be used for the roofing and soffit panels. Sample sets shall illustrate the full range of color variation to be
expected. Final selection and approval of color will be made by Owner.
G.Qualification Data: For Manufacturer and Installer.
H.Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Submit
results indicating compliance with minimum requirements of the following performance tests:
1.Air Infiltration ASTM E 1680 and ASTM E 283.
2.Water Infiltration ASTM E 1646 and ASTM E 331.
3.Wind Uplift - U.L. 580.
I.Manufacturer’s Warranties: Submit manufacturer’s written warranties at completion of work.
1.04.DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package
metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B.Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C.Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal
panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D.Panels with strippable film must not be stored in the open, exposed to the sun. Retain strippable protective
covering on metal panels until installation. Remove as panels are being installed. Do not leave the film on
installed panels.
OAA-2020-159 METAL ROOFING 076113-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.05.JOB CONDITIONS
A.Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit
assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty
requirements.
1.06.COORDINATION
A.Coordinate metal roof panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other
adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.07.WARRANTY
A.Roofing and Soffit Warranties: Manufacturer's standard forms in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of metal roofing panel system and metal soffit panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b.Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2.Warranty Periods: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.
B.Warranties on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard forms in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or
replace metal roofing panels and metal soffit panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied
finishes within specified warranty period.
1.Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.Color fading more than 9 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b.Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c.Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2.Warranty Periods: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.
C.Installer Warranty: Furnish a written warranty signed by the Roof Panel System Installer guaranteeing materials
and workmanship for watertightness of the roofing system, flashings, penetrations, and against all leaks.
1.Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.Structural Performance: Provide metal roofing panel system and metal soffit panels system capable of
withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to UL 580:
1.Wind Loads and Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2.Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span.
B.Weather Resistance of Roof: The roof system shall have been tested to meet the following criteria:
1.Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646
and ASTM E 331 at 15 lbf/sq. ft. test-pressure difference.
2.Air Infiltration: No more than .06 cfm per square foot of panel when tested according to ASTM E 1680
and ASTM E 283 at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. test-pressure difference.
3.Wind Uplift Resistance: All system materials and installation methods shall comply with requirements of
UL Class 90 Uplift Rating criteria when tested in accordance with UL 580.
C.Thermal Movement of Metal Roof Panel System and Metal Soffit Panel System: : Allow for thermal
movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
076113-4 METAL ROOFING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base
calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.02.ROOF SYSTEM TYPES AND MANUFACTURERS
A.General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting
raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports
using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight
installation.
1.Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514.
B.Vertical-Rib, Batten Seamed Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges
and a flat pan between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports
using concealed clips located under one side of the panels, aligning vertical ribs and snapping on batten seam
cap. System shall be capable of being curved to radii shown.
1.Basis of Design Product: Curved Tee-Panel by Berridge Manufacturing Company or Architect approved
comparable product.
2.Panel Width: 12-3/4 inch on center seam spacing.
3.Panel Length: Panels shall be full length required without end splices.
4.Rib Height: 1 inch.
5.Battens: Snap-on batten seams shall contain the Berridge factory-applied Extruded Vinyl Weather Seal
Insert to prevent siphoning of moisture through the standing seam.
6.Panel Material: Minimum 24 gauge, aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process
to comply with ASTM A 755.
7.Exposed Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer in color as selected by Owner from Berridge Standard or
Premium Colors.
8.Anchorage: Concealed Folding Tee-Clips and fasteners to accommodate thermal movement. Folding
Tee-Clip shall be a minimum of 0.0149 inch aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet.
9.System Uplift Rating: UL Class 90, Construction No. 296 with UL accepted alterations to utilize metal
deck. Refer to UL letter response to Berridge Manufacturing Company’s request for Engineering
Evaluation dated December 1, 1997.
2.03.ROOF SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
A.General: Furnish the roof panel manufacturer’s standard fasteners, brackets, anchoring devices, spacers,
flashings, closures, adhesives, joint sealers, expansion joints and other components needed for a complete,
permanently weatherproof installation. Use materials that are non-corrosive, non-deteriorating, compatible with
panel faces and approved by roofing panel manufacturer.
B.Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645; cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet,
ASTM A 653, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation for 16 gauge material or ASTM A 792,
Class AZ50 coating designation for 22 or 24 gauge material, unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's
standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system. Sections shall be roll formed to
match curvature of canopy as necessary.
1.Provide “Z” purlins meeting the following requirements:
a.Gauge of “Z” purlins, purlin spacing and fastener type and spacing shall be determined by
performance requirements and governing code.
b.Depth of “Z” purlins shall match that of insulation.
c.Length of “Z: purlin legs shall be determined by pitch of metal deck.
OAA-2020-159 METAL ROOFING 076113-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
C.Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, roof
edges/ fasciae, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match
material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.
1.Closures: Provide closures at eaves, fabricated of same metal as metal panels.
D.Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.
E.Insulation: As specified in Section 075419 “PVC Roofing System”.
F.Roof Edges, Flashing and Trim: Provide roof edges, flashing and trim formed from same material and gauge as
metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are
not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, fasciae, and fillers. Unless noted otherwise, finish roof edges, flashing and
trim with same finish system and color as adjacent metal panels.
G.Roof Panel Attachment Clips: UL-rated, not less than 0.0149 inch thick, aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel
sheet, with at least 2 fasteners for attachment to structure.
1.Anchor Clip Design: Allow for noiseless expansion and contraction of roof panels due to temperature
changes.
H.Panel Fasteners: Ring shank or screw shank zinc-coated steel, corrosion resisting steel, zinc cast head, or nylon
capped steel, type and size as approved for the applicable loading requirements and materials to be fastened.
Provide washers where required by manufacturer. Fasteners shall be concealed where possible, fasteners shall
be exposed only where approved on Shop Drawings. Exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel.
I.Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are
nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.
1.Berridge “Vinyl Weatherseal Insert”.
2.Joint Sealant: Silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal
panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
J.Snow Guards: Continuous aluminum rail system manufactured by LMCurbs Div. of Longview Mechanical
Contractors, Longview, Texas, tel: 800-284-1412. System shall consist of a “S5! SnoRail” supported on “S 5”
clips (of appropriate type for roof system provided) mounted to roof seam flanges without piercing the metal
roofing, or similar “Snobar” system by Action Mfg, Englewood, Colorado, Tel: 800-711-9724.
2.04.ROOF SYSTEM FABRICATION
A.Roof system panels shall be site-formed from pre-finished coiled stock with the Berridge Model SS-14 (Curved
Tee-Panel), Portable Roll Former in continuous lengths with a radius to conform to solid-sheathed curved
substrate.
1.Field fabricate panels and accessories to meet indicated performance requirements, to comply with
indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements, and to be warranted as specified by
panel manufacturer.
B.Protection: Strippable film shall be applied to the top side of all prefinished metal to protect the finish during
fabrication, shipping and field handling. This strippable film MUST be removed immediately before installation.
C.Trim Items: Factory formed from the same material, gauge and finish as the roofing panels except that temper
may be reduced to facilitate forming.
1.Metal fascia, trim, etc. at curved face of canopy shall be constructed without joints in exposed face.
D.Flashings: Factory formed or field formed from the same material, gauge and finish as the roofing panels except
that temper may be reduced to facilitate forming.
076113-6 METAL ROOFING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
E.Furnish roof panels in lengths extending from eave to eave without joints.
F.Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations
and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions,
metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1.Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2.Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply
with SMACNA standards.
3.Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from
compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer.
4.Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal panel manufacturer
for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
5.Except as approved otherwise, fabricate joints so that fasteners will be concealed from the weather.
Fabricate items so that fasteners pass only through predrilled holes.
2.05.SOFFIT SYSTEM TYPES AND MANUFACTURERS
A.General: Provide factory-formed soffit panels designed for exterior soffits and field assembled by lapping and
interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using
concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for a complete installation.
B.Metal Soffit Panels: Solid panels formed with a flat pan between panel edges; with a flush joint between panels.
1.Basis of Design Product: Thin Line Soffit Panel by Berridge Manufacturing Company or Architect
approved comparable product.
2.Panel Width: 3-5/8 inch coverage.
3.Panel Length: Panels shall be full length required without end splices.
4.Seam Height: 3/8 inch.
5.Panel Texture: Smooth, flat.
6.Fastening System: Concealed.
7.Panel Material: Minimum 24 gauge, aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process
to comply with ASTM A 755.
8.Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer in color as selected by Owner from Berridge Standard or
Premium Colors.
2.06.SOFFIT SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
A.General: Furnish the soffit panel manufacturer’s standard fasteners, brackets, anchoring devices, spacers,
flashings, closures, adhesives, joint sealers, expansion joints and other components needed for a complete,
permanently weatherproof installation. Use materials that are non-corrosive, non-deteriorating, compatible with
panel faces and approved by soffit panel manufacturer.
B.Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645; cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet,
ASTM A 653, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation for 16 gauge material or ASTM A 792,
Class AZ50 coating designation for 22 or 24 gauge material, unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's
standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal soffit panel system.
C.Soffit Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight soffit panel system
including trim, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of
metal panels unless otherwise indicated.
OAA-2020-159 METAL ROOFING 076113-7
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
D.Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material and gauge as metal soffit panels as
required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to,
drips, eaves, rakes, intersections with walls and supporting steel structure, and fillers. Unless noted otherwise,
finish trim with same finish system and color as adjacent metal soffit panels.
E.Soffit Panel Attachment: Self-tapping, corrosion resistant screws designed to withstand design loads.
1.Panel anchors shall be concealed. Anchors for flashing and trim shall be concealed where possible.
Where not possible, provide exposed stainless steel fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels
by means of factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
F.Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are
nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.
2.07.SOFFIT SYSTEM FABRICATION
A.General: Fabricate and finish metal soffit panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard
procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory
testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. Provide soffit panels
profile for full length of panel.
1.Soffit panels shall include a channel drain interlock.
B.Protection: Strippable film shall be applied to the exposed side of all prefinished metal to protect the finish
during fabrication, shipping and field handling. This strippable film MUST be removed immediately before
installation.
C.Furnish soffit panels in lengths extending from canopy end to wall without joints.
D.Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations
and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions,
metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1.Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2.Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form
seams, and solder.
3.Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply
with SMACNA standards.
4.Flashings and Trim: Factory formed or field formed from the same material, gauge and finish as the
soffit panels except that temper may be reduced to facilitate forming.
5.Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces
of accessories exposed to view.
6.Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from
compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
a.Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal soffit panel
manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.08.ROOF SYSTEM AND SOFFIT SYSTEM FINISHES
A.Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
B.Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are
within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
076113-8 METAL ROOFING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C.Roof Panels, Soffit Panels, Roof Edges and Fasciae, Exposed Flashings, Trim and Accessories:
1.Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility, and
longevity as specified by the coating manufacturer.
2.Exposed Side Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer complying with AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish
containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat applied by panel manufacturer on
a continuous coil coating line, with a dry film thickness of 0.75± 0.05 mil over 0.2± 0.05 mil primer coat,
to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95± 0.10 mil.
3.Concealed Side Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of
0.35 mil.
3.EXECUTION
3.01.PREPARATION
A.The installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which metal roofing and metal soffit will be
installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with recommendations and instructions of metal roof panel and
soffit panel manufacturer.
C.Coordinate metal roofing and metal soffit installations with adjoining work to provide a permanently leakproof,
secure and noncorrosive installation.
D.Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, spacers and other miscellaneous panel support members
and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.02.METAL PANEL ROOF INSTALLATION
A.Insulation: Install rigid insulation to meet requirements of UL Class 90 Uplift Rating criteria when tested in
accordance with UL 580.
B.Underlayment: Cover entire roof area with underlayment (over insulation). Apply in shingle fashion to shed
water, and with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
C.Install metal roof panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations
indicated and conform to standards set forth in the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA, in
order to achieve a watertight installation. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated.
Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and
structural movement.
D.Install panels in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines are plumb.
E.Install starter and edge trim before installing roof panels. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.
F.Remove strippable plastic protection immediately before beginning installation.
G.Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each
standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer, in
accordance with approved shop drawings, and as required to meet wind uplift load requirements, but a
maximum of 24” on center.
1.Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.
OAA-2020-159 METAL ROOFING 076113-9
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2.Install pressure plates, if required, at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
3.Batten Seam Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by installing batten seam cap and completely
engage factory-applied vinyl weatherseal.
H.Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal
expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
I.Install sealants for preformed roofing panels as approved on shop drawings.
J.Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials. Where dissimilar metals contact
each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel
manufacturer.
K.Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels
indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates
and achieve waterproof and weather-resistant performance.
1.Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
L.Trim Conditions: Seal all joints using methods recommended by panel manufacturer and as designated on Shop
Drawings. Make seals continuous for leakproof construction, paying particular attention to where metal touches
metal and where metals bend. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight, weatherproof
installation. Remove excess sealant as the work progresses.
M.Fascia: Secure fascia panels in place using concealed fasteners. Use no exposed fasteners except as detailed.
Install work watertight, making allowances for expansion and contraction. Install fasteners snug; but do not
over-tighten. Finished work shall be free of waves, warps, buckles, fastening stress, and distortions.
N.Protect installed roof panels and trim from damage caused by adjacent construction until completion of
installation.
O.Remove and replace any panels or components which are damaged beyond successful repair.
3.03.METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION
A.Remove strippable plastic protection immediately before beginning installation.
B.Install metal soffit panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations
indicated and conform to standards set forth in the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA, in
order to achieve a watertight installation. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise required to
achieve curve indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1.Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal soffit panels. Install soffit panels in such a manner
that panel joint lines are true to building lines.
2.Flash and seal metal soffit panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-
tapping screws. Do not begin installation until flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are
installed.
3.Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.
4.Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
5.Fasteners: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior.
6.Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners, concealed within lap, at each lapped joint. Install screw
fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to install screws without damage panels.
Install screws in predrilled holes at spacing required to achieve performance requirements but not more
than 24 inches on center.
7.Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
076113-10 METAL ROOFING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
8.Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
9.Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are
permanently watertight.
a.Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line
and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing
and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof performance.
b.Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of an edge of
soffit system or an intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not
be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
3.04.SNOW GUARD INSTALLATION
A.Attachment: Apply snow rail system in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, clamping onto
every seam. Locate clamp line 8" to 12" from roof edge and so that clamps will not prevent movement of roof
panels with respect to roof panel hold-down clips.
3.05.DAMAGED MATERIALS
A.Repair or replace any panels and/or trim that have been damaged.
B.Minor damage to finish may be repaired in accordance with panel manufacturer’s recommendations.
C.Architect shall be sole judge of acceptability of repairs to damaged finishes; replace panels which cannot be
repaired to satisfaction of Architect.
3.06.CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless
otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel
installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition
during construction.
B.After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
C.The Installer shall advise the Contractor of provisions required for protection of the completed metal roofing
during the remainder of the construction period.
D.Strippable plastic films furnished for protection during shipment shall not be used for protection after
installation.
END 076113.
OAA-2020-159 SHEET METAL WORK 076200-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL WORK
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Metal coping and roof edges.
2.Metal canopy fascia.
3.Metal soffits.
4.Overflow scupper.
5.Gutter and downspout.
6.Miscellaneous break metal shapes as detailed.
7.Metal flashings and counterflashings as detailed.
8.Sealants required to make systems leakproof.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Wood framing, nailers, curbs and blocking...............................................Section 061000.
2.PVC roofing system...................................................................................Section 075419.
3.Standing seam metal roof...........................................................................Section 076113.
4.Sealants for general construction...............................................................Section 079200.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.References: References shall refer to the most recent edition of each standard.
1.ANSI/SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing
Systems.
2.SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry Standards.
3.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
4.FM Global (FM): Perimeter Flashing, FM Data Sheet 1-49.
5.Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA).
B.Details Not Shown On Construction Documents: Shall comply with applicable recommendations and
details of the manufacturer, “Construction Details” by NRCA and “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”
by SMACNA.
C.Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall material, joints
and seams to provide leakproof, secure and non-corrosive installation.
D.Source Limitations:
1.Obtain metal copings, roof edges and canopy fascias approved by manufacturer providing
roofing-system warranty specified in Section 075419 “PVC Roofing System.”
2.Provide prefinished break metal from manufacturer of metal copings, roof edges and canopy
fascias to ensure finishes match.
1.03.MOCKUP
A.Refer to Section 047300 “Manufactured Stone Veneer” and coordinate with other Contractors in the
furnishing of materials for and the installation of the specified mockup.
1.04.SUBMITTALS
A.Make submittals per provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.”
076200-2 SHEET METAL WORK OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data and installation instructions for each pre-
manufactured item. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes.
C.Samples: Submit 2 complete sets of each proposed color and finish, using the specified finish on the
same metal as will be used for the sheet metal work. Final approval of color and finish will be made by
Culver's corporate offices.
D.Shop Drawings: Submit for review complete Shop Drawings specific to the project. Scales shall be
sufficiently large to show all components clearly.
1.Show details of flashings, roof curbs, copings, roof edges, fascia, gutters, downspouts, sealants,
gauges, finishes and interfaces with surrounding materials.
2.Clearly detail profile, joining, length of sections, fastening installation details, location of
accessory items, flashing details and dimensions. Distinguish between plant- and field-
assembled work.
3.Include details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction
of expansion and contraction.
4.Indicate profile and pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments.
E.Product Test Reports: For copings and roof-edge flashings, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, indicating compliance with performance requirements herein.
F.Submit manufacturer’s written guarantee at completion of work.
1.05.DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.Deliver all materials in their original unopened containers with all markings intact.
B.Do not store sheet metal work in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or
other surface damage. Store sheet metal work away from uncured concrete and masonry. Protect from
water and extreme humidity.
C.Protect strippable protective covering on prefinished sheet metal work from exposure to sunlight and
high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of sheet metal work installation.
D.Store cements, adhesives and sealants in the manner and temperature range recommended by the
individual Manufacturers.
1.06.WARRANTY
A.Roofing System Warranty: Sheet metal work immediately adjacent to roofing membrane shall be
included in the roofing system warranty in Section 075419 “PVC Roofing System.”
B.Non-Pro-Rated Warranty on Fluoropolymer Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace
pre-finished sheet metal work that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1.Exposed Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b.Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c.Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2.Finish Warranty Period: 35 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.General: Sheet metal work shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced
movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,
OAA-2020-159 SHEET METAL WORK 076200-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal work shall not rattle, leak, or
loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B.Sheet Metal Standard for Sheet Metal Work: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.FM Approvals Listing (only if project is insured by FM – confirm with Owner): Manufacture and
install copings and roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for
windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved
by FM Approvals.
D.Design Standards: Manufacture and install metal copings and roof-edges tested according to SPRI ES-
1 and FM Approvals Class 180. Sheet Metal Work shall be capable of resisting the design pressures
indicated on the Drawings.
E.Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to
prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due
to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.02.MATERIALS / PRODUCTS
A.Roof Copings: “Flat Coping” by Exceptional Metals.
1.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet (Galvalume Plus) Base / Cleat: Provide 22 gauge aluminum-zinc
alloy-coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40
with clear, organic thermally cured resin applied to both sides of sheet.
2.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet (Galvalume) Cover: Provide 24 gauge aluminum-zinc alloy-coated
steel sheet according to ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; prepainted by
coil-coating process.
3.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Finish: Factory applied two-coat fluoropolymer complying with
AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in
color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating
and resin manufacturers' written instructions. Color as noted on drawings.
B.Roof Edges: “2-Piece Snap-On Compression” by Exceptional Metals.
1.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet (Galvalume Plus) Base / Cleat: Provide 22 gauge aluminum-zinc
alloy-coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40
with clear, organic thermally cured resin applied to both sides of sheet.
2.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet (Galvalume) Cover: Provide 24 gauge aluminum-zinc alloy-coated
steel sheet according to ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; prepainted by
coil-coating process.
3.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Finish: Factory applied two-coat fluoropolymer complying with
AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in
color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating
and resin manufacturers' written instructions. Color as noted on drawings.
C.Canopy Roof Edges: “2-Piece Snap-On Compression” by Exceptional Metals.
1.Base / Cleat: Provide one of the following materials as recommended by roof edge manufacturer
to be compatible with cover.
076200-4 SHEET METAL WORK OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
a.22 gauge aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet (Galvalume Plus) according to
ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 with clear, organic thermally
cured resin applied to both sides of sheet.
b.Aluminum extrusion complying with ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by
manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
2.Aluminum Cover: Aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with
manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and
performance required; with embossed surface.
a.Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or
thicker.
b.Sheet Thickness: Minimum 0.040 inch thick.
D.Drip Edge (at canopy with gutters): “T-Edge” as manufactured by Exceptional Metals.
1.Cleat (where required by manufacturer): Provide one of the following materials as
recommended by roof edge manufacturer to be compatible with cover.
a.22 gauge aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet (Galvalume Plus) according to
ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 with clear, organic thermally
cured resin applied to both sides of sheet.
b.Aluminum extrusion complying with ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by
manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
2.Aluminum Drip Edge and Splice Plates: Aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209, alloy
as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming
operations and performance required; with embossed surface.
a.Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or
thicker.
b.Sheet Thickness: Minimum 0.040 inch thick.
E.Canopy Scuppers: “2-Piece Snap-On Spill-Out Scupper” by Exceptional Metals.
1.Constructed of 18” long vinyl coated base, two outside membrane corners, and a 24” metal cover
and a spill out skirt. Metal cover shall match material, gauge, profile and finish of Canopy Roof
Edge.
F.Canopy Break Metal: 0.040 aluminum sheet of material, gauge and finish to match canopy roof edge.
G.Main Roof Scuppers and Factory Painted Break Metal: Provide 24 gauge aluminum-zinc alloy-coated
steel sheet according to ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; prepainted by coil-
coating process.
1.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Finish: Factory applied two-coat fluoropolymer complying with
AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in
color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating
and resin manufacturers' written instructions. Color as noted on drawings.
H.Roof Copings, Roof Edges - General:
1.Length: 10 ft lengths.
2.Accessories: Held in place by continuous cleats nailed to wood blocking. Joints shall be backed
with concealed splice plates at least 8" wide, fabricated with end dams and having
OAA-2020-159 SHEET METAL WORK 076200-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
gaskets to prevent water migrating from the joint area. Corners shall be mitered and seamed.
Support the center of coping lengths to resist mechanical damage.
I.Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface, 2B
(bright, cold rolled) finish, 26 gauge.
J.Soffit: Factory formed aluminum panels, 12" wide with “V” jointed, tongue and groove connections
and required trim. Panels shall be vented. Finish shall be a factory applied baked enamel in
manufacturer’s standard color selected by Architect. Panels shall be “System 3” Panels as
manufactured by Rollex Corporation or approved equal.
K.Gutters: Provide size and profile indicated on Drawings. Make all joints water-tight.
1.At Runner’s Canopy: Aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with
manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and
performance required; with embossed surface.
a.Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or
thicker.
b.Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Fabricate from minimum 0.032 inch thick aluminum
finished to match fascia canopy panels.
c.Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches: Fabricate from minimum 0.040 inch thick aluminum
finished to match fascia canopy panels.
2.At Dumpster Shed: Galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 361 or ASTM A 446, with G90
zinc coating, auto corrective leveled, with manufacturer’s standard embossed texture.
a.Factory applied two-coat fluoropolymer complying with AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer
finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare,
pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions. Color as noted on drawings.
b.Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Fabricate from minimum 0.022 inch thick (26 gauge)
galvanized steel pre-finished to match roof edge.
c.Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches: Fabricate from minimum 0.028 inch thick (24 gauge)
galvanized steel pre-finished to match roof edge.
3.Length: Fabricate in minimum 8 foot long sections
4.Accessories: Provide end pieces, outlet tubes, hanger straps and other accessories as required.
Fabricate expansion joints, expansion joint covers and gutter accessories from same metal and
with same finish as gutters. Provide prefinished inside and outside corners. Size outlet tube to
fit downspout provided.
5.Hanger Straps: Provide minimum 1 inch wide, double thickness flat-stock straps fabricated from
same metal as gutters, with thickness not less 14 gauge. Use hangers of adequate in size and
spacing to support gutters filled with ice. Finish shall be the same type, thickness and color as
gutters. Locate straps at a maximum of 30 inches on center.
L.Downspouts:
1.At Runner’s Canopy: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, smooth mill finish aluminum sheet complying
with ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as
required to suit forming operations and performance required.
a.Unit shall have plain surface and rectangular profile, nominal 4” x 5” size, with open face
in bottom 4 feet above elbow. Provide approx. 45° exit elbow. Downspouts shall be
primed for field painting.
076200-6 SHEET METAL WORK OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
b.Factory Prime Coating: Pretreat metal with white or light-colored, factory-applied,
baked-on epoxy primer coat; minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil.
2.At Dumpster Shed: 26-gauge factory finished galvanized steel, having plain surface and
rectangular profile, nominal 4” x 5” size, with closed face. Provide approx. 45° exit elbow.
Downspouts shall be factory finished to match gutters.
3.Hanger Straps: Provide hanger straps to anchor downspout to wall at maximum 4’-0” intervals.
Hanger straps shall be of flat-stock, fabricated from same metal as downspouts, of size
recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than 14 gauge. Cut edges
shall be hemmed. Finish shall be the same type, thickness and color as downspouts.
M.Fasteners: Ring-shank or screw-shank hot-dip galvanized nails or carbon steel screws coated with anti-
corrosion coating, sized as required to meet UL 580 Class 60 strength requirements.
1.For Fastening Aluminum: Aluminum or stainless steel nails with annular threads, of sufficient
length to penetrate wood blocking at least 7/8".
2.Anti-Corrosion Coating: Zinc free, hard epoxy, fluoropolymer or other coating meeting or
exceeding FMRC 4470 requirements.
2.03.ACCESSORIES
A.General: Furnish fasteners, brackets, anchoring devices, spacers, flashings, closures, adhesives, joint
sealers, expansion joints and other components needed for a complete, permanently weatherproof
installation. Use materials that are non-corrosive, non-deteriorating, and compatible with panel faces.
B.Sheet Metal Work Sealants:
1.Tapes: Butyl based, not less than 3/4" wide where penetrated by screws.
2.Elastomeric Sealants: ASTM C920 elastomeric, high modulus, non-corrosive sealants bearing
sealant manufacturer’s 20-year guarantee. Provide sealant of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
3.Foam-In-Place Sealants: NOT allowed except to form back-up for liquid sealants and to fill
voids at roof penetrations to inhibit thermal leakage.
4.Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
C.Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
2.04.FABRICATION
A.Metal copings, roof edges and canopy roof edges shall be factory fabricated and finished.
B.Canopy break metal shall be fabricated from either pre-finished coiled stock in the factory or in the
field or from sheet stock formed and finished in the factory.
C.Form and fabricate fascia and trim to the profiles shown and as required for permanent leakproof
construction.
1.Shop-fabricate the materials to the greatest extent possible.
2.Fabricate sheet metal work in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance
requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
3.Provide concealed, noiseless means to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction, located
so as to minimize the possibility of leakage.
4.Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves and avoidable tool marks,
considering the temper and reflectivity of the metal.
OAA-2020-159 SHEET METAL WORK 076200-7
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
5.Except as otherwise shown, fold back the sheet metal to form an open (non-compressed) hem on
the concealed side of exposed edges.
6.Except as approved otherwise, fabricate joints so that fasteners will be concealed from the
weather. Fabricate items so that fasteners pass only through predrilled holes.
a.Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners
on faces exposed to view.
7.Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide
for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
8.Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from
compatible, noncorrosive metal.
a.Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal
standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but
not less than thickness of metal being secured.
9.Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal
with epoxy seam sealer.
10.Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
3.EXECUTION
3.01.PREPARATION
A.The installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which sheet metal work will be
installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.Coordinate sheet metal work with adjoining work to provide a permanently leakproof, secure and
noncorrosive installation.
C.Remove any strippable plastic protection before beginning installation.
3.02.SHEET METAL INSTALLATION
A.Install pre-manufactured items in accordance with manufacturer written installation instructions.
B.Comply with and conform to standards set forth in the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by
SMACNA, in order to achieve a watertight installation.
C.Anchor sheet metal work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use
fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other miscellaneous
items as required to complete sheet metal systems.
D.Attachment to solid sheathing/nailers with concealed appropriate fasteners. Fasteners shall penetrate
substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance
required to meet performance requirements.
E.Install sheet metal work in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines are
plumb without oil-canning, warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
F.Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated
wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal
manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1.Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous
coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
076200-8 SHEET METAL WORK OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.03.ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.Hanging Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach
gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight
with sealant. Slope to downspouts. Do not locate joints above building entry doors.
1.Anchor gutter with gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart to roof deck, unless
otherwise indicated, and loosely lock to front gutter bead.
B.Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints.
1.Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at
top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.
2.Provide elbows and extensions at base of downspout to direct water away from building.
3.04.DAMAGED MATERIALS
A.Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
B.Repair or replace any sheet metal work that has been damaged as directed by Architect.
C.Minor damage to finish may be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect.
END 076200.
OAA-2020-159 JOINT SEALANTS 079200-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Sealant work for all exterior and interior joints, except as required to be completed under other
Sections of the Specifications.
2.Standards for the sealant work specified in other Sections of the Specifications.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Sealants in concrete insolation joints.............................................................Section 033000.
2.Exterior Insulation & Finish System (EIFS).................................................Section 072400.
3.Sealant at roof membrane assembly edges ....................................................Section 075419.
4.Sealant within joints of metal roofing system ...............................................Section 076113.
5.Sealant within joints of sheet metal work......................................................Section 076200.
6.Sealing aluminum entrance system ...............................................................Section 084113.
7.Glazing sealants.............................................................................................Section 088000.
8.Acoustical sealants ........................................................................................Section 092116.
9.Ceramic Tile ..................................................................................................Section 093013.
10.Resinous Flooring..........................................................................................Section 096724.
11.Caulking touchup by painters........................................................................Section 099000.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Compatibility: Before purchasing any sealant specified, investigate its compatibility with the joint
surfaces and other materials in the joint system. Provide only materials that are known to be fully
compatible with the actual installation condition, as affirmed by manufacturer’s published data or
certification.
B.Deliver materials to job site in sealed containers with manufacturer’s original label attached, one brand for
each type of sealant.
C.Applicators: Sealants shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions by skilled
applicators trained in accordance with the Sealant, Water-proofing, and Restoration Institute’s (SWRI)
“Applicator Training Manual.” Submit certificates of SWRI approved training for applicators, upon
request.
D.Scheduling: Apply sealants before paints are applied.
1.03.MOCKUP
A.Refer to Section 047300 “Manufactured Stone Veneer” and coordinate with other Contractors in the
furnishing of materials for and the installation of the specified mockup.
1.04.SUBMITTALS
A.Make submittals under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit 4 copies of manufacturer’s specifications, recommendations and
installation instructions for each type of sealant and associated miscellaneous material required.
079200-2 JOINT SEALANTS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.MATERIALS
A.Sealant for General Use and for Thresholds: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, M,
A, O. Silicone base, single component, neutral curing; Shore A hardness between 15 and 50; non-
staining; non-bleeding. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.Pecora; “890FTS”
2.G.E. (Momentive); “SCS9000 Silpruf NB”
3.Dow Corning; “DOWSIL 756 SMS Building Sealant”
B.Sealant for Joints in Floors: Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant:
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T, non-staining, non-bleeding. Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.Master Builders Solutions from BASF; MasterSeal SL 1.
2.Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201.
3.Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 952.
4.Sika Corporation. Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1CSL.
5.Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45SSL.
C.Sealants Around Food Preparation and Other Interior Wet Areas: Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component,
Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.Dow Corning Corporation; DOWSIL 786 Silicone Sealant.
2.GE Advanced Materials; Silicones; SCS1700 Sanitary.
3.Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200.
4.Pecora; 898NST.
D.Sealant Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s extended line of colors.
E.Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock of closed-cell polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed
polyurethane foam, extruded polyolefin foam with non-absorptive skin, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam
or other flexible, permanent, durable non-absorptive material recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
1.Provide size of rod that will form optimum shape of sealant at bottom of joint and will minimize
possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed.
2.Use adhesive backed 1/4" quarter round backer rod for all fillet joints, including fillet joints around
exterior side of windows.
F.Joint Cleaners: Type recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the joint surfaces to be sealed.
G.Joint Primer/Sealer: Type recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the joint surfaces involved.
3.EXECUTION
3.01.INSPECTION
A.Examine all surfaces prior to application for suitability to receive sealant work.
B.Notify the General Contractor of any conditions detrimental to a satisfactory application that cannot be
corrected by ordinary cleaning and priming.
3.02.PREPARATION
A.Clean joint surfaces free of dirt, oil, grease, moisture, loose mortar and/or other foreign matter
immediately before installation of sealant.
B.Metal surfaces shall be wiped with joint cleaner using “two cloth” method and then dried.
OAA-2020-159 JOINT SEALANTS 079200-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
C.Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with a stiff bristle or fiber brush and blown or brushed clean.
D.Test each proposed combination of sealant and substrate to determine whether or not a primer is required
to achieve the sealant manufacturer's advertised bond strength.
E.When applying primers or sealants that may bleed or stain, mask adjacent surfaces.
3.03.APPLICATION
A.Comply with sealant manufacturer’s printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are
shown or specified. Do not apply to damp surfaces.
B.Prime or seal the joint surfaces wherever recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not allow
primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.
C.Install sealant backer rod except where shown to be omitted. Install backer rod with approved tool
designed to achieve the following uniform depths of sealant (at the thinnest point), unless recommended
otherwise by sealant manufacturer:
1.Sealant in joints 1/4" wide shall be approximately but not less than 1/8" thick.
2.Sealant in joints 3/8" to 1/2" wide shall be not less than 3/16" thick but no thicker than half the
width of the joint.
3.Sealant in joints larger than 1/2" wide shall be not less than 1/4" thick but no thicker than half the
width of the joint.
D.Employ only proven application techniques which will ensure that sealant will be deposited in uniform,
continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete “wetting” of the joint bonding surfaces,
solid to the backing material.
1.Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below
adjoining surfaces.
2.Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a
slight cove so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt.
E.All joints shall be tooled immediately after application and left free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets
and embedded impurities. Use dry tooling techniques unless sealant manufacturer recommends otherwise.
3.04.APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.Provide sealant at both sides of all openings in exterior walls including but not limited to joints around
perimeters of exterior window frames, aluminum entrance framing, door frames, louvers and other
penetrations.
B.Exterior thresholds shall receive two continuous beads of sealant, one near each of the interior and exterior
edges of the threshold.
C.Provide sealant at other joints including, but not limited to, the following:
1.Joints at base of hollow metal door frames. Sealant shall be installed prior to the installation of
floor coverings.
2.Control joints in wall constructions.
3.Cross-joints in all copings, fascias and metal flashings when not sealed within the joint or provided
with a sufficient overlap (min. 4" for an 8" face exposure).
4.Joints around penetrations through interior partitions and walls.
5.Joints where edges of gypsum board abut irregular surfaces.
6.Joints where countertops, cabinetwork, or other built-in work intersect irregular surfaces.
7.Control joints in quarry tile and paver tile floors.
8.Joints between ceramic wall tile and adjacent construction.
079200-4 JOINT SEALANTS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
9.Inside wall corner joints with ceramic tile on both sides of corner.
10.Joint between resinous flooring cove cap and wall surface.
3.05.CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A.Remove all excess material and smears adjacent to joints as work progresses.
B.Protect finished sealant installation until cured.
C.Cutout and remove contaminated sealants, and replace with fresh sealant.
END 079200.
OAA-2020-159 HOLLOW METAL WORK 081113-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL WORK
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Flush steel door for exterior service door(s).
2.Non-rated hollow metal frames for steel door(s).
3.Silencers at doors not receiving weatherstripping.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
4.Grouting-in of hollow metal frames at masonry.......................................Section 042000.
5.Installing frame anchors into masonry......................................................Section 042000.
6.Sealants at hollow metal frame.................................................................Section 079200.
7.Furnishing and installation of door hardware, including thresholds ........Section 087100.
8.Glazing .....................................................................................................Section 088000.
9.Finish painting ..........................................................................................Section 099000.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Provide standard hollow metal work manufactured by a single firm and in compliance with the
recommended specifications of the National Associations of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
(NAAMM) and the Steel Door Institute (SDI), except as may be specified otherwise herein.
B.Performance Standard:
1.Doors manufactured under this Section shall be capable of passing the following ANSI A250.4
tests when conducted on a specimen 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1-3/4":
a.Swing Test: Level A (1,000,000 cycles).
b.Twist Test: 1-1/4” at 300 lbs pressure.
2.Frames manufactured under this Section shall be capable of passing the following ANSI
A250.4 tests when conducted on a specimen 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1-3/4":
c.Swing Test: Level A (1,000,000 cycles).
C.Supplier’s Qualifications: An established door distribution firm certified in writing by the hollow
metal manufacturer as one of their approved suppliers, with at least 3 years’ successful experience in
the supplying and installation of hollow metal work of the type specified.
D.Thermal Performance Testing Standard: ASTM C 1363.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A.Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions and finishes.
C.Shop Drawings:
1.Frames: Include configurations, anchor types and spacings, location of cutouts for hardware,
sizes of reinforcements, shop finishes and finished sizes.
2.Door: Include elevations and locations of internal reinforcements, core construction, cut outs for
glazing (if any), shop finishes and edge closure methods.
D.Product Test Reports: Submit for thermal performance tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
081113-2 HOLLOW METAL WORK OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
E.Submit manufacturer’s letter verifying that the subcontractor supplying the hollow metal work is a
certified agent of the manufacturer.
F.Submit manufacturer’s letter certifying galvanizing weights furnished. Include with the letter a
description of the treatment given to galvanizing in preparation for painting.
1.04.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job site storage.
B.Deliver frame with temporarily attached steel angle shipping bar (“spreader bar”), or other means, to
assure that frame arrives free of wracking and distortion.
C.Upon arrival at site, open wrappings to permit ventilation and inspect door and frame for scratches
and abrasions. Immediately touch up exposed metal with primer of the type applied at factory.
D.Store doors and frames at the building site off floor, under cover. Place units on at least 4" high wood
sills in a manner that will prevent rust and damage.
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.Subject to requirements herein, hollow metal work shall be as manufactured by one of the following:
1.Ceco Door, Assa Abloy
2.Curries Company, Assa Abloy
3.Philipp Manufacturing Company
4.Steelcraft, an Allegion Brand
5.Security Metal Products Corporation
2.02.MATERIALS
A.Pre-Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated commercial quality carbon steel sheets, complying with
ASTM A 653 CS, Type B, coating designation G60 or A60.
B.Frame Anchors: Steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 or ASTM A 1011, hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 153, Class B.
C.Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
D.Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Rust-oleum #254864 Professional Undercoating Brush (for brush
application).
E.Silencers: Equal to Ives #SR64.
F.Primer Paint: Capable of passing ANSI/SDI 250.10 test criteria after curing.
G.Hardware Reinforcements: High grade galvanized steel plates.
2.03.DOOR
A.Construction: ANSI A250.8, Level 3 (extra heavy duty), Model 2 (seamless), flush, 1-3/4" thick,
fully insulated, free of warp. Hinge and lock edge seams shall be mechanically interlocked, welded
and filled, and ground/finished smooth.
1.“Oil canning,” buckles and other imperfections not allowed.
2. Grind and dress exposed welds smooth.
B.Face Sheets: 16-gauge pre-galvanized sheet steel.
C.Core: Vertical steel stiffener with foam-in-place polyurethane insulation.
1.Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not
less than 2.7 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (U-factor of .36) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
OAA-2020-159 HOLLOW METAL WORK 081113-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2.Core Reinforcement: Continuous vertical steel shapes of not less than 22-gauge steel, filling
space between face sheets, and spot welded to core/face sheets.
3.Basis of Design: “Trio-E” Ceco Door by Assa Abloy or comparable product of other approved
manufacturer.
D.Door Size: Fabricate with minimum clearances necessary for operation without binding:
1.3/32" (3/16" max.) at jambs and head.
2.1/8" (3/8" max.) at threshold.
3.3/8" (1/2" max.) at location with no threshold.
4.Doors on continuous hinges will not require mortises for hinges; adjust face size(s) accordingly.
E.Closure Channels: Minimum thickness 0.042 inch (18 gauge) steel. Provide hot-dip galvanized steel
channels where door faces are galvanized. Plastic closures not allowed.
5.Top of Door: Fabricate with channel having downturned legs positioned between the door
faces, flush with top edge of door faces. Continuously seal joints between channel and door
faces to be watertight.
6.Bottoms of Door: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material
as face sheets. Provide weep holes in bottom channel.
F.Openings (if door is noted to have vision panel): At vision openings provide 12-gauge channel frames
inside the door assembly, welded to both faces.
1.Removable Glazing Stops: Rolled steel shapes formed from 20-gauge pre-galvanized steel,
with tight butted corners; formed to finish flush or slightly raised from door face. Prepare for
countersunk screws at minimum of 12" o.c. Install so glazing frame is not removable from the
exterior of the door. SlimTrim glazing trim for 1 inch thick insulating glazing by Ceco Door or
similar product by other approved manufacturers.
2.Furnish flathead zinc, zinc-dichromate or cadmium plated screws for attachment.
2.04.FRAMES
A.Construction: Shop-welded, formed from 14-gauge pre-galvanized steel sheets. Faces, returns and
rabbets at corners shall be continuously saw-mitered and welded.
B.All exposed welds shall be continuous, filling the joint, and ground smooth.
C.Grout Filled Frames:
1.Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames.
2.Frames shall be back coated with corrosion-resistant coating.
D.Floor Anchors: Steel clip-angle of same width and gage as frame with legs welded to back of frame,
or adjustable type. Provide 2 widely spaced 1/4" holes for anchorage to floor.
E.Wall Anchors:
1.At Stud Walls: Welded on 18-gauge steel “Z” angle clips full width of frame, with tab pressed
against back of each frame face.
2.At Masonry Walls: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less
than 18 gauge thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2” X 10” long.
F.Frame Anchor Placement: Provide 3 wall anchors and 1 floor anchor per jamb. Locate bottom wall
anchor just above hinge height and upper wall anchors just below hinge heights. For doors exceeding
3’-8” in width add another wall anchor at the hinge jamb above the top hinge.
2.05.HARDWARE PREPARATION
A.Reinforce for all required hardware with high-grade steel plate reinforcement according to the
following schedule. Use galvanized plates at galvanized doors and frames.
081113-4 HOLLOW METAL WORK OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.Butt hinges: 7-gauge (3/16") x 1-1/4" x 10" (9" on doors).
2.Continuous hinges: None.
3.Closer: 12-gauge.
4.Strike and lock faces: 12-gauge.
5.Lock body: 14-gauge.
6.In lieu of 7-gauge hinge reinforcement plates, a 12-gauge channel may be used, provided that
manufacturer submits test results confirming screw retention capacity is not lessened.
7.Do not spot weld reinforcing plates for butts; fillet weld each side of plate.
8.Size closer reinforcement sufficiently large to receive all major sizes and brands of closers.
9.Provide mortar guards around hardware reinforcing in frames at masonry walls.
B.Drill and tap to receive all items of mortise hardware at the fabricator’s plant, to the extent practicable,
in accordance with the requirements of ANSI A115. Coordinate work with Hardware Supplier for
templates, diameters and locations of screws.
1.Doors on continuous hinges shall not be mortised.
C.Viewers: Install per manufacturer’s written instructions, provide air and moisture seal at face of door.
2.06.SHOP FINISH
A.Doors and frames shall have bonderized, baked-on rust inhibitive prime coat.
B.After fabrication, remove tool marks and surface imperfections. Dress welded joints smooth and
leave cut edges clean, with arrises straight and sharply defined.
C.Touch up all welds and scratches with a zinc dust-zinc oxide primer or zinc rich primer. Apply a
phosphatizing pre-paint treatment (such as Bonderizing) to the thoroughly cleaned zinc and top with a
coat of high grade, rust inhibitive primer.Primers shall be well cured before items are shipped. Touch
up all runs, bare spots and smears.
E.Cured primer, as a minimum, shall be capable of passing ANSI/SDI A 250.10 test criteria.
3.EXECUTION
3.01.INSTALLATION OF DOOR AND FRAME
A.Prior to installation, check and correct frame per NAAMM recommendations for size, swing,
squareness, alignment, twist and plumbness that may affect proper installation.
B.Replace shipping bars at bottom of welded frame with sturdy wood spreader set to assure proper
width of opening. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make
repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
C.Set frame accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, square and true in accordance with NAAMM
Standard HMMA 840.
D.Brace all welded frames in proper alignment until built-in.
E.Install rubber silencers in all silencer holes of frames not scheduled to receive weatherstripping.
F.Secure base anchors and wall anchors rigidly. Set expansion bolts using workmen experienced in
such work. Re-drill improper holes and provide with larger expansion shields.
G.After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth
and undamaged.
OAA-2020-159 HOLLOW METAL WORK 081113-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.02.DOOR INSTALLATION
A.Install doors in accordance with manufacturer’s templates and instructions.
B.Where door is scheduled to be glazed, fasten glazing stops loosely in place with required fasteners,
leaving glazing rabbets ready for installation of glass by glazers.
3.03.TOUCH-UP AND PROTECTION
A.Immediately after installation of frame, sand any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat with a zinc-
dust/zinc-oxide primer. Feather out edges.
B.Immediately after installation of door, re-inspect prime coat on door and frame for scratches and rust.
Cover bare metal with compatible air-drying primer, feathering out edges.
END 081113.
OAA-2020-159 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS 081513-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 8 – DOORS & WINDOWS
SECTION 081513 – PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Pre-hung plastic laminate faced door with aluminum frames.
2.Preparation of plastic laminate-faced doors for hardware.
3.Installation of pre-hung hardware.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Furnishing of door hardware and installation standards...........................Section 087100.
2.Furnishing of coat hook for toilet room stall doors ..................................See Drawings.
3.Installation of hardware other than pre-hung hardware............................Section 087100.
4.Glass and glazing......................................................................................Section 088000.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.In addition to the requirements shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section, doors shall
conform to:
1.Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)-Architectural Woodwork Standards, current edition.
2.NEMA LD 3 – High Pressure Decorative Laminates
3.Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA) - WWDA I.S.1-A - Architectural
Wood Flush Doors; current edition.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A.Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3.Installation methods.
C.Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings coordinated with door frame and hardware requirements.
1.Indicate AWI construction type/grade and construction details, WDMA I.S.1-A performance
grade, door core materials, and plastic laminate selection and grade.
2.Indicate door elevations and locations, materials, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, edge profiles
and finishes, blocking for hardware, and cut outs for glazing.
3.Indicate door frame elevations and locations, materials, profiles, sizes, finishes, construction at
joints, reinforcement for hardware, attachment system and fasteners.
4.Show accessories provided. Indicate hardware to be factory installed.
D.Samples:
1.Verification Samples: Submit 3 veneer samples at least 8" x 10" showing range of patterns and
color variations and sheen of finish.
E.Certificates: Submit with the Shop Drawings a statement signed by an authorized representative of
the door manufacturer certifying that the doors and finishes furnished will conform to the
requirements of this Section.
081513-2 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.04.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.Store products in manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. Inspect doors and frames for
damage upon delivery. Protect from moisture.
B.Deliver doors and frames in weatherproof wrappings.
C.Mark packaged doors with door tag numbers corresponding to approved Shop Drawings.
D.Store doors in dry area, off of floor, with separators between doors to allow air circulation. Comply
with manufacturers environmental limitations.
1.05.JOB CONDITIONS
A.Environmental Limitations:
1.Do not install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete and HVAC system is
operating.
2.Maintain the following temperature and humidity limits during storage, installation and until
Substantial Completion:
a.Temperature: 60 to 80 degrees F.
b.Humidity: 35 to 55 %.
1.06.WARRANTY
A.Provide manufacturer’s “life of the original installation” warranty providing correction of defective
door(s), including veneer delamination, defective materials and finish, core telegraphing, and warping,
cupping and bowing beyond specified installation tolerances, without charge to Owner by way of
repair or replacement with materials meeting original specifications.
B.Warranty shall bear manufacturer’s certification that the installation was inspected prior to issuance of
warranty and that no provisions have been voided or nullified by way of installation or manufacture.
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A.Marlite; 202 Harger Street, Dover, OH 44622. Tel: (330) 343-6621.
B.Substitutions: Comparable products of other manufacturer’s as approved by Architect.
2.02.MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A.Non-Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: Flush wood doors faced with 0.050 inch thick high pressure
plastic laminate.
1.Type: Particleboard core type, complying with AWI Type PC-HPDL-5 and conforming to
WDMA WWDA I.S.1-A; with average 30 pcf density core complying with ANSI A208.1
Grade LD-1.
2.Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS (0.048 inch thick), high pressure plastic laminate,
color and pattern as noted on the drawings.
3.Edge Banding:
a.Full Size Doors: Laminate matching door face on vertical edges, top and bottom edges
sealed.
b.Toilet Stall Doors: Laminate matching door face on all edges.
4.Crossbands: 1/10 inch thick 3-ply wood crossbanding.
5.Total Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
6.Core Edges: Structural composite lumber.
OAA-2020-159 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED DOORS 081513-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
7.Stiles and Rails: Solid hardwood lumber.
8.Stile Width: 1-3/8 inches before trimming.
9.Top & Bottom Rail Heights: 1-3/8 inches before trimming.
10.Factory prefit and premachined for hardware that is not surface applied. Coordinate
measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before
factory machining.
11.Cutouts for lites made at factory; provide matching stops.
12.Face Plane Tolerance (Telegraphing): Variation in surface of face not more than 1/100 inch
from true plane in any 3 inch span.
13.Warp Tolerance: Bow, cup, and twist not more than 1/4 inch in any 42 inches wide by 84
inches high area, or less.
B.Hardware: As specified in Section 087100 “Finish Hardware” and as listed on drawings.
C.Aluminum Door Frames: Marlite AAA (Aluminum Adjustable Architectural) consisting of all
standard components, extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5 and with a clear satin anodized finish, frame
series to fit wall condition.
1.Frame shall have continuous vinyl gasket on stop.
2.Corners shall have tight fitting mitered joints with concealed steel gusset connection.
3.Prepare frames for hardware specified in Section 087100 “Finish Hardware” and on the
Drawings.
4.Provide components as required for actual wall thicknesses at each door/frame condition,
including wall finishes.
3.EXECUTION
3.01.INSTALLATION
A.Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Securely anchor door frames straight, plumb and level without distortion and in accordance with
approved shop drawings. Brace frames in position until permanent anchors are set. After wall
construction is complete, remove braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
C.Install doors in frames plumb and true, without rack, and so doors do not fall open or closed simply
due to gravity.
D.Install doors with all hardware specified in Section 087100 “Finish Hardware” and as listed on
drawings. For toilet room stall doors scheduled on Drawings, include installation of coat hook
specified under toilet accessories.
E.Installation Tolerance: Install doors with not more than 1/8 inch clearance at sides.
3.02.ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.Adjust door and frame for free operation without binding, rack, or warp.
B.Adjust doors in accordance with door manufacturer’s maintenance instructions to swing open and shut
without binding, and to remain in place at any angle without being moved by gravitational influence.
C.Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely or are unable to stay at rest at any point in
their swing.
D.Protection of Completed Work: Protect installed doors and frames from damage or deterioration until
acceptance of the Work. Replace doors and/or frames that have been damaged. Clean doors and
frames just prior to acceptance of the Work.
END 081513.
OAA-2020-159 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 084113-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Aluminum framing for fixed aluminum windows.
2.Aluminum framing for entrance doors, sidelites, transoms and associated windows at entrance
enclosures.
3.Aluminum entrance doors.
4.Service window unit with operating hardware.
5.Preparation for and installation of finish door hardware.
6.Perimeter sealant installation.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Standards for sealants, including installation......................................................Section 079200.
2.Furnishing of and installation standards for hardware........................................Section 087100.
3.Glass and glazing................................................................................................Section 088000.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Thermal break components shall be manufactured to meet the following standards:
1.AAMA QAG 1, “Quality Assurance Processing & Monitoring Guide for Poured and Debridged
Polyurethane Thermal Barriers.”
2.AAMA TIR A8, “Structural Performance of Composite Thermal Barrier Framing Systems.”
3.AAMA 505, “Dry Shrinkage and Composite Performance Thermal Cycling Test Procedure.”
B.Sources of Supply: All aluminum storefront system components and aluminum doors provided under this
Section shall be products of one manufacturer.
C.Coordination:
1.Coordinate with Finish Hardware Supplier as required to assure proper fitting of hardware items
furnished under Section 087100 “Finish Hardware”.
a.Install hardware according to templates approved by hardware item manufacturers.
b.Report to General Contractor in writing should templates not be delivered by Hardware Supplier
in sufficient time to meet construction schedules.
2.Coordinate with Section 088000 “Glazing” to provide an assembly that meets System Energy
Performance requirements specified herein and in Section 088000.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A.Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Shop Drawings: Show elevations and details, including gaskets, weatherstripping, methods of anchoring, type
of alloy, finish, size and thickness of individual parts, dissimilar metal protection.
C. System Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1.Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed entrance
and storefront.
084113-2 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
D.Anodizing Certificates: Anodized aluminum pieces shall be furnished with a letter of certification from the
anodizer affirming that the items furnished have been finished according to the standard specified.
1.04.MOCKUP
A.Refer to Section 047300 “Manufactured Stone Veneer” and coordinate with other Contractors in the furnishing
of materials for and the installation of the specified mockup.
1.05.PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.Uncrate doors, frames and related accessories; and store in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
B.Remove all padding and packing in contact with aluminum immediately upon arrival in order to prevent
staining.
1.06.WARRANTIES
A.Manufacturer of aluminum storefront systems shall agree to repair or replace units whose components that do
not comply with requirements or that fail due to inferior materials or workmanship within 10 years of
installation.
1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b.Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
c.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
d.Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e.Air infiltration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
f.Failure of operating components.
B.Manufacturer of service window units shall agree to repair or replace units, including labor, whose components
that do not comply with requirements or that fail due to inferior materials or workmanship within 1 year of
installation.
1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.Structural failures including, but not limited to, deflection exceeding 1/4 inch.
b.Failure of welds.
c.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
d.Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e.Air infiltration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
f.Failure of operating components.
2.PRODUCT
2.01.PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT
A.Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, registered in the state in which the Project resides,
to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.
B.General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of
aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1.Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure
including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from
uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2.Failure also includes the following:
a.Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
OAA-2020-159 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 084113-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
b.Glass breakage.
c.Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d.Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e.Failure of operating units.
C.Structural Loads:
1.Wind Loads and Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
D.Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
1.Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not
exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge
deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.
2.Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller.
E.Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
1.Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Framing and Fixed Glazing:
a.When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence
deflection exceeding specified limits.
b.When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies,
including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent
deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.26 percent of span.
c.Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
2.Entrance Doors:
a.Corner strength shall be tested per the manufacturers dual moment load test procedure and
certified by an independent testing laboratory to ensure weld compliance and corner integrity.
F.Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:
1.Fixed Framing and Glass Area:
a.Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
2.Entrance Doors:
a.Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57
lbf/sq. ft.
b.Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57
lbf/sq. ft.
G.Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
1.No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a
minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less
than 10 lbf/sq. ft.
H.Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
I.Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes:
1.Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
J.System Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance of framing system and glazing according to
NFRC as follows:
084113-4 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing assemblies shall have U-factor of not
more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg. F as determined according to NFRC 100.
2.Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Entrance doors and framing assemblies shall have U-factor of not
more than 0.80 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg. F. as determined according to NFRC 100.
3.Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing assemblies, and entrance door and framing
assemblies, shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.40 as determined according to
NFRC 200.
K.Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified condensation
resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according to NFRC 500.
2.02.PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SERVICE WINDOW UNITS
A.System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by pressure and
negative wind loads acting normal to plane of window as calculated in accordance with applicable code.
B.System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, and
migrating moisture occurring within system, to exterior by weep drainage network.
C.Structural Design: Design glass and glazing in accordance with current building code, of the state in which the
Project resides, for most critical combination of wind, seismic, and dead loads.
D.Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line
with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.
2.03.MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE
A.Framing for Fixed Windows and Framing for Entrance Doors, Sidelights and Transoms: Dual thermal-break
type with nominal profile of 2” x 4-1/2”, center glazed. Provide one of the below listed models:
1.“451UT” by Kawneer Company.
2.“YES 45 XT” by YKK-AP.
3.“Series 403 X” by EFCO Corporation.
B.Service Window: Aluminum and stainless steel unit with clear 5/8" insulating glass, Model IFSC-4040 by
Quikserv Corp., Houston, Texas, tel. 800-388-8307.
C.Framing for Fixed Windows: Same framing as at entries.
D.Aluminum Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation, stile
size as shown on Drawings.
1.Door Construction:
a.At Doors Indicated to be Thermally Broken: 2- to 2-3/8-inch overall thickness as required to
allow for 1 inch insulated glazing, with minimum 0.125 inch thick, extruded-aluminum tubular
rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply
penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.
1)Thermal construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members
exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.
2)Provide one of the following by the same manufacturer as the framing:
(i)“AA 425 Thermal Entrance” by Kawneer Company.
(ii)“MegaTherm 50XT” by YKK-AP.
(iii)“ThermaStile D502” by Efco Corporation.
b.At All Other Doors: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-
aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with
OAA-2020-159 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 084113-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie
rods.
1)Provide one of the following by the same manufacturer as the framing:
(i)“500 Series Standard Entrance” by Kawneer Company.
(ii)“Series 50D Wide Stile Swing Entrance” by YKK-AP.
(iii)“Series D500 Wide Stile Swing Entrance Door” by Efco Corporation.
2.Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.
3.Provide non-removable glazing stops on outside of door.
E.Aluminum members, frames, glazing beads and mullions shall be extruded from ASTM B221, 6063 alloy of
suitable temper, having a minimum tensile strength of 28,000 psi.
1.Major frame components shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.070 inch.
2.Aluminum glazing beads shall be snap-in type with a minimum wall thickness of 0.050 inch and glazing
legs no less than 3/4" high.
3.Sills/subsills shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.070 inch.
F.Frame Thermal Breaks: Manufacturer’s standard type. Poured in place polyurethane thermal break material
shall have a maximum tensile strength of 4,300 psi.
2.04.ACCESSORIES
A.Anchors: Aluminum or steel. Steel anchors must be primed with shop coat of approved zinc chromate primer
and be insulated from the aluminum members.
B.Fasteners:
1.Frame Assembly Fasteners: Non-magnetic stainless steel.
2.Miscellaneous Fasteners: Aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel with finish color to match frames
where exposed to view.
3.For fastening anchors to building construction, use expansion bolts, toggle bolts or screws, as required
by building construction material, not less than 1/4" diameter, made of cadmium or zinc plated steel in
accordance with ASTM A 164 and A 165.
4.Screws in masonry shall be equal to Rawl “Tappers.” No plastic expansion anchors allowed.
C.Dissimilar Metal Protection: Alkali resistant, asbestos free bituminous paint conforming to ASTM D1187,
plastic separators, insulating tapes or manufacturer’s standard.
D.Glazing Seals: Extruded EPDM, vinyl, neoprene or silicone dry gasket seals with impervious skins standard to
entrance manufacturer, solid gray color selected from supplier’s standard color options. Vinyl shall meet or
exceed CS 230 standards.
E.Weatherstripping: Thermoplastic elastomer weatherstrip system on all sides of exterior doors and/or frames,
meeting AAMA 701/702 requirements. Provide surface applied bottom weatherstrip with flexible blade gasket
at bottoms of doors.
F.Sills/Subsills: Extruded aluminum sections shall assure that any water entering the glazing channels will be
positively weeped to the exterior. Furnish sills with sub-structural components, such as legs and/or blocking,
so as to assure complete support of the sill across the window opening.
G.Sealants: Furnish type as required in Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”
2.05.FABRICATION
A.Fabricate and assemble in as large sections in shop as consistent with shipping and field requirements.
084113-6 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B.All joints shall form flush, hairline and weatherproof joints.
C.All joints between sections and all field splices shall produce strength to resist misalignment and deformations
due to imposed loads.
D.Reinforce the mullions to support glass and framing to withstand a wind load of 25 psf without deflection
exceeding 1/175 of any span. Provide snap-in stops for doors. Stops on any exterior side shall be lock-in
tamperproof type.
E.Fabricate components that, when assembled, have provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for
vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing (if any).
F.Doors shall have dual moment corner construction consisting of mechanical fastening using extruded
aluminum channel clips and bolt fasteners and SIGMA deep penetration plug welds and fillet welds.
G.Where installation conditions do not allow interior vestibule doors to be raised at the time of installation so as
to allow 3/4" clearance over floors, to clear floor mats, the doors shall be undercut as required to obtain the
3/4" clearance.
H.Reinforce doors and frames for hardware with backing plates of non-magnetic steel or hot-dip galvanized steel
complying with ASTM A 36.
1.Reinforce for closers with 10-gauge steel plate and 12-gauge plate for all other hardware.
2.Reinforce for all other cutouts and mortises similarly.
I.Provide positive means to drain to the outside any water entering the system. Weep holes shall be baffled to
prevent winds from preventing free drainage.
2.06.FINISH
A.Aluminum members shall be furnished with Clear Anodic Finish in compliance with AAMA 611,
AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018mm or thicker.
3.EXECUTION
3.01.INSPECTION
A.Examine all surfaces to receive parts of the work specified herein. Verify all dimensions of in-place and
subsequent construction. Examine wall flashings, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to
ensure a coordinated installation. Installation of frames shall constitute acceptance of the existing conditions.
3.02.PREPARATION
A.All surfaces that contact steel, concrete or stone masonry construction shall be prepared with dissimilar
protection materials hereinbefore specified. Aluminum surfaces to remain exposed shall be protected from
bituminous paint application.
3.03.INSTALLATION
A.Set frames in locations shown, level, plumb and in line without distortion or impeding thermal movement.
Place in proper relation to flashing and adjacent construction. Anchor securely as required to meet design
loads indicated. Seal joints between framing members and mullions. Where moldings are joined, accurately
cut and fit members to result in tightly closed joints.
B.Do not use exposed fasteners except as approved by Owner.
C.Cut, join and seal members to form positive paths of drainage within the framing in order to prevent any water
that may enter the system from leaking through to the interior of the building.
D.Hardware: Install hardware under requirements of Section 087100 “Finish Hardware.”
E.Perimeter Sealant: Apply sealant to inside and outside joints of frame perimeters adjacent to other
constructions, using materials and methods specified in Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”
OAA-2020-159 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 084113-7
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.04.ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of frames and doors, exercising care to avoid damaging
protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances.
END 084113.
OAA-2020-159 FINISH HARDWARE 087100-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS
SECTION 087100 - FINISH HARDWARE
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Furnishing of finish hardware for interior plastic laminate-faced doors in aluminum frames.
Finish hardware required for pre-hanging of door in frames shall be installed under Section
081513 “Plastic Laminate Faced Doors” (complying with standards specified herein), all other
hardware shall be installed under this section.
2. Furnishing and installation of finish hardware for exterior hollow metal doors and frames.
3. Furnishing of finish hardware for interior and exterior aluminum doors in aluminum framing.
Finish hardware shall be installed under Section 084113 “Aluminum Storefront Systems”
according to the standards specified herein.
4. Furnishing and installation of other finish hardware not described herein or in other Sections of
the Specifications but required for a complete and operable facility.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Hardware maintenance info for O&M manual........................................Section 013300.
2. Sealant for exterior thresholds.................................................................Section 079200.
3. Hollow metal doors, frames & silencers .................................................Section 081113.
4. Plastic laminate-faced doors in aluminum frames...................................Section 081513.
5. Aluminum entrance doors, frames with integral weatherstripping .........Section 084113.
6. Overhead sectional door (if any).............................................................Section 083613.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier's Qualifications: A recognized builder's hardware supplier who has been furnishing
hardware in the area of the Project for not less than 5 years, and who has in his employ an
experienced Hardware Consultant available at all reasonable times during the course of the work, for
project hardware consultation to the Owner and Contractor.
B. Workmen's Qualifications: Installation of hardware shall be assigned to experienced tradesmen in
compliance with trade union jurisdictions; either at the door and frame fabrication plant or at the
Project Site, at Contractor's option.
C. Code Requirements: All finish hardware shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of the
applicable code authorities, Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., and the Accessibility Code for the state
in which the project resides, irrespective of any other requirements of these specifications.
D. Coordination: Finish Hardware Supplier shall examine Shop Drawings of the plastic laminate-faced
door manufacturer, aluminum door manufacturer and hollow metal manufacturer and assume
responsibility for coordination of all special details and requirements with each door and frame
supplier.
E. Templates: Furnish 2 copies of all necessary templates and a detailed “Template Transmittal” letter
to the plastic laminate-face door manufacturer, aluminum door manufacturer, and hollow metal
manufacturer within 48 hours after receipt of the reviewed final Finish Hardware Schedule.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Finish Hardware Schedule:
087100-2 FINISH HARDWARE OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1. Within 30 calendar days after award of Contract for general construction, and before any
materials are ordered, submit for review 8 copies of the complete Finish Hardware Schedule.
2. The Schedule shall clearly indicate swing, location, stile type, size and thickness of each door,
including meeting stile conditions, as well as the manufacturer, type, number, and finish of
each item of hardware required. The degree of swing for all doors must be specifically
indicated.
C. Samples:
1. Upon request, submit samples of hardware items for review.
2. Samples that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review and field
comparison procedures may, after final check of operation, be used in the Work.
D. Operations & Maintenance (O&M) Manual: Submit to General Contractor for inclusion in the O&M
manuals, as specified in Section 013300 “Submittals”, copies of the final approved Hardware
Schedule, Key Schedule, installation instruction sheets and maintenance recommendations.
1.04.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Hardware Items for Installation by Others: Deliver to the aluminum door/frame manufacturer or
installer and the plastic laminate-faced door/frame manufacturer in one shipment each, clearly
marked to identify the job and door locations for which the hardware items are intended.
B. Delivery and Storage: Upon delivery to site, General Contractor shall assume responsibility for
hardware against all losses, defacement, etc.
1. All items shall be clearly identified. Label each item with manufacturer's name and
designation for the item. Each keyed lock or cylinder shall be clearly marked for use on a
specific door.
2. Each container or package shall contain the necessary fasteners, templates, and instructions for
installation.
C. Keys: Do not deliver to site nor store keys on-site. Deliver keys directly from manufacturer to
Owner.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.MATERIALS AND FABRICATIONS
A. Items listed in the Hardware Sets shall be manufactured by the named manufacturer and furnished
without substitution.
B. Screws and Fastenings: Furnish Phillips head screws and bolts for all items of hardware. No TEK
screws allowed.
1. Furnish all thresholds with expansion anchors, of type that allow for removal of fastener
without affecting the holding value of the expansion anchor, and machine screws.
2. Furnish hinges for hollow metal and aluminum doors and/or frames with self-cleaning machine
screws.
3. Furnish 5% surplus fasteners for all items of hardware.
C. Closers: Hydraulically controlled, full rack and pinion in operation, with adjustable general speed,
latching speed, separate back-check control, and adjustable spring tension conforming to
accessibility codes.
1. Closer fluid shall be “all weather” type not subject to normal temperature changes.
2. Select the closer type that will mount closer on the less commonly seen side of interior doors
and on the interior side of exterior doors.
OAA-2020-159 FINISH HARDWARE 087100-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3. Where parallel-arm closers are indicated, furnish units one size larger than recommended for
standard arm units.
4. Accessories: Furnish the necessary arms, brackets, and other accessories to clear overhead
stops and to suit the approved job conditions.
5. Adjustability of Spring Power: Provide full adjustability as required to conform to applicable
Accessibility Codes.
2.02.KEYING
A. Key Schedule: Shall be prepared by the Finish Hardware Supplier, in consultation with Owner
before any locks are ordered. The keying designations used in the Schedule shall conform to DHI’s
“Keying System and Nomenclature.”
B. Key Control: Furnish all locks and cylinders with a visual key control system. All keys and
corresponding cylinder faces shall be stamped with the applicable key group indicated in the Finish
Hardware Schedule. All keys shall be stamped “Do Not Duplicate”. No other stamping shall appear
on keys.
C. Keys: All locks shall be keyed by the manufacturer and all keys shall be factory registered and
recorded. Deliver 1 copy of the key bitting list to the Owner on request.
1. Furnish all locks and cylinders with a construction master key system. Furnish construction
master keys to the Contractor via certified mail. Upon occupancy by the Owner, all keys shall
be delivered to the Owner in sealed envelopes.
2. Furnish master keys for each master key group and the quantity of change keys for each key
group as requested by the Owner.
3. If project includes sectional overhead door, furnish core and key for overhead door lock
furnished by Section 083613 Sectional Overhead Door supplier.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.HARDWARE MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
A. Hardware shall be mounted at the following heights unless scheduled otherwise:
1. Exit Devices.....................Per manufacturer's template.
2. Closers.............................Per mfr's template for each condition of door swing.
3. Butt Hinges......................5" - 10" - equal - equal.
4. Locks ...............................38" above floor to centerline of lever.
5. Push-Pull Sets..................40" above floor to centerline of mounting pad.
6. Deadlocks ........................48" above floor to centerline of cylinder.
7. Viewers (if any)...............as indicated on Drawings.
3.02.INSTALLATION
A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Wherever
cutting and fitting is required to install hardware, cut and fit as required, install the hardware item
completely and then remove and store it in a secure place during the application of the finish. After
completion of the finishes, re-install each hardware item.
C. Adjust doors in accordance with door manufacturer's maintenance instructions before attaching
closers. Adjust so as to swing open and shut without binding, and to remain in place at any angle
without being moved by gravitational influence. Do not use paper, cardboard or other compressible
shims to adjust butt alignment.
D. Closers: Mount to provide maximum opening permitted by building construction or equipment.
087100-4 FINISH HARDWARE OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
E. Mount lock cylinders such that key enters with its smooth edge down.
F. Weatherstripping: Weatherstrips at head and jambs shall be applied to the doorstops. Secure
weatherstrips to metal doors and frames with aluminum sheet metal screws finished to match
weatherstripping.
G. Set exterior thresholds in double bead of sealant as specified in Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”
H. Tag and index the keys. Deliver the keys to Owner at completion and acceptance of work.
I. Adjust, and protect from injury all installed hardware. Cover door levers, push bars and pulls with
heavy cloth until project acceptance.
3.03.QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection for Punch List: The Hardware Supplier shall inspect all hardware installed under this
Section in order to verify that each item was properly installed and is operating appropriately. The
Hardware Supplier shall then prepare a typewritten list of defects and errors requiring correction,
which shall be attached to the Final Punch List. These inspections and reports shall continue until
Final Acceptance.
3.04.ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. One month after Owner occupies the Work, return to site, and adjust and check each operating item
of hardware, to ensure proper operation and function.
1. If requested by Owner, adjust the operational programming of the Power Door Operator to
meet requirements specific to the project.
B. Lubricate moving parts with lubricant recommended by manufacturer.
C. Replace units that cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for
the application made.
END 087100.
OAA-2020-159 GLAZING 088000-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Glazing of exterior windows with vision glazing.
2. Glazing of aluminum entrance vestibules, sidelights, transoms and doors.
3. Glazing of lites in flush doors.
4. Furnishing and installation of tempered patterned glazing or tempered acid-etched glazing (as
selected by Owner unless noted otherwise on Drawings) and clamp support hardware in
opening(s) of interior partition(s) and/or atop half wall(s) as indicated on drawings.
5. Furnishing and installation of laminated glass panels and clamp support hardware at Sundae
Wall.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Final cleaning of glass.............................................................................Section 015001.
2. Glazing stops in hollow metal door (if any)............................................Section 081113.
3. Glazing stops in plastic laminate-faced doors...........................................Section 081513.
4. Glazing gaskets for aluminum entrances.................................................Section 084113.
5. Factory glazed service window ...............................................................Section 084113.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with all pertinent codes and regulations, including the Consumer Product Safety
Commission Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR 1201) and the safety
glazing requirements of the state in which the Project resides.
B. Comply with all pertinent recommendations in the “Glazing Manual” and the “Laminated Glazing
Reference Manual” of the Glass Association of North America (GANA).
C. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for
Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
D. Each pane of glass shall bear the manufacturer’s mark designating the type and thickness of glass and
the manufacturer’s name per IBC requirements. Glass without labels imprinted onto glass shall be
rejected.
E. Source Limitations: Provide each type of glass and accessory from one source and one manufacturer.
1.03.MOCKUP
A. Refer to Section 047300 “Manufactured Stone Veneer” and coordinate with other Contractors in the
furnishing of materials for and the installation of the specified mockup.
1.04.SUBMITTALS
A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers’ product data describing each type of glass and glazing item,
including installation clamps. For each type of exterior glass, include documentation supporting the
following:
1. NFRC U-factor.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC).
3. Visible Light Transmittance.
088000-2 GLAZING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
C. Shop Drawings: For laminated glazing, submit fabrication information, including but not limited to,
edge profile and finish, edge sealing, cutouts for glazing support clamp steel pin/screw, number, type
and location of support clamps.
D. Samples:
1. Submit samples of tempered acid-etched glazing of size necessary to indicate full color, texture
and pattern variation but not less than 8 inches square.
E. System Energy Performance Certificates for Exterior Glazing: For glazing, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed
entrance and storefront.
F. Guarantees and Warranties:
1. Submit installer’s written guarantee of leakproof installation.
2. Submit insulated glass fabricator’s warranty of seal integrity.
G. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test reports. Include documentation, from manufacturer
of interlayer of laminated glazing, of approval of proposed glazing sealant.
H. Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer’s recommendations for cleaning and maintaining
laminated glass and acid-etched glass.
1.05.COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face
clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
B. Coordinate selection of insulated glazing with framing product being provided under Section 084113
“Aluminum Storefront Systems” to provide an assembly that meets System Energy Performance
requirements specified herein and in Section 084113.
1.06.PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket,
laminate interlayer, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility
with elastomeric glazing sealants.
1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant
products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape
sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims,
sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective
measures including the use of specially formulated primers.
1.07.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass
and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other
causes. Avoid deformation of units. Protect faces from scratches and abrasion.
B. Deliver glazing materials to job site in sealed containers with manufacturer’s original labels attached
to each piece of glass. Provide safety labels imprinted onto tempered glass. Provide cushions at
edges to prevent impact damage.
C. Store glass on edge, under cover and protect from staining.
D. Do not rotate or “pitch” glass about corners. Use rolling blocks.
OAA-2020-159 GLAZING 088000-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
E. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to
avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
F. Comply with manufacturer’s delivery, storage and handling recommendations for acid-etched glass.
1.08.ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature
conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel
substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside
limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
1.09.WARRANTIES
A. Installer’s Guarantee: Installer shall guarantee installed work to be waterproof for a period of 5
years.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units,
including labor for glazing, that deteriorate within ten (10) years. Deterioration of insulating glass is
defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to
maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of
failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
C. Manufacturer's Warranty for Laminated Glass: Laminated glass manufacturer agrees to replace
laminated glass units, including labor for glazing, that deteriorate within five (10) years.
Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not
attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's
written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision
through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard.
D. All warranty time periods shall begin at Substantial Completion.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact
loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the State in which the
project resides, to design glazing.
C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under
conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.
1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass
deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch,
whichever is less.
D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201,
Category II.
E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as
indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch thick.
2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.
088000-4 GLAZING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit
and for each lite.
4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 6
computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.
5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to
NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 6 computer program.
F. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with
performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.
2.02.GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Glass Manufacturers:
1. Guardian Industries Corp.
2. Pilkington North America.
3. PPG / Vitro Glass.
B. Acceptable Glass Fabricators:
1. Guardian Industries Corp.
2. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.
3. Trulite Glass.
4. Viracon, Inc.
5. Or as specifically named.
C. General: Temper individual glass units as required to meet safety requirements and as otherwise
shown on Drawings. Label each tempered pane with imprinted safety label.
D. Types and Qualities: Where indicated on Drawings, where required by applicable codes and where
required to comply with performance requirements, provide fully tempered float glass. Where not
required to be fully tempered, provide heat strengthened float glass. These requirements shall apply
to both panes of insulated glass.
1. Clear Annealed Float Glass: 1/4" thick, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I (clear) or| Class 2
(tinted), Quality Q3.
2. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A
(uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or| Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3.
a. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
3. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I,
Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or| Class 2 (tinted),
Quality-Q3.
a. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
E. Insulating Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a
dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190. Provide manufacturer’s standard
spacer and dual sealing system with primary and secondary sealants. Insulating Units shall have the
following performance:
1. Glazing Energy Performance - Insulated glazing shall meet or exceed the following
performance requirements and shall perform as required to meet system energy performance
below:
a. Maximum U-factor: 0.29 (center of glazing value)
b. Maximum Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.39 (center of glazing value)
c. Minimum Visible Light Transmittance: 70%
OAA-2020-159 GLAZING 088000-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
d. Basis of Design: PPG Glass “Solarban 60 (2) Clear + Clear” for exterior lites. Provide
specified product or Architect approved comparable product. Comparable products
must be comparable in all characteristics including visual appearance.
2. System Energy Performance - Insulated glazing and framing assembly together shall meet or
exceed the following performance requirements:
a. Maximum U-factor for Fixed Fenestration: 0.45
b. Maximum U-factor for Entrance Doors (w/ greater than 50% glazing): 0.80
c. Maximum U-factor for Hollow Metal Doors (w/ less than 50% glazing): 0.50
d. Maximum Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.40
3. Clear Insulating Glass Units: 1 inch thick units (fully tempered where indicated), consisting of
an outer minimum 1/4 inch pane of clear float glass and an inner minimum 1/4 inch pane of
clear float glass separated by a 1/2 inch desiccated air/gas space, with a low reflective low-
emissivity (Low-E) coating on the #2 surface.
a. For exterior doors, where scheduled, furnish 1 inch thick clear insulating units meeting
above requirements.
b. Units shall have manufacturer’s 10-year warranty.
4. Spandrel Insulating Glass Units (if any): Ceramic coated spandrel glass shall comply with
ASTM C 1048, Type I, Condition B, Quality Q3. Spandrel insulating glass units shall be 1
inch thick units, consisting of outer minimum 1/4 inch pane of clear, fully tempered float glass
(to match exterior pane of visible units) and an inner minimum 1/4 inch pane of clear, fully
tempered float glass separated by a 1/2 inch desiccated air/gas space. Provide a low-emissivity
(Low-E) coating on the #2 surface and a full coverage opaque ceramic frit coating on the #4
surface.
a. Spandrel insulating glass units shall be of the same manufacturer as the clear insulating
glass units.
b. Full Coverage Opaque Ceramic Frit Coating Color: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
F. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble,
discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.
1. Construction: Laminate glass with ionomeric polymer interlayer (for resistance to moisture
deterioration) to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. Nominal unit
thickness shall be 9/16 inch, as required by clamp support hardware, increase thickness if
structurally necessary.
2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness as needed to comply with requirements of installation
and use but not less than 0.060 inch thick.
3. Interlayer Color: Clear.
4. Flat Polished Edges: Grind smooth and polish exposed laminated glass edges and corners.
Edges and corners shall be eased.
G. Tempered, Acid-Etched Glazing: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated)
unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. Fabricate as follows:
1. Flat Polished Edges: Grind smooth and polish exposed laminated glass edges and corners.
Edges and corners shall be eased.
2. Texture: Acid-etch glass, on one side, with translucent velour texture evenly etched over
entire surface.
3. Thickness: Minimum 1/4 inch (6mm) unless thicker product is structurally required for
application.
4. Basis of Design: Walker Textures or approved comparable product.
088000-6 GLAZING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2.03.CLAMP SUPPORT HARDWARE
A. At Side and Bottom Supported Glazing Panels: C.R. Laurence Company Z-Series Square Type Flat
Base Clamps, Model Number Z906BS including gaskets and steel pins with grommets.
B. At Bottom Only Supported Glazing Panels (Sundae Wall): C.R. Laurence Company Low Profile
Surface Mount Frameless Windscreen Clamps, Model number AFWC4SBS including moisture
barrier glazing gaskets, stainless steel base flange cover for concealed attachment and stainless steel
glazing anchorage screws.
2.04.GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Approved Manufacturers: Use products recommended by glazing manufacturer and compatible with
materials they are in contact with.
B. Glazing Seals for Aluminum Sash: Furnished by aluminum sash manufacturer.
C. Glazing Seals for Exterior Hollow Metal Door Lite: Subject to compatibility testing:
1. Exterior Side: One-part acrylic terpolymer or one-part silicone sealant complying with ASTM
C920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, G, A.
2. Interior Side: Preformed, pre-shimmed polyisobutylene-butyl rubber adhesive faced, sealant
tape and custom extruded elastomer gasket material, meeting, as a minimum, AAMA 804.3 or
806.3.
D. Glazing Seals for Interior Plastic Laminate-Faced Doors:
1. Glazing Tape: Preformed, polyisobutylene-butyl rubber adhesive faced, sealant tape, with or
without continuous shim as required, meeting, as a minimum, AAMA 804.3 or 806.3.
2. Glazing Felt: Wool felt with adhesive back, treated to be non-wicking and non-staining.
E. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80-90 durometer hardness, having proven compatibility with sealants
used, width of rabbet less 1/16" by lengths sufficient for weight of glass supported.
F. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, having proven compatibility with sealants used.
G. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
2.05.FABRICATION
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass
framing members and glazing components.
a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2. Exposed Edge Finishing: Finish edges smooth and polished, without chips, scratches, or
warps.
a. Finished Edge: Flat polished with eased edges.
b. Edge Seals: Factory seal edges where recommended by glazing manufacturer.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.INSPECTION
A. Condition of Surfaces:
1. Examine all surfaces and dimensions prior to application and notify General Contractor of any
conditions detrimental to satisfactory glazing.
OAA-2020-159 GLAZING 088000-7
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2. Do not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Inspect each piece of glass before installation, and eliminate any that have observable edge damage
or face imperfections.
3.02.PREPARATION
A. Clean the glazing channel or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to the substrate. Prepare metal surfaces as indicated by
manufacturer of sealant to be used. Verify that weep holes are free of obstructions.
B. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer.
C. Cut glass with smooth straight edges to full sizes required by openings. Do not attempt to cut, seam,
nip or abrade glass that is tempered, heat strengthened, or coated.
D. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that
exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in
the completed Work.
3.03. INSTALLATION OF GLASS
A. General:
1. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with
edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair
performance, or impair appearance.
3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
6. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
a. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
b. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width.
With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
7. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
8. Install with proper bite and clearances all around.
9. Glass having waviness shall be set with waves placed horizontally. Lites viewed in series or as
a group shall have uniform draw, bow and similar characteristics.
B. Aluminum Windows: Glaze with Dry Gasket method, the same as for aluminum entrances.
C. Aluminum Entrances: Glaze with Dry Gasket method as follows:
1. Install gaskets according to gasket manufacturer’s recommendations, including the use of
primers and adhesives.
088000-8 GLAZING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2. Cut fixed-stop gaskets to lengths required and fit into sash without stretching or compressing.
Miter corners of gaskets and seal corners by vulcanizing, welding or dabbing with butyl
sealant.
3. Engage gasket material with retainers in removable stops and trim to proper lengths. Verify
that when gaskets are properly fit they will attain full contact all around perimeter and exert a
pressure of at least 4 pounds per linear inch of glass when snapped into place. Seal corners
between removable stops by dabbing with butyl sealant.
D. Exterior Lites In Hollow Metal Door (if any): Glaze with Tape and Sealant method as follows:
1. Cut preformed sealant tape to proper length on a clean, flat work surface prior to application.
Apply tape to permanent stops slightly in from edge of stop (to entire length of head and sill
first, then in between to the jambs). Butt tape together with no overlap. Remove paper facing
and daub butted corner joints with sealant.
2. Maintain a 1/8" minimum clearance for glazing material between glass and sash, both on the
interior and exterior.
3. Center glass in opening and firmly place against tape.
4. Fill gap between glass and removable stop with continuous bead of silicone sealant,
maintaining a 3/16" minimum bite to glass and a positive bond to stop.
5. Cap the tape with a continuous bead of silicone sealant. Apply cap bead of same sealant over
glazing at removable stops. Tool sealant bead with solvent to produce a smooth surface sloped
away from glass. Clean the glass of excess sealant.
E. Viewer (if any): Install per manufacturer’s written instructions, provide air and moisture seal at face
of door.
F. Interior Lites: Glaze the lites using glazing felt or glazing tape adhered to stops on each side of the
pane. Use as many layers of felt or tape as required to hold glass snuggly. Maintain even sightlines,
trimming felt or tape as necessary.
G. Interior Panels: Install glazing panels (shown installed with clamp hardware), level and straight
without warp or twist and with manufacturer recommended bite on glazing panel.
1. Orient acid-etched face of glazing as directed by Owner.
2. At Z-Series Clamps: Utilize rubber gaskets and steel pin with grommets for additional glazing
support.
3. At Windscreen Clamps: Utilize moisture barrier glazing gaskets and stainless steel screws for
glazing support.
H. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written
recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean
surfaces.
I. All glass shall be left whole, free from checks or other defects. Any defective glass that may appear
after cleaning shall be removed and replaced with perfect glass.
3.04.PROTECTION
A. Provide protective coverings to prevent damage or staining following installation for duration of
project.
B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
END 088000.
OAA-2020-159 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092116-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
SECTION 092116 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Gypsum board for interior walls.
2.Gypsum board for interior flush ceilings and bulkheads.
3.Texture finishes for gypsum board.
4.Cementitious backer board for wall finishes where shown.
5.Metal stud framing for interior partitions so designated.
6.Acoustical sealants.
7.Joint treatment and gypsum board accessories.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Cutting and patching gypsum board incidental to work..................................................Section 015001.
2.Wood blocking in steel stud framing ..............................................................................Section 061000.
3.Thermal & acoustical batt insulation in walls.................................................................Section 072100.
4.Vapor retarder at exterior walls (and ceiling where shown)...........................................Section 072100.
5.Sealants exposed to view.................................................................................................Section 079200.
6.Ceramic wall tile .............................................................................................................Section 093013.
7.Resinous flooring base....................................................................................................Section 096724.
8.Finish painting.................................................................................................................Section 099000.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.All products of this section shall be of a single manufacturer, or acceptable to board manufacturer, as necessary to
maintain compatibility of materials.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A.Make submittals under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Provide Product Data on each type of gypsum board, texture finish, cementitious backer board, metal framing,
edge beads, control joints and joint compounds.
C.Samples: Provide three (3), 12” x 12” square size, samples for each texture finish indicated, on same backing
indicated for the Work, for Owner’s approval. Resubmit until texture is accepted by Owner.
1.04.MOCK-UP
A.Verify with Owner if mock-up of gypsum board texture is required.
B.If requested by Owner, provide mock-up, minimum 5’-0” x 5’-0” in size, to demonstrate full range of variation in
texture to be expected and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Mock-up shall be constructed on
same type of gypsum board substrate to be used in project with at least one joint illustrating taping materials and
workmanship to be provided.
1.05.DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A.Materials shall be delivered to site in original packages or containers bearing manufacturer’s brand name and type
of material.
B.Store materials in dry, well ventilated space, protected from the weather, under cover and off the ground. Protect
board and materials from damage by moisture, ground dampness, heat, sun and other causes.
092116-2 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
C.Gypsum and cementitious panels shall be supported flat and level during transport and storage. Provide supports
across width of panels, not more than 16" apart. Store boards above ground or slab.
D.Protect all finished work during the progress of gypsum board work and repair any damage done to such work.
1.06.JOB CONDITIONS
A.Environmental Requirements: Comply with most stringent requirements of ASTM C 840, gypsum board
manufacturer’s written instructions or requirements specified herein.
1.A uniform room temperature between 55°F and 70°F shall be maintained in cold weather one week prior to
application, during application and until completely dry. Temperature fluctuations shall not exceed 2°F per
24 hours.
2.Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
3.Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
4.Gypsum board subcontractor shall provide adequate ventilation for drying out of joint compounds without
allowing rapid drying.
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.FRAMING MATERIALS
A.Studs: Zinc coated steel channel studs, 20-gauge, 6" and 3-5/8" size and as indicated on Drawings, conforming to
ANSI/ASTM C 645 or GA 201 or GA 216.
B.Runner Tracks: 20-gauge metal, matching stud width.
2.02.PANELS
A.Gypsum Board for Most Walls: Type X, standard taper, rounded edge, conforming to ASTM C 1396, 5/8" thick.
B.Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board (where noted on Drawings): ASTM C 1396. With moisture- and mold-resistant
core and paper surfaces with tapered long edges.
1.Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
C.Gypsum Board for Ceilings & Bulkheads: Type X, standard taper, rounded edge, 5/8" thick.
D.Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325 Type A, with manufacturer's
standard edges. Mold resistance, ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. Reinforced
portland cement panels. Subject to requirements, provide one of the following:
1.“Gold Bond PermaBase Cement Board” by National Gypsum Co.
2.“Durock” by U.S.G. Industries.
3.“Util-A-Crete” by FinPan, Inc.
2.03.FINISH MATERIALS
A.Edge and Corner Reinforcement:
1.Corner Beads: Paper-faced heavy gauge metal or plastic with extra wide flanges, equal to USG
“B1XW EL” or No-Coat “Ultracorner”.
2.Edge Beads: Paper-faced heavy gauge metal or plastic “L” type with extra wide flanges, equal to USG “B4
(1")” or No-Coat “L Trim”.
3.Control Joint Beads: Flexible expansion channel, such as USG #093 or Gold Bond “.093 Zinc Control
Joint.”
OAA-2020-159 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092116-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B.Joint Treatment Materials:
1.Reinforcing Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper joint reinforcing tape, perforated or high porosity paper to
create strong bond with compounds.
2.Reinforcing Tape for Cementitious Backer Board: 2" wide, adhesive faced, 10 x 10 mesh fiberglass with
polymer, alkali-resistant coating.
3.Joint Compound for Gypsum Board: Ready mixed all-purpose gypsum board joint compound, type and
mix as required for conditions of humidity and temperature. Use topping type compound for finishing
coats.
C.Non-Aggregate Textured Finish: Premixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application.
1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture.
b.National Gypsum Company; Proform Wall and Ceiling Spray.
c.United States Gypsum Company; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture.
2.Texture: Orange peel.
2.04.ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.Acoustical Seals: One of the following:
1.USG “Acoustical Sealant”
2.Tremco “Acoustical Sealant”
3.Pecora “Acoustical Sealant BA-98”
4.Saint-Gobain Performance Plastics “Norseal V730 / Norseal V740FR Acoustical Foam Tapes”
B.Fasteners: Screws meeting ASTM C 954 and the following:
1.For metal to metal framing: 1/2" long, Type S, shallow pan-head screws.
2.For attachment of metal framing to wood: 1-1/4" Type W screws.
3.For cementitious backer board board: Corrosion resistant, flat-head countersunk or thin washer-head
screws.
4.For regular gypsum board: 1-1/4" Type S bugle-head screws.
5.For tracks to concrete: Powder-actuated stud pins sized to penetrate concrete at least 1/2".
3.EXECUTION
3.01.INSPECTION
A.Examine and inspect materials to which gypsum board and cementitious backer board are to be applied. Report
any damp conditions and verify that cause of dampness is rectified before beginning gypsum board installation.
B.Before beginning installation of gypsum board walls and ceilings, verify that work to be enclosed by gypsum
board, particularly mechanical, electrical and firestopping work, has been completed, inspected and approved by
the governing authority.
C.Verify that penetrations in partitions (such as electrical outlets, etc.) will not be located back to back but will be
separated by at least 2 studs. Report to Contractor any such conditions and do not proceed with work until
situations have been rectified.
3.02.STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.Install continuous tracks, straight and true, accurately aligned to the layout at base and at tops of studs. Set floor
track in a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Secure track at each end and a maximum of 24" o.c. in between.
Use powder actuated pin anchors for anchoring to concrete.
B.Set studs plumb, not more than 16" o.c. In each line of studs, face flanges all in the same direction.
092116-4 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
C.All studs shall extend full height to structure above.
D.Studs shall engage both floor and top runners. Secure studs to tracks with 2 screws at top and 2 screws at bottom,
one each at both inside and outside flanges.
E.At top track, provide compressible filler strip at least 1/2" thick between top runners and structure above. Provide
multiple runner track installation to accommodate ceiling deflection.
F.Do not cut stud flanges to accommodate pipes, conduit, etc.
3.03.ACOUSTICAL ISOLATION
A.Verify that penetrations for ducts or structural framing in gypsum board constructions have been made soundproof,
using furring, acoustical insulation and acoustical sealant as required.
B.Verify that all electrical penetrations and other wall penetrations are surrounded with sound attenuation blanket
extending at least 12" around the opening.
C.Apply acoustical sealant to seal all cutouts, such as at electrical boxes and conduit.
D.Apply sealant continuously to joint between gypsum board and bottom of all interior partition framing. Also seal
any untaped edges or corner joints butting into other wall materials.
E.Ensure that control joints are filled with insulation.
3.04.GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A.Do not commence installation until insulation batts and all items to be installed inside partitions or above ceilings
are in place and have been inspected and approved by the governing authority.
B.Install gypsum wallboard first to ceilings, then to walls and soffits. Allow the joint between ceiling and wall to
“float,” holding ceiling screws back 7" from intersection and wall screws back 8".
C.Install gypsum board panels to walls and ceilings in single layer construction.
D.Install boards for walls with tapered edges vertical, in line with framing.
1.Hold gypsum wall boards approximately 3/8" up from floors.
2.Provide gypsum board on both sides of partition studs above ceilings. Extend board until flush with top of
framing.
E.Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with approved sealant.
F.Ceilings and Soffits: Erect boards with tapered edges perpendicular to supports. Place panel end joints only over
supports and stagger end joints adjacent to one another.
G. Attachment: Install gypsum board with gypsum board screws 12" o.c. in the field of the board and 8" o.c. along
edges.
1.Place edge screws 3/8" in from edges. Stagger screws in adjacent sheets on opposite sides of joints.
Screws shall proceed from central portion of board toward ends and edges.
2.Screws shall be driven home slightly below the surface of the board without breaking the paper. Keep
screw-driving clutches properly adjusted.
H.Joints:
1.Boards shall be brought into contact with each other but shall not be forced into place. Butt tapered edges
only to tapered edges.
2.Locate all joints parallel to framing members only over the center of framing members. Joints on opposite
sides of partition shall not occur on the same stud.
3.Joints intersecting openings, such as for doors or windows, shall be held at least 12" away from any corner;
and joints parallel to sides of door or window openings shall be held at least 12" away from the opening.
I.Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach
gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists
OAA-2020-159 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092116-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
3.05.CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD INSTALLATION
A.Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of
application indicated.
B.Erect panels with manufacturer’s recommended corrosion resistant screws, placing vertical and horizontal edges of
panels over firm bearing.
C.Add framing as required to support all edges on framing.
D.Treat cut edges, holes and joints in cementitious backer board in accordance with manufacturers written
instructions.
E.Attach panels with manufacturer’s recommended corrosion resistant screws 8” o.c. along edges and each framing
member.
3.06.FINISHING
A.Corner and Edge Beads:
1.All vertical and horizontal external corners below the plane of the ceiling, except ceramic tile backer board,
shall be reinforced with corner bead fastened in a full bed of joint compound.
2.At all exposed edges and where board terminates against windows or other dissimilar materials, apply metal
trim over board edge and fasten in a full bed of joint compound.
3.Use longest lengths practicable. Keep beads straight and plumb.
B.Joint Reinforcement:
1.All joints not covered by a corner bead are to be taped and compounded, above and below ceilings.
2.Joint tape shall be centered over the joint and embedded in a uniformly thin layer of joint compound
approximately 4" wide with sufficient material under tape to provide proper bond.
3.Cementitious Backer Board: Tack fiberglass tape over joints (for embedment by ceramic tile installers).
C.Compounding and Finishing: Sand each coat after compound has dried, as necessary to provide smooth finished
result in surfaces to be painted or to receive wall covering. Take care not to scuff paper surface of board when
sanding.
1.Use topping compound for final joint coating of painted gypsum board.
2.Flush Joints between Panels Scheduled for Painting or Wall Covering: GA-214 Level 4; i.e. tape applied in
a coat of compound and covered with 2 coats of compound, except that first covering coat shall extend to 3"
beyond each edge of bedding coat, and second covering coat shall extend to 3" beyond each edge of
previous coat. Feather the coats onto adjoining surfaces.
3.Internal Corners Scheduled for Painting or Wall Covering: GA-214 Level 4; i.e. tape applied in a coat of
compound and covered with 1 coat of compound, using methods similar to field joints.
4.External Corners and Edges Scheduled for Painting or Wall Covering: GA-214 Level 4; i.e. cover the
flanges of corner and casing beads with 3 coats of compound, except that second and third coats are to be
extended 3" beyond the previous coat.
5.Fastener Dimples Scheduled for Painting or Wall Covering: GA-214 Level 4; i.e. 3 coats of compound,
including the spreading of each coat beyond the previous coat.
6.Joints and Corners above Lay-In Ceiling: GA-214 Level 1; i.e. tape applied in a coat of compound.
092116-6 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
7.Fastener Dimples above Lay-In Ceiling: GA-214 Level 1; i.e. no compound required.
3.07.APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A.Extent of Texture Finishes: Provide texture on gypsum board wall surfaces in public areas that are scheduled to
receive paint finish.
B.Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture
finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
C.Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture
matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application
patterns.
D.Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering
them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact
these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.08.PROTECTION
A.Protect adjacent surfaces from joint compound and texture finishes. Promptly remove overspray, drips, etc. from
floors and other non-gypsum board surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during
gypsum board application according to recommendations of manufacturer of finish that was damaged.
B.Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes
during remainder of the construction period.
C.Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging,
or irregular shape.
2.Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface
contamination and discoloration.
END 092116.
OAA-2020-159 CERAMIC TILE 093013-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILE
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Ceramic paver tile floors and base.
2. Waterproofing membrane.
3. Ceramic tile walls.
4. Ceramic tile wall accent areas.
5. Edge trim for flooring, cove and wall transitions.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Concrete finishes to receive floor tile......................................................Section 033000.
2. Sealants for control joints and edges........................................................Section 079200.
3. Backer board to receive wall tile & base tile...........................................Section 092116.
1.02.SUBMITTALS
A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Warranties:
1. Submit manufacturer’s sample warranty for review.
2. Submit manufacturer’s executed warranty made out to Owner.
3. Submit to Owner all documentation required for the making of claims against warranties
including, but not limited to, proof of purchase.
C. Maintenance Stock: Supply extra 2% of total quantity of each tile used, including base tiles (but not
special shapes). Place in clean, marked cartons and deliver to Owner for Owner’s maintenance use.
1.03.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials and store on site in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use.
B. Tile for each area shall come from the same shade and lot number.
1.04.JOB CONDITIONS
A. Maintain minimum temperature limits (50°F) and installation practices as recommended by mortar
and grout materials manufacturer.
1.05.WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant that the installed system will be free of defects in
materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Completion.
The Manufacturer shall replace materials that have failed and reimburse the Owner for labor costs,
not to exceed per square-foot cost of original installation, to remove failed products and install
replacement products.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.MATERIALS
A. Ceramic paver tile and ceramic tile units provided shall be as noted on drawings.
093013-2 CERAMIC TILE OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2.02.TILE TRIM
A. General:
1. Contractor shall verify all trim model numbers for correct trim size to protect tile provided.
2. Miter corners of trim when changing direction unless trim type has prefabricated corner units.
B. TR-1 - Transition Edge Trim between Floor Paver Tile and Carpet: Extruded aluminum, having a
carpet-covering cap connected to a raised leg of height to match exposed face of tile, configured for
mounting by way of an under-tile flange, “RENO-TK” (AETK 100) by Schlüter Systems, satin
anodized aluminum finish. For curved/radius tile edge transitions to carpet, use “RENO-TK-R”
(AETK 100 radius).
C. TR-2 & 3 - Transition Edge Trim between Wall Ceramic Tile at Outside Corners: Extruded
aluminum, bullnose-type profile with symmetrically rounded visible surface with 1/4" radius,
integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, and integrated grout joint spacer, “RONDEC” (TR-2 =
RO 80 AE) by Schlüter Systems, satin anodized aluminum finish. Provide accessories, of matching
material and finish where exposed, as follows:
1. Outside Corners (TR-3): One leg (EV/RO 80 AE) or two leg (E2L/RO 80 AE) as condition
requires.
2. Connectors: V/RO 80.
3. Top End Cap.
D. TR-4 - Transition Edge Trim to Protect Exposed Tile Edge (such as at cut paver tile base and
wainscot, at wall tile and gypsum board wall): Extruded aluminum, L-shaped profile with 1/8 inch
wide visible surface on top of vertical leg of height to match exposed face of tile and a horizontal
trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, with integrated grout joint spacer, “SCHIENE” (AE 100) by
Schlüter Systems, satin anodized aluminum finish.
E. TR-5, 6 &7 - Transition Radius Trim between Floor Paver Tile and Wall Ceramic Tile (Cove Base):
Extruded aluminum profile with integrated trapezoid perforated anchoring leg, connected at a 90-
degree angle by a cove shaped section with 3/8" radius that forms the visible surface, “DILEX-AHK”
(TR-5 = AHK 1S 100 AE) by Schlüter Systems, satin anodized aluminum finish. Provide
accessories, of matching material and finish where exposed, as follows:
1. Outside Corners (TR-6): E 90/AHK 1S/AE
2. Inside Corners (TR-7): I 90/AHK 1S/AE
3. Connectors: V/AHK.
4. End Cap: E/AHK 1S/AE
F. TR-8 - Transition Edge Trim between Floor Paver Tile and Resinous Flooring: Extruded aluminum,
L-shaped profile with 1/8 inch wide visible surface on top of vertical leg of height to match exposed
face of tile and a horizontal trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, with integrated grout joint spacer,
“SCHIENE” (AE ***) by Schlüter Systems, satin anodized aluminum finish.
2.03.SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Waterproof / Crack Isolation Membrane: “RedGard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention
Membrane” as manufactured by Custom Building Products, no substitutions.
B. Floor Setting Material: ProLite Premium large Format Tile Mortar as manufactured by Custom
Building Products, no substitutions.
C. Wall Setting Material: ProLite Premium large Format Tile Mortar as manufactured by Custom
Building Products, no substitutions.
1. Where glass tile is scheduled, verify compatibility of setting material with glass tile backing.
Provide light color setting materials where recommended by manufacturer.
D. Grout: Use sanded grout only after determining sanded grout will not damage tile surface by testing
on samples of each type of tile to be used with sanded grout.
OAA-2020-159 CERAMIC TILE 093013-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1. Floor Epoxy Grout: “CEG-Lite 100% Solids Commercial Epoxy Grout” as manufactured by
Custom Building Products, no substitutions.
2. Floor Standard Grout: Prism Ultimate Performance Grout as manufactured by Custom
Building Products, no substitutions.
3. Wall Grout: Prism Ultimate Performance Grout as manufactured by Custom Building
Products, no substitutions.
E. Floor Patching/Leveling Compound: High strength thin setting leveling compound, free of cellulose
and salts, intended for interior use:
1. “Skim coat & Patch Cement Underlayment” with “Patching and Leveling Latex Additive” by
Custom Building Products, no substitutions.
F. Water: Clean and drinkable.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which tile work is to be installed. Perform slab
moisture tests, relative humidity tests, and other tests as required by setting and grouting materials
manufacturers. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Level out floor, filling depressions with floor patching/leveling compound.
C. Except for shrinkage cracks, repair cracks in substrate. Extend patching fabric so that it will be under
at least 3 tiles on each side of the crack.
D. Cementitious Tile Backer Board: Joints to be completed by tile setters. Pack gaps with latex-
modified thin-set mortar and embed joint tape into the mortar.
3.02.INSTALLATION
A. Floor Tile with Epoxy Grout: Thin-set in accordance with ANSI Specification A-108.5 (Reference
TCNA detail F115: Waterproof/Crack Isolation Membrane; Latex-Portland Cement Thin-Set
Mortar; Epoxy Grout).
B. Base for Floor Tile with Epoxy Grout: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI
Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCNA detail W243: Latex-Portland Cement Thin-Set Mortar;
Epoxy Grout).
C. Floor Tile with Standard Grout: Thin-set in accordance with ANSI Specification A-108.5 (Reference
TCNA detail F113: Waterproof/Crack Isolation Membrane (where shown); Latex-Portland Cement
Thin-Set Mortar; Latex-Portland Cement Grout).
D. Base for Floor Tile with Standard Grout: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI
Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCNA detail W243: Latex-Portland Cement Thin-Set Mortar;
Latex-Portland Cement Grout).
E. Ceramic Tile Walls in Food Preparation Areas: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI
Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCNA detail W243: Latex-Portland Cement Thin-Set Mortar;
Epoxy Grout).
F. Ceramic Tile Walls in Toilet Rooms: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI
Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCNA detail W243: Latex-Portland Cement Thin-Set Mortar;
Latex-Portland Cement Grout).
G. Ceramic Tile Accents in Customer Areas: Install over gypsum board in accordance with ANSI
Specification A 108.5 (Reference TCNA detail W243: Latex-Portland Cement Thin-Set Mortar;
Latex-Portland Cement Grout).
H. Inside wall corner joints with wall tile on both sides of corner: Rake out joint; install sealant full
length of corner, not grout. Sealant color shall match grout color.
093013-4 CERAMIC TILE OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
I. Extent of Floor Tile: Extend to walls, under casework, fixtures and equipment, except where noted
otherwise.
J. Extent of Base: Install ceramic tile base, as scheduled, at the perimeters of all work of this Section.
K. Tile Base Installation: Cut floor tile to create base tile. Do not used tile with chipped face or uneven
cuts that will be exposed in finish installation. Install with edge trim to conceal cut edge. Install
with cove trim where indicated.
L. Wall Tile Outside Corner Trim: Install outside corner trim at all wall tile locations. Trim shall
extend from top of base tile to top of wall tile.
M. Uniformity of Color Variations: Set tile in each area using only tile from the same shade and lot
number. Mix tiles from several boxes, and rotate the tiles to ensure a non-repeat appearance.
N. Alignment of Wall Joints: Align so as to give straight uniform grout lines, both horizontal and
vertical.
O. Alignment of Floor Joints: Align so as to give straight uniform grout lines, both parallel and
perpendicular to the walls. Align joints in base with joints in floor.
P. Minimum Tile Sizes: Lay out all tile work so as to avoid cuts less than one-half tile in size.
Q. Control Joints: Control joints in substrates must be continued through tile work.
R. Edges Trim at Dissimilar Floor Materials: Install edge trim at all exposed edges of ceramic tile
flooring. Edging shall be one continuous piece at doors and wherever standard lengths permit.
Securely fasten edging to substrate.
S. Door Frames: Rake out grout between ceramic wall tile and doorframes for installation of sealant
under Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”
T. Grout:
1. Use only unsanded grout for floors.
2. Sanded grout. Finish the grout even with bottom of cushion edges on tile.
3. Before grouting tile, seal the tiles with a sealer recommended by the tile manufacturer.
3.03.CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning:
1. Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free of foreign
matter. Use neutral cleaner. Acid solutions NOT PERMITTED.
2. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise
defective tile work.
B. Protection:
1. When recommended by the tile manufacturer, apply protective coat of neutral protective
cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
2. Protect installed tile floors with kraft paper or other heavy covering during the construction
period to prevent damage and wear.
3. Prohibit all foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 3 days, preferably 7 days,
after installation.
C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from all tile surfaces.
END 093013.
OAA-2020-159 LAY-IN CEILINGS 095113-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
SECTION 095113 - LAY-IN CEILINGS
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Lay-in panel ceilings, including suspension systems and accessories.
2. Hangers for support of recessed light fixtures in acoustical ceilings as required.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Suspended gypsum board ceilings.........................................................Section 092116.
2. HVAC registers, grills and ductwork.....................................................Mech. Specs.
3. Lights and other electrical items............................................................Elect. Drawings.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installers: Use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
erection of the selected systems.
B. Installation Standards: Comply with recommendations of current CISCA “Ceiling Systems
Handbook” except as specified otherwise hereinafter. Maintain a copy of the handbook at the site for
Architect’s inspection while work of this Section is being accomplished.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Product Data: Submit data from manufacturer’s brochures describing each product to be used.
C. Maintenance Stock: Deliver to site for future maintenance not less than 1 unopened bundle of lay-in
ceiling units of each type.
1.04.JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver acoustical ceiling materials until spaces have been enclosed and made weather-tight
and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near
those to be maintained during final occupancy.
B. Do not install acoustical ceilings until work above lay-in ceilings, particularly mechanical and
electrical work, has been completed, inspected and approved.
1.05.WARRANTIES
A. Ceiling Panels: Provide manufacturer's standard 30 year warranty that products will be free from
defects in materials and workmanship, and when subjected to the allowable conditions of
temperature and humidity, will be free of visible sag, mold and mildew.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.MATERIALS
A. Metal Suspension System: 15/16 inch exposed face, rigid metal, interlocking cross tees and main tee
runners with flush joints at intersections, complying with ASTM C 635. Provide matching wall angle
molding and all accessories for a complete system. See Drawings for specific systems and their
locations.
095113-2 LAY-IN CEILINGS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1. System Duty Level: Provide suspension system duty level as required to support items
penetrating ceilings, including light fixtures and HVAC outlets/inlets, and as required by
ASTM C 635, but not less than that specified.
2. Provide system components and accessories as required to meet seismic design category
indicated.
3. Specialty Systems: “Compasso Curved” ceiling trim (height as noted on drawings) by USG or
comparable equal products.
B. Tile & Panels: As noted on drawings.
C. Accessory Materials:
1. Sealer for Edge of Cut Tiles: As furnished by tile manufacturer, color to match tiles.
2. Hanger Wire: Pre-stretched, galvanized, soft-annealed mild steel wire conforming to ASTM
A 641, minimum 12-gauge. Provide thicker gauge where necessary to meet seismic design
codes requirements.
3. Hanger Anchor Studs: Screws with deep throat threads having forged wire suspension eyelet,
cadmium-plated; such as by I-Lag, tel: 805-523-9148, or Abesco's “Drop-Ceiling Anchor
Screws” tel: 800-843-2738.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.INSPECTION
A. Verify that work above ceilings, particularly mechanical, electrical and firestopping work, has been
completed, inspected and approved before beginning installation of acoustical ceiling panel system.
B. Installer shall be responsible for all conditions affecting proper installation of his materials and shall
not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02.INSTALLATION OF PANEL/TILE SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. General:
1. Install intermediate duty suspension systems in compliance with ASTM C 636. Space tee
runners at 4'-0" centers and hang by direct suspension from structure above. Install
interlocking cross tees to form 2ft x 2ft and 2ft. x 4ft grids as indicated.
a. Layout: Border units shall be equal in size at opposite walls and shall be at least 12" in
width, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
b. Runners: Shall be straight, true to line, with exposed surfaces flush and level.
B. Suspension: Suspend main runners with wires placed 4'-0" o.c. Install wires plumb and free of
kinks, attached by looping and wire-tying directly to eyelet anchor studs.
1. Suspend only from bottom of wood framing for roof structure. Do not suspend from gypsum
board, bridging or suspended equipment (e.g. pipes and ducts).
2. Keep wires from touching ducts and pipes. Non-plumb wires shall be matched by
countersloping wires or counterbracing.
3. Where the Drawings show a lay-in light fixture, support the ceiling suspension grid with
hanger wires placed within 6" of each corner of the fixture.
C. Install perimeter supporting wall trim where border units abut walls or other vertical surfaces. Miter
the joints at outside corners of walls.
D. Properly seat grid members at all joint, including at perimeter supporting wall / closure trim. Attach
tees to perimeter supporting wall / closure trim, with manufacturer’s recommended clips designed for
application. Pop rivets will not be permitted.
OAA-2020-159 LAY-IN CEILINGS 095113-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.03.INSTALLATION OF LAY-IN CEILING PANELS
A. Install panels to bear equally and uniformly on the grid system on all four sides, with adjacent edges
parallel and equally spaced. Install panels with direction of mill pattern aligned in one direction.
Panel faces shall form a true plane.
B. Hold-Down Clips: Anchor the panels with hold down clips when within 20ft of an exterior door.
Clips shall be omitted where access to mechanical work in ceiling plenum above is required. Check
Mechanical and Electrical Drawings for access locations.
C. Border panels shall fit the suspension grid and the wall angle such that panels will not skew or show
voids.
D. When cutting border panels, rabbet the cut edge of the panel and seal the cut area with factory
furnished sealer in color to match.
3.04.ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Following installation, clean dirty or discolored surfaces of units and leave free of defects. Replace
units that cannot be cleaned to factory-new condition.
B. Remove and replace units that are damaged, warped or improperly installed.
END 095113.
OAA-2020-159 HYBRID CARPET 096518-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
SECTION 096518 – HYBRID CARPET
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included in this Section Features:
1.Preparation of surfaces to receive hybrid carpet.
2.Installation of hybrid carpet.
3.Vinyl base at perimeter walls.
4.Metal edge trim.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Concrete floor finishing ..............................................................................Section 033000.
2.Edging at ceramic tile..................................................................................Section 093013.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Obtain hybrid carpeting of each type and color from same production run and of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
1.Obtain components, including leveling and patching compounds, for hybrid carpeting system
from the same manufacturer as hybrid carpeting or from a manufacturer approved by the hybrid
carpeting manufacturer.
B.Installer’s Qualifications: Hybrid carpet installation company shall be certified by hybrid carpet
manufacturer and shall have at least 5 years satisfactory experience in the installation of the type
specified. Only qualified and experienced hybrid carpet mechanics working under proper supervision
shall be employed on the project.
C.Flammability Test Requirements: Provide only materials, including adhesives, which will produce an
installation having the following properties:
1.Critical Radiant Flux of at least 0.45 watts per square centimeter, Class I, when tested according
to ASTM E 648.
2.Maximum Specific Optical Density (Smoke Generation) of 450 or less when tested according to
ASTM E 662.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A.Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Certifications:
1.Include certified laboratory test report for flammability requirements.
2.Manufacturer shall submit certification that Installer is a factory approved installer.
C.Maintenance Supply:
1.Furnish additional hybrid carpet material for maintenance purposes equal to approximately 5% of
hybrid carpet installed. Half of the material furnished shall be in pieces no less than 3 square
yards. Of the remainder, no piece may be less than 1/2 square yard.
2.Package the hybrid carpet repair remnants neatly in wrapper suitable for preservation of hybrid
carpet in long term storage. Deliver packaged remnants to building.
3.Furnish to the Owner in labeled boxes for future maintenance not less than 2% of wall base
installed.
D.Maintenance Manuals:
096518-2 HYBRID CARPET OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.Obtain from manufacturer and submit for Owner's use, 3 copies of manufacturer’s complete
maintenance recommendations for hybrid carpet installed.
2.Obtain from the installers of hybrid carpet, and submit in Operations and Maintenance Manual for
Owners use, 3 copies of all concrete slab testing specified herein and additionally required by
hybrid carpet manufacturer. Clearly identify each test result and include accurate plans indicating
where and when each test was taken.
1.04.PRODUCT STORAGE, DELIVERY & COORDINATION
A.Delivery and installation of hybrid carpet shall be coordinated with completion schedule for the various
areas.
B.Hybrid carpet shall be stored away from construction activities and shall be protected against moisture,
dust and vermin.
C.Installation shall not begin in any area until painting and ceiling work for that area have been completed.
1.05.WARRANTY
A.Provide all warranties standard to the manufacturer for the hybrid carpet selected.
B.Warranties shall start at an adjusted date if hybrid carpet is installed after the date of Substantial
Completion.
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.MATERIALS
A.Hybrid carpet and vinyl base shall be provided as selected by Owner and as noted on drawings.
B.Wall Base at walls around Carpet: Vinyl complying with ASTM F 1861, Type TV (thermoplastic
vinyl), Group 1 (solid homogeneous), Style B (coved), 6" high, minimum 0.080 inch thickness.
C.All hybrid carpet shall be manufactured at one time. All hybrid carpet shall be of a consistent
construction throughout.
D.All accessories shall be as recommended by the hybrid carpet manufacturer.
E.Metal Edge Trim: Reno-TK (straight) & Reno-TK-R (curved) anodized aluminum by Schluter except
as otherwise noted on drawings.
F.Adhesives:
1.Water based, strippable, waterproof type, VOC compliant, asbestos free, compatible with
substrate and materials, as recommended by manufacturer.
2.For outside corners in vinyl base use contact cement.
3.EXECUTION
3.01.EXAMINATION
A.Before beginning work to lay new hybrid carpet, examine all surfaces over which work is to be applied.
Verify that concrete finishes comply with requirements and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges,
depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. Report to the Architect in writing any surface defects and
conditions that are unsuitable to receive work.
B.Testing: Hybrid carpet installer shall perform tests specified below so that test locations are evenly
spaced within installation areas. Perform tests in areas where drying is most restricted but not closer
than 5ft to a perimeter, performing at least 3 tests for the first 1,000 SF and an additional test for each
additional 1,000 SF.
1.Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after
substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.
OAA-2020-159 HYBRID CARPET 096518-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2.Alkalinity Test: ASTM F 710. Test concrete for pH and proceed with installation only after the
pH of all tests is not less than 7 nor greater than 9.
3.Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by hybrid carpet manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
4.Moisture meter readings and plastic mat test results will not be accepted as conclusive.
C.Verify that surfaces to receive vinyl base are free of sealers, oils and other bond inhibitors. Visually
inspect for evidence of moisture, salts, dusting, mold or mildew.
D.Starting of work shall be construed as acceptance of the suitability of the surfaces to receive work.
Remove and replace at no charge to Owner all work under this Section which may require removal in
order to correct defects caused by insufficient examination and preparation of the substrates.
3.02.PREPARATION
A.Check the match of hybrid carpet rolls before cutting and ensure that there is no visible variations.
B.Clean and prepare to a satisfactory condition all surfaces scheduled to receive carpet.
C.Fill saw cut joints, construction joints, expansion joints, cracks and depressions in the slab with flexible
vinyl filler as required to prevent show-through.
3.03. HYBRID CARPET INSTALLATION
A.Install hybrid carpet using the RS System (Peel & Stick).
B.Lay hybrid carpet in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Lay hybrid carpet smooth and even,
cut and fit evenly along all walls and around all projections. Continue hybrid carpet into recesses and
under equipment and furnishings.
C.All hybrid carpet seams shall be chemically welded. Comply with hybrid carpet manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
D.Edges at Other Floor Materials: Install edge strips at all exposed edges of hybrid carpet except where
hybrid carpet meets ceramic/paver tile; in which case, secure the hybrid carpet edge with the edging
provided with the tile. Edging shall be one continuous piece at doors and wherever standard lengths
permit. Securely fasten edging to floors.
1.When hybrid carpet ends at a doorway and door swings over hybrid carpet, place hybrid carpet
under door (but not beyond door) and finish hybrid carpet with nose of edge strip aligned with the
edge of the stop on the door frame.
2.When hybrid carpet ends at doorway and door swings away from hybrid carpet, place hybrid
carpet up to face of door and finish hybrid carpet with edge strip having its nose aligned with the
edge of the stop on the door frame.
E.Workmanship: The completed hybrid carpet installation shall be free of ripples and puckers.
3.04.INSTALLATION OF VINYL BASE
A.Install the coved base on top of hybrid carpet.
B.Install base in as long lengths as practicable. Do not stretch base to fill void spaces. Do not allow joints
within 16" of corners and ends of runs.
C.Joints shall be tight, free of visible adhesive and adhesive residues. The tops and faces of pieces shall be
flush across all joints.
D.Tightly bond the base to the wall throughout its length, with continuous contact at horizontal and
vertical surfaces.
E.At outside corners, lightly V-cut the back of the base and secure to wall with contact cement.
3.05.PROTECTION
A.Protect hybrid carpet after installation against stains and accumulations of dust and debris.
096518-4 HYBRID CARPET OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.06.CLEANUP
A.The completed installation shall be free of scraps, hybrid carpet ripples and puckers. Clean up all dirt
and debris. Remove all spots with proper remover.
B.Damage: Repair any damage to existing paintwork, millwork, walls, doors, floors, etc., caused by
hybrid carpet installation.
C.Upon completion of the installation remove all waste, excess materials, protective coverings, tools and
equipment.
D.Carefully and thoroughly vacuum clean all new installed hybrid carpet to Owner's satisfaction. Do not
begin vacuuming until perimeter resilient base has cured at least 10 days. When schedules allow, do not
begin vacuuming until 14 days after installation of resilient base.
END 096518.
OAA-2020-159 RESINOUS FLOORING 096724-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
Section 096724 – RESINOUS FLOORING
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Surface preparation.
2.Furnishing and installing seamless RF-1 hybrid resinous flooring system with integral cove base.
RF-2 not used.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Concrete substrate and floor slab water test ..............................................Section 033000.
2.Joint Sealants .............................................................................................Section 079200.
3.Wall Substrates ..........................................................................................Section 092116.
4.Flooring transitions....................................................................................Section 093013.
5.Floor Drains ...............................................................................................See Drawings.
1.02.REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete
B.ACI 302.1R-80 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
C.United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) and Food and Drug Administration (FDA)
authorization for incidental contact with foodstuffs.
1.03.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Installer Qualifications:
1.A flooring specialist with skilled mechanics having not less than 5 years’ satisfactory experience
in the application of the flooring system specified. The Installer shall be approved in writing by
the manufacturer of the flooring system and have been trained, by the flooring system
manufacturer, in all phases of surface preparation and application of the specified flooring
system.
2.Furnish upon Architect’s request, a listing of the projects of similar type completed by the
installation crew’s foreman within the previous 3 years. Include locations, sizes of installations,
products installed, dates of installation, and the contact name and phone number.
B.The flooring system shall be USDA compliant.
C.Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening
agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer. Obtain secondary
materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from
manufacturer recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials.
D.Pre-Construction Conferences: Installer of flooring system shall meet with General Contractor,
concrete installers and plumbing contractor before construction begins to establish:
1.The techniques and materials to be used by concrete finishers in preparation for the flooring
system.
2.Proper floor drain elevations.
E.Coordination: Flooring Installer shall attend Concrete Floor Slab Water Tests performed by Concrete
Contractor to determine location of depressions in slab and assign responsibility for repair of
depressions per requirements defined in Section 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.
096724-2 RESINOUS FLOORING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.04.MOCKUP
A.Construct, in an inconspicuous area selected by Architect, a mock-up, of minimum 4’ x 4’ size each,
illustrating texture of resinous flooring to be provided on the project. Mockup shall be of full
thickness and use the same materials and methods as will be used for the finish installation.
1.Mock-up shall illustrate, in addition to other required characteristics, the finish texture of the
slip-resistant resinous flooring system intended to be installed as indicated on Drawings.
2.Mock-up shall include an integral cove base where the sample meets a wall surface. Provide
termination accessories matching those to be installed in the final installation.
B.Simulate finished lighting conditions for Owner's review of mockup. Owner will review the mockup
for conformance of color to approved samples, suitability of finish texture, evenness of finished
appearance and workmanship. Rework mockup until approved by Owner.
C.The approved mockup shall become the standard of acceptance for all resinous flooring work.
1.Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
contained in mockup unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
1.05. SUBMITTALS
A.Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Product Data: Submit flooring system manufacturer’s product data describing all components,
including auxiliary materials and filler compounds. Include flooring system manufacturer’s specific
recommendations for surface preparation, mixing, and application of materials.
C.Sample for Verification of Color: Submit two 12 inch square samples of the specified flooring system,
in color indicated on Drawings and verified by Owner, applied to hardboard or similar rigid backing.
1.Submit additional 12 inch square samples of specified flooring system on rigid backing as
requested by Owner until final color selection is made.
D.Certificates:
1.Submit Installer certificate signed by flooring system manufacturer certifying that installers
comply with specified requirements.
2.Submit certified test data confirming product’s conformance to the performance criteria
specified.
3.Submit documentation (may be letter on flooring system manufacturer’s letterhead) confirming
compliance with USDA requirements.
E.Maintenance Data: Submit recommended maintenance procedures that will assure continued
performance of the installation to its maximum potential.
1.06.DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.All material shall be delivered in original manufacturer's containers with unbroken seals and with
manufacturer's labels, indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other
components, intact and legible.
B.Store materials in dry protected area between 45° and 80° Fahrenheit. Keep out of direct sunlight.
Protect from freezing.
C.Follow all manufacturer's specific label instructions and prudent safety practices for storage and
handling.
D.Do not use materials that have been stored longer than the product’s nominal shelf life.
OAA-2020-159 RESINOUS FLOORING 096724-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.07.JOB CONDITIONS
A.Material, air, and surface temperatures shall be in the range of 45° to 80° Fahrenheit during
application and cure, unless a special formulation is being used and flooring system manufacturer has
been consulted.
B.Relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than 85 percent and the
surface temperature shall be at least 5 degrees Fahrenheit above the dew point.
C.Conditions required of new concrete to be coated:
1.Concrete shall be moisture cured for a minimum of 7 days at 70° F. The concrete must be fully
cured for a minimum of 28 days prior to application of the coating system pending moisture
testing.
2.Surface contaminants such as curing agents, membranes, or other bond breakers should not be
used.
3.Concrete shall have a "rubbed" finish; float or darby finish the concrete (a hard steel trowel is
neither necessary nor desirable).
D.Work Force: Provide sufficient workmen and equipment so that material is applied free of “cold
joints.”
E.Lighting: Maintain lighting at a minimum uniform level of 50 to 60 foot-candles in all areas where
the resinous flooring system is being installed. Do not apply material in direct sunlight.
F.Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation to produce a complete air exchange every five (5) minutes
for safety and curing of flooring system components.
G.Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for 24 hours after application unless
flooring system manufacturer recommends a longer period.
1.08.WARRANTY
A.The Installer shall furnish a standard warranty for the resinous flooring system guaranteeing that any
loss of bond or cracking will be repaired without additional charge to Owner, for a period of one year.
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A.Res-Tek Inc. 110 Riverside Drive Cartersville, Georgia 30120, PH: (770) 427-4034, (888) 737-8351,
FAX: (770) 427-4037. Manufacturer’s Representative is Joe Lasko, (770) 427-4037.
2.02.SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.RF-1: The resinous flooring system shall be seamless, applied at approximately 1/4” finish
thickness, consisting of PUR-Guard Cementitious Urethane HD-SL (Parts A and B) with PUR-
Guard HD-SL Filler (Part C) with Colored Quartz broadcast; and two coats of MAC-925 Sealer
coat.
B.Color and texture will be as selected by Owner.
C.The resinous flooring system shall be chemically resistant to a wide range of acids, alkalis, salts,
fats, oils, and other chemicals.
2.03.MATERIALS
A.Res-Tek Hybrid HD-SL Slurry Flooring System consists of:
1.Primer/Sealer (if required): PUR-Guard HD-P single component primer as recommended by
flooring system manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated.
096724-4 RESINOUS FLOORING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2.Integral Cove Base: Res-Tek MAC-Guard resins with flooring system manufacturer
recommended PUR-Guard fillers appropriate for conditions and substrates.
a.Cove Cap for Integral Cove Base: 3/16” (horizontal dimension) zinc “L” shaped
termination strip for top of integral cove base.
3.Patching/Sloping (where required): PUR-Guard HD-T.
4.Topping/Base Coat: PUR-Guard HD-SL Slurry, consisting of PUR-Guard (Parts A & B) and
HD-SL (Part C) Filler with Res-Tek Colored Quartz broadcast.
a.Pigment: Flooring system manufacturer’s standard pigment for coloring topping / base
coat. Color as selected by Owner.
b.Colored Quartz (for broadcasting): Ceramic coated silica. Provide color as selected by
Owner.
5.Topcoat:
a.MAC-925 Sealer / Topcoat Resin: Provide two coats on entire resinous flooring system
installation.
6.Accessories: Provide all components and accessories recommended by flooring system
manufacturer for a complete flooring installation.
2.04.PRODUCT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A.PUR-Guard HD-SL Slurry (topping / base coat):
1.VOC:0 g/L
2.Compressive Strength, psi (ASTM C579):5,800
3.Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM C307):950
4.Tensile Modulus, psi:19,500
5.Chemical Resistance, (ASTM D543):
Effect of weak acids:none
Effect of strong acids:slight
Effect of alkalis:none
Effect of salt solutions:none
Effect of oil, grease:none
B.Res-Tek MAC-925 Sealer:
1.Percentage Reactive Resin:100%
2.Percentage Solids:100%
3.Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570):0.5
4.Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638):3,850
5.Tensile Modulus, psi (ASTM D638):470,000
6.Coefficient of Thermal Expansion (ASTM D696) in./in./deg. F:.000035
7.Electrical Resistivity (ASTM D257):
Volume Resistance, ohm-cm:1015
Surface Resistance, ohm:1012
8.Water Vapor Transmission (DIN 53122) g/cm-hr-mm Hg X 10-9:1.43
9.Chemical Resistance, ASTM D543:
Effect of weak acids:none
Effect of strong acids:slight
OAA-2020-159 RESINOUS FLOORING 096724-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
Effect of alkalis:none
Effect of salt solutions:none
Effect of oil, grease:none
Effect of sunlight (UV radiation):none
2.05.MIXES
A.Follow flooring system manufacturer's written instructions, procedures and recommendations.
3.EXECUTION
3.01.INSPECTION
A.Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which flooring is to be installed. All
deficiencies and conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work shall be
reported to General Contractor in writing.
B.Do not proceed with application until the surface is acceptable. Commencement of flooring
installation will be construed as acceptance of substrate and responsibility for results obtained.
C.All drains in the installation area shall be determined to be working and shall be installed level with
the concrete slab surface.
3.02. PREPARATION
A.Protection: Protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated with masking and/or covers. Owner's
equipment shall be protected from dust, cleaning solutions, and flooring materials.
B.Surface Preparation – General:
1.Prepare and clean all substrates according to flooring system manufacturer's written instructions
for substrate indicated. Provide clean and dry substrate. Dislodge dirt, mortar spatter, paint
overspray, and other dry surface accumulations and contamination by scraping, brushing,
sweeping, vacuuming, and/or compressed air “blow-down”.
2.Surfaces that are heavily contaminated shall be cleaned with the appropriate degreaser,
detergent, or other appropriate cleaner/surfactant followed by thoroughly rinsing with fresh
water to remove the accumulation prior to mechanical cleaning efforts. Mechanical cleaning
will not remove such deposits, but only drive them deeper.
C.Surface Preparation - Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze,
efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants
incompatible with resinous flooring. Roughen concrete substrates as follows:
1.Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed
shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup and as recommended by
flooring system manufacturer. All surface and embedded accumulations of paint, toppings,
hardened concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes, and other similar surface
characteristics shall be completely removed leaving a bare concrete surface having a profile
similar to 40 grit sandpaper and exposing the upper fascia of concrete aggregate, unless flooring
system manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent.
2.Floor areas inaccessible to the mobile blast cleaning machines shall be mechanically abraded to
the same degree of cleanliness, soundness, and profile using vertical disc scarifiers, starwheel
scarifiers, needle guns, scabblers, or other suitably effective equipment.
3.After blasting, traces or accumulations of spent abrasive, laitance, removed toppings, and other
debris shall be removed with brush or vacuum.
D.Application of the respective specified material system(s) must be completed before any water or
other contamination of the surface occurs.
096724-6 RESINOUS FLOORING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
E.Moisture-Vapor Emissions Testing: Conduct testing to verify that slab is properly dry. Concrete
shall have a moisture emission rate of no more than 8 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hour period as
determined by ASTM F1869 anhydrous calcium chloride testing.
F.Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range.
Perform tests recommended by flooring system manufacturer. Proceed with application only after
substrates pass testing.
G.Patching and Filling (where required): Use patching and fill material to fill holes and minor
depressions in substrates according to flooring system manufacturer's written instructions.
1.Spalls and Weak Spots: Remove weak concrete by chipping and grinding. Replace removed
material with approved patching compound applied to clean, dust-free concrete.
2.Cracks: Prepare and treat cracks in slab as required to prevent them from showing in the
finished flooring. Remove weak edges. Treat moving cracks as recommended in writing by
flooring system manufacturer.
3.Minor Depressions: Flooring Installer shall fill depressions (less than 1/8” in depth) that occur
in areas where not easily accessed for removal ponded water. Minor depressions to be filled
shall have been determined by Owner at time of Concrete Floor Slab Water Test.
H.Control Joint Treatment: Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate joints to prevent joints
from reflecting through resinous flooring according to flooring system manufacturer's written
instructions.
I.Expansion and Isolation Joint Treatment: At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with
flooring system manufacturer's written instructions.
J.Edges: Where resinous flooring system ends at bare concrete, do not feather. Saw-cut the concrete
to a straight and square line at the edge line. On the side to receive the flooring system, chip or
grind away the concrete to 1/2” to 1” deep, to a line approximately 4" from the saw cut.
1.Center the edge line under door at doorways.
2.Fill the chipped area to a smooth surface with patching material before applying finish system.
K.Drains: Chip or grind away the concrete 1/2” to 1” deep surrounding drains to a line approximately
6” from drain edge and fill with patching material as specified above for edges.
3.03.INSTALLATION
A.Install flooring edge strips with horizontal leg under resinous flooring. Vertical leg of edge strip
shall align with top of adjacent ceramic paver tile to provide protection to edge of paver tile from
chipping or other damage from traffic.
B.Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to flooring system
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.Refer to flooring system manufacturer's data sheets for pot-life/temperature relationship. Only
mix full kits as supplied by flooring system manufacturer.
C.Apply components of resinous flooring system according to flooring system manufacturer's written
instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.
1.Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system
to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion.
2.Cure resinous flooring components according to flooring system manufacturer's written
instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
3.04.PRIME COAT (if required)
A.Refer to flooring system manufacturer as to method of determining if prime coat is necessary.
Comply with flooring system manufacturer’s recommendations based on conditions specific Project.
OAA-2020-159 RESINOUS FLOORING 096724-7
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B.If primer is recommended, apply over prepared substrate at flooring system manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate.
3.05.INTEGRAL COVE BASE
A.Install zinc cove cap to wall surface by method recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for
type of substrate and conditions. Protect top surface of cove cap from flooring or other materials
until flooring installation is complete to ensure a clean surface for adhesion of sealant.
B.Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring.
C.Apply according to flooring system manufacturer's written instructions and details, including those
for taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and topcoating of cove base. Cove base shall be a
trowel-on cove base consisting of a trowel applied radius/base mix with a zinc termination strip
installed at the top of the base.
D.Cove base shall receive a top coat consistent with and matching that of the flooring system.
E.Round internal and external corners of cove base.
3.06.PATCHING/FILLING (where required)
A.Mix the PUR-Guard HD-T Resin, HD-Filler, and necessary aggregate (if required) in the
proportions recommended by the flooring system manufacturer.
B.Use mixture to repair any damaged concrete, or to fill areas as needed.
3.07.TOPPING / BASE COAT
A.The entire mixed batch should be poured and spread at once, do not let material set in pail.
B.Spread the topping material with a gauge rake set to a depth of 3/16”. Lightly trowel to a uniform
thickness of 3/16” as necessary.
C.Immediately after application, roll with a loop roller available from the flooring system
manufacturer to release any trapped air from the topping.
D.Broadcast Colored Quartz into the fresh material before it begins to cure. It is important that the
aggregate "rains" down, and not be thrown into, the surface. Broadcast Colored Quartz on material
surface in quantities to seed it to full rejection.
E.Allow the topping to cure.
F.Remove excess Colored Quartz by sweeping, “blow-down”, and/or vacuum prior to next step.
3.08.TOPCOATS
A.Pour the mixture batches onto the floor surface and use a 9", or 18" wide, 3/8" – 1/2" thick-napped,
solvent-resistant paint roller to roll out the material to form a uniform, continuous film. Use a paint
brush to reach areas inaccessible to the roller. Work quickly and deliberately; the pot life is short (10
-15 minutes). Do not leave any "puddles"; roll out any such accumulations.
1.Apply two coats of MAC-925 Sealer.
B.If required to achieve texture approved by Owner in mock-up, broadcast aluminum oxide, glass
beads, or other suitable material into the appropriate layer of wet topcoat resin; size and rate as
determined by Owner. All broadcast material shall be locked into place with at least one coat of
topcoat material. Never allow broadcast material to remain exposed.
C.Allow each topcoat and sealer coat, to cure according to flooring system manufacturer prior to
application of additional topcoats.
096724-8 RESINOUS FLOORING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.09.FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Expected Results: The finished resinous flooring system shall be uniform in color, texture, and
appearance. All edges that terminate at walls, floor discontinuities, and other embedded items shall
be sharp, uniform, and cosmetically acceptable with no thick or ragged edges.
B.All work not acceptable to the Owner as matching the approved mock-up shall be corrected, at no
additional cost to Owner.
3.10.CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.Clean flooring system materials from adjacent surfaces immediately upon contact. Use rags and
appropriate solvents to prevent marring, discoloration and change of gloss on finished surfaces.
Installer shall repair any damage that should arise from either the application or clean-up effort.
B.Protect the system from inclusion of dust and other contaminates until cured hard.
C.Protect the resinous flooring system from damage and wear during construction operations, as
required, using temporary coverings recommended by the flooring system manufacturer. Remove
temporary coverings just prior to final inspection.
D.Clean the resinous flooring system just prior to final inspection, using materials and procedures
suitable to the flooring system manufacturer.
3.11.COATING SCHEDULE
A.Primer (if required) shall be PUR-Guard HD-P. Application rate shall be 100 - 130 sq. ft. per
gallon.
B.Integral cove base shall be MAC-Guard HD-CB with fillers recommended by flooring system
manufacturer for products, substrates and conditions. Install for finish thickness to match 3/16”
deep zinc cove cap.
C.Patching/filling material (where required) shall be PUR-Guard HD-T.
D.Topping / base coat slurry shall be PUR-Guard HD-SL (Parts A&B resin) and PUR-Guard SL Filler
applied, a rate of 30 - 33 sq. ft. per batch, with a gauge rake set at 3/16" for a 3/16” thick
topping/base coat.
E.Colored Quartz to be broadcast into the uncured topping, seeding it to full rejection, an approximate
rate of 0.5 – 0.75 pounds per sq. ft.
F.Topcoat / Sealer shall be MAC-925, first coat applied at the approximate rate of 90 - 100 sq. ft. per
gallon for a minimum dry film thickness of 18 mils., and second coat applied at the rate of 100 sq. ft.
per gallon for a minimum dry film thickness of 16 mils.
END 096724.
OAA-2020-159 VINYL WALL COVERING 097200-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
SECTION 097200 - VINYL WALL COVERING
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Vinyl wall covering.
2.Sealing of wall surface to receive vinyl wall covering.
B.Related Work: Specified In Other Sections:
1.Gypsum board to receive vinyl wall covering ...........................................Section 092116.
2.Elect. Trim removal on surfaces to receive wall covering.........................Elect. Sects.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Fire Hazard Classifications: Installed wall covering shall meet the following:
1.Flame Spread:Not more than 25.
2.Fuel Contribution:Not more than 15.
3.Smoke development:Not more than 25.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A.Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Product Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical description and installation instructions for
the vinyl wall covering and its installation material.
C.Samples: Submit 3 samples, at least 5" x 8", of each type of vinyl wall covering, illustrating the range
of color and pattern variation. Submit full book size samples upon request.
D.Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of the vinyl wall covering manufacturer's printed
instructions for maintenance of the installed work. Include name of manufacturer, material brand
name, color and texture designation and precautions for the use of cleaning materials and methods that
could damage the wall covering.
E.Maintenance Supply: Deliver to the site any surplus (but not less than 1 lin. yd.) of each type, color,
and pattern of vinyl wall covering installed, taken from the same manufactured sequence as the
materials installed.
1.04.PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A.Deliver materials to the project site in original packages or containers clearly labeled to identify
manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, and fire hazard classification.
B.Store materials in original undamaged packages or containers. Do not store vinyl wall covering rolls in
an upright position. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40°F.
1.05.JOB CONDITIONS
A.Maintain a constant minimum temperature of not less than 60°F at areas of installation for at least 72
hours before, and 48 hours after application of materials.
097200-2 VINYL WALL COVERING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.MATERIALS
A.Vinyl Wall Covering: Complying with Fed. Spec. CCC-W-408, Type II (Medium Duty), with
minimum vinyl coating (less fabric) of 7 oz./sq. yd., manufactured product as noted on drawings.
1.In All Climate Zones: Vinyl wall covering for installation on exterior walls shall be micro-
vented.
2.In Florida and Coastal Climates: All vinyl wall covering shall be micro-vented.
B.Primer/Sealer: Primer/sealer with sizing that is intended for use under wallcovering, is VOC compliant
and has a vapor permeance of at least 10 grains. Sherwin Williams Multi-Purpose Interior/Exterior
Latex Primer/Sealer, B51-450 Series or Architect approved comparable product.
C.Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended strippable, mildew-resistant, breathable and non-staining
adhesive manufactured expressly for applying the selected vinyl wall covering to primed gypsum
wallboard.
3.EXECUTION
3.01.INSPECTION
A.Examine the areas and conditions under which the vinyl wall covering is to be installed and notify the
Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B.Install materials only when humidity conditions approximate the interior conditions that will exist
when the building is occupied.
C.Do not proceed with application until surface fixtures and trim, such as electrical outlet and switch
plates, escutcheons, wall stops for doors, etc, have been removed by workmen of the appropriate trade.
D.Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02.PREPARATION
A.Unpackage the vinyl wall covering materials and allow it to acclimatize to the area of installation 24
hours before application.
B.Apply primer/sealer evenly all across surfaces to be covered with vinyl wall fabric. Do not allow
primer/sealer onto adjacent surfaces; mask as appropriate and clean-up spatter, etc. as work progresses.
3.03.INSTALLATION
A.Place fabric in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with adhesive uniformly spread all across
back of fabric. Unless otherwise directed, place wall covering panels consecutively in the order they
are cut from rolls, including panels above and/or below wall openings. Hang by reversing alternate
strips except on match patterns.
B.Install vinyl wall covering from ceiling line to 1/2" below top of trim at base of the installation. Keep
intersection with ceiling line straight, level and neat.
C.Seams: Install seams vertically and plumb, and at least 6" away from corners. Horizontal seams will
not be permitted. Overlap seams and double-cut to assure tight closure.
D.Trim selvages as required to assure color uniformity and pattern match. Cut wall covering evenly to
the edges of wall penetrations.
E.Roll, brush, or use a broad knife to remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters and other defects. Install
vinyl wall covering with an intimate bond to the substrate, smooth, clean, without wrinkles, gaps and
overlaps.
OAA-2020-159 VINYL WALL COVERING 097200-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.04.CLEANUP
A.Remove excess adhesive along finished seams before it dries, using warm water and a clean sponge;
and wipe dry.
B.Verify that cut edges of wall covering are completely concealed; repair any places where edges are not
completely concealed.
C.Upon completion of work, remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from wall covering
installation and leave areas of work in a neat, clean condition.
END 097200.
OAA-2020-159 PAINTING 099000-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
SECTION 099000 - PAINTING
1.GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.Work Included In This Section Features:
1.Surface preparation and painting of all interior exposed items and surfaces:
a.that are unfinished or shop primed.
b.that are indicated to be painted.
2.Surface preparation and painting of all exterior exposed items and surfaces:
a.that are unfinished or shop primed.
b.that are indicated to be painted.
c.including, but not limited to, hollow metal doors and frames, handrails, gate cedar boards,
and concrete light post base.
3.Touching up with sealant any dents, cracks or voids visible after application of primer.
4.Protection of surfaces not scheduled for painting; cleanup of paint spatters; protection of newly
painted surfaces.
B.Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1.Shop priming & touch up in the field...........................................................................Various Sects.
2.Wood trim and cedar gate boards.................................................................................Section 062000.
3.Removal of hardware trim for painting........................................................................Section 062000.
4.Hollow metal doors & frames ......................................................................................Section 081113.
5.Gypsum board surfaces ................................................................................................Section 092116.
6.Removal of electrical items prior to painted ................................................................Elect. Sects.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Provide finish coats that are compatible with shop primers. Provide barrier coats over incompatible
primers or remove and reprime as required.
B.Primers and undercoat paints shall be produced by same manufacturer as finish coats.
C.Only skilled mechanics shall be employed for execution of painting work.
D.Use paint materials only as directed by the manufacturer’s label on container.
E.Definitions and Terminology: The terms and definitions in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
F.Comply with Federal and State Regulations regarding VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) levels.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A.Make submittals under provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B.Product Data: Submit all products to be used. List each material and cross-reference it to the specified
paint and finish system and application. Identify by manufacturer’s catalog number and general
classification.
C.Color Samples: When so requested, submit samples on portions of the work at the site, not less than 4ft x
4ft size.
D.Maintenance Supply: Deliver to Owner in unused quart containers 1 quart of each type and color of paint
used on the Project. Mark each container with color and room names/exterior surfaces where paint was
used, without obscuring manufacturer’s label.
099000-2 PAINTING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.04.PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.All paints, varnishes, enamels, stains, paste fillers and similar materials must be delivered in their original
containers, with the seals unbroken and labels intact.
B.Except as otherwise allowed by paint manufacturer’s written instructions, maintain temperature in storage
areas between 50°F and 90°F.
1.05.JOB CONDITIONS
A.Environmental Requirements: Do not apply paint when the surface is damp, the room humidity exceeds
the manufacturer’s recommendations, or, for exterior paints, during rainy or frosty weather.
B.Protection: Protect painted work at all times and protect all adjacent work and materials by suitable
covering or other method during progress of painting work.
C.Remove oily rags, waste, etc., from the building at the end of each day’s work and take every precaution
to avoid the danger of fire. Keep oily rags, etc. susceptible to spontaneous ignition, in water filled metal
cans with tight lids or in FMRC-approved containers.
2.PRODUCTS
2.01.MATERIALS
A.Approved Manufacturers: Paint materials shall be manufactured by Sherwin-Williams (basis of design),
PPG, or Benjamin Moore unless another manufacturer is specifically named.
B.Products: Manufacturer’s products listed hereinafter in the Painting Schedule represent types and grades
required. Comparable products of other manufacturers listed in preceding paragraph will also be
acceptable unless noted otherwise.
C.Grades: Materials not displaying the manufacturer’s identification as a best-grade product will not be
acceptable.
D.Caulk: Paintable acrylic-latex sealant with 12-1/2% elongation.
3.EXECUTION
3.01.INSPECTION
A.Applicator must examine the areas and conditions under which painting work is to be done and shall
notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B.Verify that shop applied primers are compatible with specified finish coats.
C.Do not apply coatings to surfaces where electronic moisture meter indicates values above 12%.
D.Do not proceed with painting work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Starting of
painting work will be construed as the Applicator’s acceptance of the surfaces and conditions within that
particular area.
E.Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed or crumbly surfaces, or conditions otherwise
detrimental to the formation of a smooth, durable paint film, until those surfaces have been prepared as
specified below.
F.All work where a coat of material has been applied must be inspected and approved by Owner’s
representative before application of succeeding specified coat, otherwise no credit for the coat applied will
be given and the work in question shall be recoated.
3.02.SURFACE PREPARATION
A.General:
OAA-2020-159 PAINTING 099000-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1.Just before painting is started, clean all surfaces to be painted until free of substances that could
impair bond of paints, including loose dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and
encapsulants. Remove incompatible primers or existing coats and reprime substrate with compatible
primer or apply tie in coat as required to produce paint system indicated.
2.Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not
to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
3.After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items
that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
B.Gypsum Board: Fill holes, nail holes, cracks, etc., after the first coat, with filler of a color to match that of
the finish. Filler shall be brought flush with the adjoining surface, free of ridges and depressions.
C.Steel: Where rust or scale is present, wire brush, or sand clean before painting. Clean steel to SSPC level
recommended by paint manufacturer. Shop coats of paint that are marred shall be cleaned and touched up
with compatible primer.
D.Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Thoroughly clean galvanized steel to remove grease, oil residue, dirt, flux
and other foreign matter by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote
adhesion of subsequently applied paints. Comply with requirements of manufacturer of paint system to be
applied to finish surfaces unless more stringent requirements are specified herein.
E.Cedar:
1.Remove pencil marks and other blemishes that will show through finish.
2.Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3.Finish edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of cedar boards prior to installation.
4.Prior to stain application, perform water test per manufacturer’s recommendation in inconspicuous
location. Do not apply stain until cedar absorbs water as necessary to indicate its ability to absorb
stain.
F.Concrete: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions. Touch up suction spots or “hot spots” after application of first coat, before applying second
coat.
G.Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content
or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
Touch up suction spots or “hot spots” after application of first coat, before applying second coat.
H.Wood Substrates for Opaque Finish:
1.Scrape and clean knots. Remove pencil marks and other blemishes that will show through coatings.
Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer
for exterior use in paint system indicated.
2.Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3.Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood prior to installation.
4.After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler.
Sand smooth when dried.
I.Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation from bare aluminum. Remove loose, peeling or
otherwise defective paint that will not provide a sound base for new coatings. Profile surface of existing
painted surfaces as required to ensure adhesion of new coatings.
J.Wood Substrates for Transparent Finish:
1.Remove pencil marks and other blemishes that will show through coatings. Seal pitch leaks with a
sealer recommended by stain manufacturer and then fill nail holes with tinted filler after sealer has
been applied.
099000-4 PAINTING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
K.Powder Coated Surfaces to be Painted: Provide surface profile on all powder coated surfaces to be painted
according to SSPC SP-2 to promote paint adhesion.
L.Mildew and Mold: Remove with solution of detergent and tri-sodium phosphate or solution of detergent
and bleach; and then rinse clean.
M.Caulking Touch-Up: After application of primer, fill-in with paintable caulk any dents, cracks and voids
that appear, and make smooth.
1.Fill cracks between dissimilar materials such as between hollow metal doorframes and walls.
2.Seal top surfaces of exterior steel doors and wipe away excess sealant.
3.03.APPLICATION
A.General:
1.Paint all exposed surfaces except where specified or noted as a surface not to be painted.
2.Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar
materials or areas, unless directed otherwise.
3.Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation,
paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
4.Apply material only to dry, properly prepared surfaces.
5.Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
6.Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate, establishing a
total dry film thickness for each coat as recommended by coating manufacturer.
7.All materials shall be applied under adequate illumination, evenly spread and smoothly flowed on
without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or
other surface imperfections. Give special attention to ensure that all surfaces including edges,
corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that on flat
surfaces.
8.Each coat shall be thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coat. Doubling-back to establish
additional coats shall not be allowed.
9.Tint undercoats to a shade slightly lighter than that of the succeeding coat. Provide sufficient
difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
B.Steel Doors:
1.Before finishing exterior hollow metal doors, apply sealant to seams in tops of doors and wipe off
excess.
2.Finish tops, bottoms and edges of doors, same as faces of doors.
3.Paint bottom channel of exterior hollow metal doors before they are hung.
C.Concrete Block Masonry: Do not apply block fillers until block installation has dried for at least 30 days.
D.Cedar Gate Boards: Apply finish to all surfaces of cedar gate boards prior to attachment to gate frame so
all surfaces are equally sealed against moisture. Touch up finish as necessary after installation of boards.
E.Concrete: Touch up suction spots or “hot spots” after application of first coat, before applying second
coat.
F.Downspouts Indicated to be Painted: Finish visible portions of interior of downspout to match exterior.
3.04.FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency
to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2.If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional
OAA-2020-159 PAINTING 099000-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.05.PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP
A.Provide “Wet Paint” signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.
B.At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
C.Upon completion of the work, remove all paint and varnish spots from the floors, glass and other surfaces.
D.Remove from the premises as the work progresses all rubbish and accumulated materials of whatever
nature caused by work of this Section.
3.06.PAINTING SCHEDULE
A.Paint all exposed interior surfaces except where the material is specifically noted below as a surface not to
be painted. Do not paint items such as, but not limited to:
1.Factory finished items, unless Owner indicates item is to be painted to match adjacent surfaces.
2.Finished Metal Surfaces: Bright or satin polished aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper,
bronze.
3.Operating Parts: Valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan
shafts.
4.Labels: Code-required labels such as Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM)
labels, as well as equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates.
B.Number of Coats Required: The number of coats listed in the following schedule is to be taken as a
minimum. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final coat
of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance.
C.Paint specification is based upon Sherwin-Williams (S-W) products. Comparable products of other
manufacturers, listed as approved, may be used unless noted otherwise.
D.Exterior Surfaces:
1.Bonderized Hollow Metal Doors & Frames and Powder Coat Primed Handrails:
1 coat – S-W DTM Bonding Primer, B66A50.
2 coats - S-W Hydrogloss Single Component, B65 Series.
2.Galvanized Metal:
2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series.
3.Aluminum Downspouts:
1 coat - S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series.
2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series.
4.Ferrous Metal (including gas piping painted safety yellow per code):
1 coat – S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series.
2 coats -S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series.
5.Concrete block:
1 coat – S-W Loxon Block Surfacer, A24W200, minimum 8 mils DFT/coat applied for pinhole free
finish.
2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series.
6.Cedar Gate Boards:
099000-6 PAINTING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2 coats - S-W WoodScapes Polyurethane Stain, A15T5 Series.
7.Concrete Light Base:
1 coat – S-W Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer / Sealer, A24W8300.
2 coats -S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series.
E.Interior Surfaces: See Drawings
1.Gypsum Board Walls:
1 coat -S-W Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer.
2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel, K45 Series.
Note: In climate zones 1 through 4 the vapor permeance of this paint system shall not be less than
1.0.
2.Ceilings & Bulkheads:
1 coat -S-W Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer.
2 coats -S-W Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-shel, B30-2600 Series.
Note: In climate zones 1 through 4 the vapor permeance of this paint system shall not be less than
1.0.
3.Wood Trim & Millwork:
2 coats -S-W Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish Gloss, A68 Series.
1 coat -S-W Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish Satin, A68 Series.
4.Ferrous Metal:
Shop prime coat, field touch-up.
2 coats - S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series.
5.Bonderized Hollow Metal Doors & Frames:
1 coat – S-W DTM Bonding Primer, B66A50.
2 coats - S-W Hydrogloss Single Component, B65 Series.
END 099000.
OAA-2020-159 STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS 102111-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
SECTION 102111 –STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS
1. GENERAL
1.01.RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Section, apply to this Section.
1.02.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Floor supported overhead braced metal partitions configured as toilet enclosures.
2. Hardware and accessories specified herein and as necessary for complete installation.
3. Installation of toilet accessories specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
4. Installation of toilet accessories furnished by Owner.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Attachment blocking and framing ..................................................................Section 061000.
2. Ceramic tile floors and walls..........................................................................Section 093013.
C. Related Work Supplied by Owner: Toilet accessories as indicated on Drawings.
1.03.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of fixtures, drains, walls, columns, ceilings, and other
construction contiguous with toilet partitions by field measurements before preparation of Shop
Drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the work. However, do not delay
job progress; rather, allow for trimming and fitting wherever the taking of field measurements before
fabrication might delay the work.
B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities,
ICC A117.1 and Accessibility Code of state in which the project resides, for compartments designated
as accessible.
1.04.SUBMITTALS
A. Process all submittals as required in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments. Include catalog cuts of hardware, anchors,
fastenings and other components.
C. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.
2. Show locations of anchorages, hardware and reinforcements for attachment of toilet accessories.
3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.
4. Show overhead bracing locations.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment.
E. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.
1.05.PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
102111-2 STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
A. Deliver panels to site in manufacturer’s original packaging. Remove any wet wrappings and inspect
for damage. Protect from damage, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions.
B. Store only in dry, enclosed building, off of floor and away from construction operations.
1.06. COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Do not begin installation until:
1. Wall finishes are completed and have cured.
B. Floor finishes are completed, cured and are approved for traffic
1.07.WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of toilet compartments that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Breaking of any component.
b. Corrosion of any component.
c. Separation or delamination of finish from substrate.
d. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 48-inch section.
2. Warranty Period: Fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.TYPES AND MANUFACTURER
A. Partition Type: Except as otherwise indicated, stainless steel, floor supported overhead braced type.
B. Approved Manufacturer: Subject to requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.
2.02.MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221.
C. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584.
D. Brass Extrusions: ASTM B 455.
E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
F. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743.
G. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings, chrome plated.
2.03.FABRICATION
A. Partitions: 1” thick fabricated from two sheets of minimum 22 ga. stretcher-leveled quality type 304
stainless steel bonded under pressure with non-toxic adhesive to sound deadening double faced
honeycomb core edges shall be bound and interlocked and welded at regular intervals around entire
perimeter. Grind welds smooth. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections.
B. Doors: Constructed the same as partition panels. Provide cutouts and reinforcements for hinges,
hardware and accessories.
OAA-2020-159 STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS 102111-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
C. Pilasters: Sandwich type construction, 1-1/4" thick, constructed of stretcher-leveled quality, minimum
22 ga. stainless steel bonded to sound deadening double faced honeycomb core. Formed edges shall
be interlocked under tension with concealed snap locks and welded at regular intervals around entire
perimeter. Grind welds smooth. Reinforcings in the edge of the pilasters shall be concealed and
provide secure anchorage for edge-mounted butt hinges on nylon bearings.
1. Pilaster anchorages shall consist of two 3/8" diameter zinc-plated leveling bolts, lock washers
and expansion shields for anchorage to concrete floors. Adjustments shall be made by means of
jackscrew fastenings through a heavy gauge galvanized steel saddle integral with the pilaster.
2. Pilasters adjacent to walls and less than 2-1/2" wide shall be designed so that doors will be even
with bottom of pilasters, without protruding hardware.
3. Anchoring device shall be concealed by a minimum 3" high, one-piece slip-on type #304
polished stainless steel shoe plinth without exposed fasteners.
D. Overhead Brace: Extruded aluminum or roll formed stainless steel, with anti-grip profile,
satin/anodized finish. Overhead brace shall be securely fastened to the top of pilasters. Provide
overhead brace in one piece per direction. Mounting brackets shall be metal with similar finish.
E. Hardware: Stainless steel or chrome-plated non-ferrous castings, including:
1. Hinges: Gravity type hinges adjustable for door open/close position, with nylon bearings and
stainless steel pintle. Furnish 2 per stall door.
2. Latch for All Stalls: Manufacturer’s standard ADA type, (with door pull for outswing doors)
and rubber bumpered strike and keeper. Latch assembly shall allow for emergency access.
Include wall bumper guard for doors adjacent to walls. Furnish 1 set per stall.
3. Panel Brackets: “Double-T” type made from chrome-plated cast heavy Zamac (No. 3) or
specular/bright finished aluminum. At the intersection of the blades and the base there shall be
a fillet or bridge reinforcement not less than 3/8" thick. Furnish 3 single-height brackets or 2
double-height brackets per panel intersection. Include similar “F” and “U” shapes where
indicated on the Drawings and where directed by Architect.
F. Accessories: Coat Hook Bumper: Integral coat hook, hat/purse hook and bumper, chrome plated
finish. Furnish 1 coat hook per stall door.
G. Fasteners: Chrome-plated or stainless steel vandal-resistant screws and sex bolts, finish to match item
fastened. Torx drive without center pin not acceptable.
1. Anchors into walls shall be capable of developing FULL strength of brackets without pulling
out from wall.
2. No plastic expansion anchors allowed, except U.S. Anchor’s “Mungo Plugs” allowed in masonry
and concrete.
2.04.FINISH
A. Shop Finish: All stainless steel material shall receive #4 satin finish. Provide manufacturer’s standard
film or other device for protection of finish during shipping and installation.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.INSPECTION
A. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which items are to be installed, including
locations of anchorages/blocking and plumbing fixtures. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Start of work will constitute acceptance of conditions.
3.02.INSTALLATION
102111-4 STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
A. Install partitions secure, plumb, level and square; in accordance with approved shop drawings and in
accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. No evidence of drilling, cutting or
patching shall be evident in the finished work.
B. All doors and partitions shall be mounted at 12 inches above the finish floor unless otherwise noted.
C. Anchor pilasters to the floor, drilling through finish flooring and at least 1-3/4 inches into rough
concrete slab for setting bolts. Grout-in the setting bolts before pilasters are placed. Conceal anchor
bolts and screw jack with shoe plinth.
D. Anchor panels, overhead bracing and pilasters together for a rigid installation, with approximately 1/2"
between panels and not more than 3/4" between panels and walls.
1. Fix panels into place at each intersection with 3 single-height or 2 double-height brackets.
2. Anchor into walls so as to develop FULL strength of brackets without pulling out from wall. At
stud walls anchor only into solid wood blocking.
E. Set doors with uniform clearance full height of strike pilaster, not to exceed 3/16" when latched.
3.03.ADJUSTMENT, PROTECTION AND CLEANUP
A. Protect units after erection so that there will be no indication of use or damage at the time of acceptance.
Replace damaged work as directed.
B. Just prior to final inspection adjust partition assembly and door hardware so that doors swing freely
and remain partially opened at a uniform distance when not latched, while maintaining 3/16" maximum
clearance full height of door at strike pilaster.
C. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings and accessories, including any marks made on
walls and partitions to establish alignment.
D. Repair, to the satisfaction of the Architect, minor scratches and other finish imperfections, using
materials and methods recommended by the partition manufacturer. If finish cannot be repaired to
satisfaction of Architect, replace damaged components.
E. Damage to floor and wall finishes shall be repaired or touched up by the installer of the finish to the
satisfaction of the Architect. Touching up and repairing of finishes shall be done without additional
charge to the Owner.
END 102111
OAA-2020-159 FIRE EXTINGUISHER SPECIALTIES 104400-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
SECTION 104400 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER SPECIALTIES
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Fire extinguisher cabinets, fire extinguishers and mounting brackets.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Gypsum board openings and framing......................................................Section 092116.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:
1. Fire extinguishers shall comply with and be located in accordance with the Americans with
Disabilities Architectural (ADA) Guidelines and the Accessibility Code of the state in which
the Project resides.
2. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B. Certifications: Fire extinguishers shall be delivered with certification denoting that they have been
inspected for serviceability by a certified fire equipment inspector within the previous 30 days.
C. Coordination: Coordinate size of fire extinguisher cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire
extinguisher indicated are accommodated.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions
for each type of unit specified. Indicate rough opening sizes, anchorages, hardware and accessory
items.
C. Samples: Submit samples of lettering for cabinet front and signage. Indicate text, letter style, size,
color and location.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Acceptable Models & Manufacturers:
1. FEC-1:
a. Architectural Series Model No. 2409-6R (Non-Rated) by Larsen’s Manufacturing.
b. Ambassador Model No. 1017 (Non-Rated) by J. L. Industries.
B. Cabinet Construction:
1. Cabinet Box: Cold rolled steel with baked enamel finish (white color) inside and outside.
Inside dimensions approximately 9-1/2"W x 24"H x 6"D.
2. Hinges: Recessed or continuous.
3. Door: Steel panel with full-height, vertical, duo type frame with clear tempered float glass,
baked enamel finish, white color.
104400-2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER SPECIALTIES OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
4. Door Handle: Applied type, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s options, including
factory finish.
a. Provide recessed pull where required to comply with Americans with Disabilities
Architectural (ADA) Guidelines.
5. Door Frame: Rolled edge trim design, of steel, factory baked enamel, white color.
6. Identification: Cabinet shall bear the words “FIRE EXTINGUISHER” written vertically, with
upright letters stacked on top of each other, on metal part of door panel in manufacturer’s
standard typeface selected by Architect. Words shall be in red letters.
C. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel bracket, designed to secure fire extinguisher to
wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated
finish.
1. Identification: With lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location, provide signage identifying bracket-mounted fire extinguishers
with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals, applied to mounting surface.
Architect to determine orientation of lettering.
2.02.FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Types:
1. For FE-1: (mounted on bracket in non-cooking areas and in fire extinguisher cabinet in dining
area)
a. 10 lbs capacity, multi-purpose dry chemical type for A/B/C Class fires, U.L. listed,
fully pressurized, with sight gauge, factory charged:
1) Larsen’s Manufacturing: MP10 Series, UL4A-80B:C.
2) J. L. Industries: Cosmic 10E, UL4A-80B:C.
2. For FE-2 (mounted on bracket in cooking areas):
a. Wet chemical, 6 liter capacity, type for K Class fire, U.L. listed, fully pressurized, with
sight gauge, factory charged.
1) Larsen’s Manufacturing: WC-6L (K Class).
2) J. L. Industries: Saturn 15, Class K, UL Rating K.
b. Placard: Include rigid, permanent sign for mounting next to type FE-2 fire extinguisher
stating that extinguisher shall not be used until fire suppression system has been
activated. Comply with requirements of NFPA 10.
B. Serviceability Inspection: Within 30 days prior to delivery to site, each fire extinguisher shall have
been inspected for serviceability by a certified fire equipment inspector and shall bear the inspector’s
current tag or equivalent mark upon delivery.
C. Quantities: Furnish 1 fire extinguisher for each fire extinguisher cabinet.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.INSTALLATION
A. General: Install units in accordance with details on Drawings and recommendation of manufacturer.
B. Mounting Heights: Locate top of cabinet as shown on Drawings or as otherwise required by
accessibility code standards listed above.
END 104400.
OAA-2020-159 PLUMBING 220000-1
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
SECTION 220000 - PLUMBING
1. GENERAL
A. Scope of Work
1. The true intent of the project is to provide for the construction, execution, and
completion in every detail of a complete work or improvement which the contractor
undertakes to do in full compliance with the plans, specifications, special provisions
in accordance with recognized engineering principles. The contractor shall perform
all items of work covered and stipulated herewith in accordance with the lines,
grades, typical sections, and dimensions given and shall furnish all material,
implements, machinery, equipment, tools, supplies, transportation, electric power
and labor necessary to the prosecution and completion of the work.
2. The contractor shall at all times keep the site of the work, including all private or
public property involved in or adjacent to the work free from any rubbish, surplus or
waste materials that have been deposited by his employees or which have
accumulated as a result of the work.
3. It is the responsibility of the contractor to acquaint himself with the location of
all underground structures which may be encountered or which may be affected
by the work.
4. All fees and charges assessed by water and sewer utilities shall be paid by the General
Contractor.
5. It is the intent of the Engineer/Architect to indicate on the plans the existing sewers,
water and gas mains, electric and telephone cables and other subsurface structures to
the extent that records of these substructures are available. However, if any plans are
different in location or elevation from those shown on the plans, the
Engineer/Architect shall not be liable for any extra expense involved due to such
omissions or changed location except where actual interference of subsurface
structures with the location of
the proposed sewers necessitates a change in the sewer plans which will entail
extra expense. This extra expense will not be paid for unless the contractor has
received an extra work order for doing the work.
6. Provide an as-built drawing showing location (with dimensions) and depth of all
underground and concealed pipe. As-built drawing shall be kept at job site office
until project is complete. At such time it shall be given to the Owner.
B. Any and/or all of the following documents that are applicable are to be considered to be
part of the specifications for this contract.
1. Applicable plumbing code.
2. Authority having jurisdiction’s requirements.
2. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
A. Interior Services
1. General
a. Keep pipe clean and free of backfill and other construction materials. Cap or
220000-2 PLUMBING OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
seal ends of all lines until construction is complete.
b. Water lines shall be pressure tested and approved by the
Engineer/Architect and/or local inspector prior to backfilling. Provide
written record of time and result of test.
c. Pipe sleeves shall be set for all pipes passing through new masonry or
concrete walls or floors.
d. Coordinate the location of sleeves, openings, chases, furred spaces, etc., with
the other contractors. Provide all sleeves, hangers, and inserts that are to be
built into the structure during the progress of construction.
e. Pipe sleeves shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe and shall extend
completely through the construction.
f. Sleeves for pipe 4" and smaller shall be at least 2 pipe sizes larger than the
pipe passing through. Sleeves for pipe larger than 4" shall be at least 1 pipe
size larger than pipe passing through. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be 1"
larger in diameter than the insulated pipe.
g. Sleeves shall extend 3/8" above the finish floor. In mechanical rooms and
other areas where water may accumulate, sleeves shall extend 2" above the
finish floor.
h. Grout openings through concrete or masonry, including space between
sleeves and walls or floors, with Dow 8640 or 8641 sealant.
i. Pack annular space between sleeves and insulation or pipe or ductwork
with fiberglass.
j. Provide offset and transition fittings as required.
2. Openings in Fire-Rated Construction: Penetration of required fire-resistive rated
floor, wall, ceiling and roof assemblies by plumbing components shall be in
accordance with one of the following:
a. A device or system tested and listed by an approved testing laboratory.
b. Assemblies detailed in Gypsum Association Manual GA-600.
c. An approved method of calculation in lieu of approved test.
3. Water Piping
a. Copper tube above ground: Type "L", hard temper, ASTM B42 and B88.
Wrought copper sweat fittings and non-corrosive, lead-free, tin antimony
solder.
b. Copper tube underground: Type "K" soft ASTM B42 and B88 with
silver soldered.
c. Valves - NIBCO bronze ball, or equal.
d. Connect all water lines to each fixture and install all required piping as
shown on the drawings. Provide chrome finished metal escutcheon at pipe
penetrations.
e. Test water piping before connecting fixtures with hydrostatic pressure of
OAA-2020-159 PLUMBING 220000-3
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
100 psi without loss of pressure for at least 2 hours (interior). Comply with
local ordinances. Provide the Engineer/Architect with results of test.
f. Disinfection - Provide chlorine disinfection. Other approved disinfection
methods may be used with prior approval of the Engineer/Architect and local
authorities.
g. Water supply risers shall terminate with an air chamber where required.
Water supply pipes serving fixtures and equipment shall terminate with an
air chamber where required.
h. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections where joining dissimilar metals.
i. Underslab connections are prohibited.
j. Provide access panels where valves are not exposed.
k. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,
joints or connected equipment.
l. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves.
4. Hot Water Return Piping and Filtered Water
a. PEX (Engel) tubing, fittings and additional components as required. PEX
tubing uses a process called the Engel Method to change high density
polyethylene to cross-linked polyethylene (PEX). Engel Method PEX is
cross-linked during the manufacturing process using heat and high pressure.
The result is an extremely uniform product with high temperature, pressure
and chemical resistance.
b. PEX tubing is manufactured to ASTM F876/ASTM F877 as certified by Hauser
Laboratories and NSF International.
c. PEX tubing carries the following maximum pressure/ temperature ratings:
- 160 psi at 73.4oF.
- 100 psi at 180oF.
- 80 psi at 200oF.
d. Cold expansion brass fittings with PEX reinforced rings to be manufactured to
ASTM 1960 and have third party listing.
e. The PEX tubing system must meet all of the following requirements:
1) Approval for the installation of the PEX system must be obtained
from the proper administrative authority prior to installation.
2) The system must be installed by a plumber trained by the
manufacturer of the particular PEX system to be installed.
3) All components must be part of one specific PEX manufacturer’s
system, and must bear the identification mark of that
manufacturer. The PEX system must have IAPMO and NSF
approval and marking of IAPMO approval must be stamped on
tubing and fittings.
4) The installation must be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
installation guidelines.
220000-4 PLUMBING OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
5. Pipe Insulation
a. Preformed closed cell – AP Armaflex insulation, or equal.
1) For 1-1/4” and smaller cold water supply above floor slab, ½”
insulation thickness.
2) For 1-1/2” and larger cold water supply above floor slab, 1”
insulation thickness.
3) For 1-1/4” and smaller hot water and hot water return above and
below slab, 1” insulation thickness.
4) For 1-1/2” and larger hot water above and below slab, 1-1/2”
insulation thickness.
b. Water and drain pipes under lavatories shall be insulated as follows:
1) Open vanities shall be Truebro, Inc. "Handi Basin-Guard"
undersink enclosure or 1/2" oak plywood stained to match
cabinets.
2) Wall mounted lavatories shall be fully molded.
a) Truebro, Inc. "HandiLav-Guard" Insulation Kit, Model #102
or #103 (for offset traps) in white.
b) Brocar Products, "Trap Wrap" Kit #500R or #500HS (for
offset traps). c)
c) McGuire Products, "Pro Wrap" Kit #PW2000 or PW2000WC
(for offset traps) for supply and waste lines.
c. Roof Drain Bodies and Horizontal Rainwater Conductors – 1” thick mineral
fiber, foil and paper field-applied jacket, and vapor retarder.
d. Seal ends and joints of insulation with approved joint compound.
6. Soil, Waste and Vent Piping
a. PVC above ground: ASTM designations D1785, D2665 and F891.
b. PVC underground: ASTM designations D1785, D2665 and F891.
c. Connect all soil, waste and vent lines to each fixture and install all required
piping as shown on the drawings. Provide chrome finished metal escutcheon
at pipe penetrations.
d. Grade all soil and waste horizontal lines with a minimum of 1/8" per foot.
All vent pipe shall be sloped for complete drainage by gravity to soil or
waste pipes.
e. Water test drainage system with a minimum of 10' head for 2 hours without
loss of water.
f. All soil and vent pipes passing through roof shall be provided with sheet
lead weighing not less than 4 lbs. per square foot or other approved
frostproof vent terminals.
g. When running a sewer under a footing, disturb as little of the soil under the
footings as possible. Provide concrete fill under all footings where
excavations wider than 18" are required.
7. PVC Storm Piping: ASTM designations D1785, D2665, D3034 and F891.
8. PVC Soda Line Conduit:
OAA-2020-159 PLUMBING 220000-5
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
a. ASTM D1785, D2665, F891.
b. Pressure test to be watertight.
3. EXECUTION
A. Piping arrangements shown are to express general design intent. Alternate arrangements
will be considered provided they meet all applicable codes and contractor obtains approval
of proposed revisions.
B. Structural members whose strength is impaired by improper cutting, drilling or
excessive defects shall be replaced or reinforced in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer/Architect.
1. Studs may be notched 1/4 their depth to receive piping or conduit, or may be
drilled a maximum of 1 1/4" in 4" stud or 2" in 6" stud.
2. When plates are cut more than 1/2 their width for piping or ductwork, reinforce with
18 gauge steel straps.
3. No cutting or notching permitted in roof trusses.
END OF SECTION 220000
OAA-2020-159 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING 230000-1
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
SECTION 230000 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR
CONDITIONING
1. GENERAL
A. Submit 4 copies of shop drawings to the Engineer/Architect for approval.
B. Forced air heating drawings and details are diagrammatic and are intended to show the intent of
the specifications. The contractor shall make full allowance to cover such contingencies as
actual length and routing of ductwork, equipment locations, etc. He shall take all necessary
measurements and accept responsibility for their accuracy. Coordinate with the General
Contractor for exact location of walls, beams, shafts, etc. Do not scale drawings. Drawings and
specifications are intended to represent a complete job. Inclusion in either the specifications or
drawings or required by state and local regulations implies inclusion in the required work.
Prior to submitting his bid, bidder shall call attention of the Engineer/Architect to any material or
apparatus he believes to be inadequate or to any necessary items or work omitted. The
Engineer/Architect reserves the right to interpret his own drawings and specifications to insure
that the installation conforms to his intent. Failure of the contractor to acquaint himself with
existing conditions at the site shall in no way relieve the contractor of the responsibility for
making installation in conformance with drawings and specifications without additional cost
to the Owner.
C. Scope of Work
Provide complete heating and ventilating system where shown on the drawings as specified
herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily
limited to:
1. Rooftop heating and air conditioning units including direct-expansion cooling sections,
operating controls and safety controls, fans, motors, compressors, filters, refrigeration
piping, controls and related equipment.
2. Air distribution system including supply, return and fresh air ductwork with grilles,
diffusers, registers, louvers and related items.
3. Exhaust systems including fans, motors, backdraft dampers and operators, registers,
louvers, grilles, controls, grease guards and related items. Exhaust hoods over deep
fryers, griddle and dishwasher are furnished and installed by the HVAC contractor.
4. Temperature control systems including thermostats, time clocks, wiring and relays,
dampers and operators and related items.
5. Ductwork insulation including thermal and acoustical and related items.
6. Testing and balancing of air delivery systems.
D. Codes, Permits and Inspection Fees
1. All work and materials shall conform in every respect to the current rules and
requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, National and State Electrical
Codes, Local Codes and Ordinances, Local Utility Regulations and OSHA. Use only
thoroughly trained and experienced personnel familiar with equipment required and
manufacturer's current recommended methods of installation.
2. Give to the proper authorities all required notices relating to the project, obtain all
230000-2 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
official permits and licenses required, pay all fees incidental thereto, deliver upon
completion of the work and without cost to the Owner all required certificates
of inspection and approval.
E. Intent
1. Make the Engineer/Architect aware of any discrepancies between the drawings and/or
existing conditions. The Engineer/Architect reserves the right to eliminate
discrepancies through minor changes in work at no change in contract cost.
2. It is the intent of these specifications that the contractor shall provide all the necessary
material, apparatus and devices to complete the installation as specified herein, except
such parts as are specifically excepted. If any item is either shown on the drawings or
called for in these specifications, it shall be considered sufficient for inclusion of said
item in this contract.
3. Material and labor shall be first class and workmanlike and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer/Architect and shall be subject to his inspection test and approval at all times
from commencement until the acceptance of completed work.
4. Manufacturers shall be responsible for providing material listed by UL or other
approved agencies, and all governing codes and ordinances. All material must bear UL
and/or other approved labels where possible. Items specified by catalog number or
brand name and approval of shop drawings will not relieve the manufacturer of this
responsibility.
F. Manual
1. Upon completion of this portion of the work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver
to the Engineer/ Architect, 4 bound copies of an operation and maintenance manual
compiled in accordance with the provisions of Special Conditions, Article 19 of these
specifications.
Include with each manual:
a. Copy of the approved Record Documents for this portion of the work.
b. Copies of all warranties and guarantees.
2. MATERIALS
A. Roof Top Air Handling Units
1. Fully assembled and wired single zone gas heating and electric cooling of the size and
capacity shown on the drawings. Units shall be AGA certified and ARI rated. All units
shall be by the same manufacturer.
Accepted Manufacturers: Lennox Energence Series..
2. Compressor: Welded, fully hermetic compressor with vibration isolation.
Motor/compressor units shall be warranted for 5 years (non-pro-rated). Safety Controls:
Low pressure, motor overload, crankcase heaters, freezestat and lockout circuit for
restart.
3. Casing and Frame: Welded construction constructed of galvanized steel bonderized and
coated with baked enamel finish. Units shall be suitable for rooftop mounting,
weatherproof, insulated casing and curb.
4. Coils: Indoor coils are direct-expansion type, non-ferrous construction with aluminum
fins and copper tube. Outdoor coils are aluminum finish and aluminum tubes.
OAA-2020-159 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING 230000-3
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
5. Fans and Motors: Indoor supply fan shall be double inlet forward-curved centrifugal fan
with direct-drive or belt-drive motor. Outdoor fan shall be propeller type, direct-drive
motor for vertical discharge.
6. Heat Exchanger: Stainless steel construction, sectionalized design. Burners shall be
slotted-port type, stainless steel, natural draft venting. 10 year warranty on heat
exchanger.
7. Controls: Furnish AGA approved gas controls to meet state and local codes. All
operating and safety controls required are to be supplied by equipment manufacturer,
including programmable heat/cool thermostat for automatic changeover. Gas train to
include gas valve for main burner, redundant safety gas valve, intermittent spark
ignition system and high temperature. Limit switch.
8. Accessories:
a. Roof curb - field installed.
b. Integrated enthalpy economizer with hood – factory installed.
c. Throwaway filters during construction - field installed.
9. Smoke Detector: Provide factory installed in-duct smoke detector.
B. Thermostats: Single zone programmable commercial thermostats - 7 day programming with
multiple occupied/unoccupied periods per day and a 3 hour override, ventilation and fan
control, 2 stage heating and 2 stage cooling - Honeywell T7350 or equal.
C. Roof Mounted Exhaust Fan: Centrifugal, belt or direct driven as per schedule on drawings,
aluminum construction with centrifugal blower fan and spun inlet venture. Wheel shall be
statically and dynamically balanced. Drive assembly shall be mounted on vibration isolator.
Drive assembly and wheel shall be removable without dismantling unit. Unit shall be AMCA
certified.
D. Ceiling Exhaust Fans: Fans shall have centrifugal blower, inlet grille and gravity backdraft
damper. Fan shall be AMCA certified with a sound rating of 4.5 sones or less. Housing shall
be insulated with 1/2" acoustic insulation.
E. Roof Top Air Handling Units Control:
1. Occupied Cycle: Supply fan will run continuous with fresh air damper open to
minimum position. Gas burner shall be activated upon heat demand. Cooling demand
will activate first stage economizer control with second and third cooling stages
sequenced with economizer operation.
2. Unoccupied Cycle: Outside air damper will close. Fan will cycle with demand for
cooling or heating with burner control.
F. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers:
1. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be suitable and compatible with ceiling construction
in which they are installed. Review architectural schedules for compliance. Coordinate
locations with reflected ceiling plan.
G. Natural Gas Fuel System:
1. Gas piping - 2" and Smaller
a. ASTM A53, type E or S, standard weight (Schedule 40) black steel pipe with
ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 Class 150 black malleable iron threaded fittings.
230000-4 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
b. ASTM A234 grade WPB/ANSI B16.9 standard weight, seamless, carbon
steel weld fittings.
2. Unions and Flanges - 2" and Smaller
ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 malleable iron unions with brass seats. Use black malleable
iron on black steel piping and galvanized malleable iron on galvanized steel piping. Use
unions of pressure class equal to or higher than that specified for fittings of respective
piping service but not less than 250 PSI.
3. Gas Valves
a. Crane, Walworth, Jenkins, Nibco, Milwaukee or Southern Manufacturing
Company are acceptable manufacturers.
b. 1/2" to 4": Southern Manufacturing Company Fig. 425 gas valve, cast iron body,
screwed or flanged ends, bronze bearings, bronze plug and resilient seal ring for
drop tight shutoff to 175 PSIG working pressure.
4. Gas Pressure Regulators
a. Fisher or Kunkle are acceptable manufacturers.
b. Regulators shall reduce pressure as noted on the plans.
c. 3/4" to 1-1/4": Fisher HSR direct-operated, spring-loaded regulator.
d. 1-1/2" to 2": Fisher CS400 direct-operated, spring-loaded regulator..
5. Service
a. Contractor shall arrange for the local gas utility to install a new gas meter, sized to
deliver 2 psig natural gas (quantity shown on the drawings) at 1,000 BTU per
cubic foot heat content.
b. Contractor shall pay for all gas service and meter charges levied by the
utility company.
6. Leak Tests
a. Test piping to 100 lbs. pressure for 48 hours with no loss of pressure. Test
in accordance with gas utility. Provide the Engineer/Architect with copy of
test.
b. Gradually increase pressure to not more than 1/2 of test pressure; then increase
pressure in steps of approximately 1/10 of test pressure until required test pressure
is reached. Examine joints and connections with soap bubble solution or
equivalent method. Piping system shall show no evidence of leaking.
3. EXECUTION
A. Material on Site and Storage
The contractor shall be responsible for the proper care and storage of material and equipment
on site. Any material damaged by rust, corrosion, warping, breakage, finish damage, etc., shall
be replaced by the contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer/Architect.
B. Cooperation/Coordination
1. The contractor is required to coordinate and cooperate with other contractors by
OAA-2020-159 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING 230000-5
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
scheduling and installing his work as the construction progresses. Any deviation from
contract plans shall be approved by the Engineer/Architect before proceeding.
2. The contractor is expected to study the plans of other trades and to fit his work into the
work of others in a coordinated manner. He shall lay out his work and be responsible
for his own measurements. He shall check facilities provided by others which require
electrical connections and provide outlets suitably located for them. He shall take such
measurements as may be necessary to assure approved fitting and proper installation of
his work and all other work depending thereon.
3. The contractor shall cooperate with other contractors to avoid complications between
the installation of heating and ventilating equipment and equipment installed by others.
C. Basic Materials
1. Where certain items are specified by manufacturer or trade names, the contractor's bid
shall be based on the use of the named item. Where one make is described and others
listed, comparable models of the other named equipment may be used.
2. The contractor shall provide materials and equipment of the type for which there are
National Board of Fire Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listings or approved equal and
label services available.
3. All materials used for the heating and ventilating installation shall be new and unused
except as otherwise indicated, and shall be uniform in type and manufacture for the
entire installation.
4. All materials shall be suitable for the conditions and duties imposed upon them in
service and shall be the latest standard catalog products of reputable manufacturers.
D. Approval of Substitutions
1. It is the intent that the heating and ventilating contractor shall base his proposal upon
furnishing and installing materials as specified. In case the successful bidder wishes to
substitute on manufacturer and/or catalog number, such substitutions shall be reviewed
and discussed with the Engineer/Architect. NO substitutions will be considered unless
product substituted shall benefit the Owner in appearance, operation, efficiency and
cost. Further substitutions shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions.
E. Guarantee
1. This contractor acknowledges his acquaintance with these specifications and the
respective requirements. He guarantees that the heating and ventilating system has been
installed strictly in accordance with the heating and ventilating drawings and
specifications, using only the best of materials available, installed in a
substantial manner by experienced labor.
2. The contractor by acceptance of this contract guarantees all labor and materials provided
hereunder and shall at his expense repair, remodel, rebuild, replace and/or require and
further make good and acceptable all labor and materials within one year from date of
final acceptance.
F. Electrical Work
1. Electrical service to all major equipment will be provided by the electrical contractor.
These services will be installed complete with required line wiring, starters and
disconnect switches to all pumps, fans, compressors, etc. and to the main control
terminals, only of "package" wired equipment.
230000-6 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2. Low voltage control wiring within such package equipment, and all remote control,
sensing and/or interlock wiring including the control and sensing devices (P.E., E.P.,
float, flow pressure or thermo switches, valve and dampers operators, etc.) is the
responsibility of this contractor, except where specifically noted. Line voltage control
wiring by the electrical contractor.
3. All starters and disconnects shall be by the electrical contractor except
where specifically indicated otherwise. "Package Equipment".
4. All motors shall comply with NEMA, AIEE and ASA requirements. Coil capacitor
start.
G. Lubrication
1. Lubricate all mechanical equipment under this contract and adjust before it is placed in
operation. Keep equipment lubricated until building is accepted.
2. Do not operate equipment which includes filters without the filters in place.
H. Housekeeping and Cleanup
1. Keep premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by
employees or work, and at completion of work or more often as necessary, remove
rubbish from and about the building. At completion, remove tools, scaffolding and
surplus materials and leave his work "broom clean" or its equivalent, unless more
exactly specified.
2. Clean grilles, diffusers and equipment, removing stains, paint, dirt, dust and temporary
labels or protections.
3. At no time shall any rubbish be thrown from windows or other parts of the building.
See Supplementary General Conditions on use of fires on premises. In case of dispute,
Owner may remove rubbish or clean and charge cost to several contracts as
Engineer/Architect may determine just.
I. Testing and Adjusting
1. Test and adjust each piece of equipment and each system as required to assure proper
balance and operation.
a. Test and regulate ventilation and air conditioning systems to conform to the
air volumes shown on the approved design drawings +/- 10% in accordance
with the latest edition of the Associated Air Balance Council procedural
standards by an independent TAB contractor. Submit 3 copies of final report
for approval.
b. Make tests and adjustments in apparatus and ducts for securing the proper volume
and face distribution of air for each grilled and ceiling outlet. Upon completion,
permanently mark all equipment settings.
c. Where required, provide pulleys for fans at no additional cost to the Owner,
and set to drive the fans at the speed needed to give the indicated volume.
d. Eliminate noise and vibration and assure proper function of all controls,
maintenance of temperature, and operation in accordance with the
approved design.
END OF SECTION 230000
OAA-2020-159 DUCTWORK 233113-1
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
SECTION 233113 - DUCTWORK
1. GENERAL
A. It must be understood that the heating, ventilating and air conditioning drawings and details are
diagrammatic and are intended to show the intent of the specifications. The contractor shall
make full allowance in his proposal to cover such contingencies as actual length and routing,
proper equipment locations and connections, etc. He shall take all necessary measurements
and accept responsibility for their accuracy. Coordinate with the General Contractor for exact
location of walls, beams, shafts, etc. Do not scale drawings. Coordinate with equipment
suppliers for connections made to equipment furnished by others.
B. Make Engineer/Architect aware of any discrepancies between drawings and/or existing
conditions. The Engineer/Architect reserves the right to eliminate discrepancies through
minor changes in work at no change in contract cost.
2. MATERIALS
A. Sheet Metal: Furnish, install, fit and secure in place all supply, return, exhaust and vent air
ducts, risers, branches, etc., as shown and detailed on plans, built of galvanized iron as
hereinafter specified.
1. Sheet metal work shall be constructed according to practices recommended in the
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1st edition 1985" as published by SMACNA, and
hereinafter specified. All duct dimensions noted on the drawings are finished inside
dimensions. Sheet metal used shall not be lighter than the following:
Rectangular Galvanized Sheet Aluminum
Ducts Metal Gage Alloy
Up thru 12" 26 .020
13" - 30" 24 .025
31" - 54" 22 .032
55" - 84" 20 .040
Round Galvanized Sheet
Ducts Metal Gage
Up thru 13" 26
14" - 22" 24
2. Install ducts, risers, etc., as indicated on the drawings, making necessary changes in cross
section, offsets, etc., whether or not same is specifically indicated. If ducts cannot be run
as shown on the drawings, install ducts between required point, subject to the approval
of the Engineer/Architect without additional cost to the Owner.
3. At all outlets and inlets in rooms, flange ducts for attachment of grilles. Install grilles
according to manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Sheet metal work throughout shall be assembled and erected in such a manner that no
vibration will occur and no noise be transmitted by the moving air.
5. All duct turns shall have either an inside radius equal to the duct width or be a miter turn
with turning vanes.
6. All supply take-offs shall be bellmouth or conical type. Square/rectangular take-off
fittings shall have 45 degree leading edge for 4" maximum depth. No air turns allowed.
233113-2 DUCTWORK OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
7. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant gaskets and
tapes, except as noted.
B. Ductwork Pressure - Velocity Classification: Low Pressure, +2" W.G., 2500 FPM maximum,
Class "B" seal. All grease ducts shall have welded liquid tight seal.
C. All duct turns shall have either an inside radius equal to the duct width or a miter turn with
turning vanes. Vanes shall be double wall air foil type.
D. Round take-off fittings shall be bellmouth or conical. Rectangular or square take-off fittings
shall have a 45 degree lead edge with 4" minimum depth.
E. Volume Dampers: Furnish and install in branches of supply air and exhaust ducts.
Substantial volume dampers to be fitted with quadrant locking devices for adjusting the air
delivery. Damper blades shall not exceed 6" width.
F. Access Panels: Install access panels with latches and gaskets in ducts at automatic dampers,
coils, fire dampers, and other duct mounted equipment. Panels in insulated ducts must be
internally insulated.
G. Backdraft Dampers: Provide backdraft dampers at discharge grille of louvers unless motor
operated dampers are specified with these units. Entire perimeter of blade shall be lined with
neoprene or vinyl seals to prevent clatter. Damper blades shall be tight closing.
H. Flexible Duct:
1. Provide factory fabricated insulated low pressure flexible duct with zinc-coated spring
steel helix, 1" thick fiberglass insulation sheathed in a seamless vapor barrier (RFK)
jacket. Maximum length 8'.
2. Composite assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier, meeting Class 1
requirements of flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or
less as set forth in NFPA Bulletin 90-A, and bearing the UL label as an air duct.
3. Flexible ductwork shall meet ductwork pressure classification.
I. Insulation:
1. Materials:
Materials shall conform to NFPA bulletin 90-A as determined by U.L. method NFPA
225 - ASTM E84, complying with applicable codes with a flame spread rating of 25 or
less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less.
2. External Ductwork Insulation:
a. Concealed ductwork (horizontal): Wrap ductwork with flexible type fiberglass
insulation, operating temperature range 40 to 250 degrees F., K=0.25, 1-1/2
PCF density, vapor permeability less than 0.02 perms, installed R of 4.5. Johns
Manville Microlite EQ Type 100 duct wrap insulation.
b. Concealed ductwork (vertical): Rigid fiberglass duct liner, operating temperature
to 250 degrees F., installed R of 6.3. Johns Manville Permacote Linacoustic R-
300.
c. Application Schedule: Thickness
Exhaust air ducts 1-1/2"
Fresh air ducts 1-1/2"
OAA-2020-159 DUCTWORK 233113-3
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
Supply air ducts 1-1/2"
J. Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ductwork
1. Welded Steel
a. Duct to be constructed with 16 gauge welded black iron.
b. All external joints, seams and duct connections to the hood shall be welded liquid
tight conforming to NFPA 90.
c. Insulation: 3M "Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 615+".
K. Air Outlets and Inlets:
1. Furnish grilles, registers, diffusers and louvers in the sizes, type and capacity as shown
on the drawings by the selected manufacturer or approved equal.
2. Grilles, registers, diffusers shall be suitable and compatible with ceiling construction in
which they are installed. Check architectural schedules for ceiling construction.
Coordinate locations with ceiling system and lighting fixtures.
3. EXECUTION
A. Ducts shall be constructed, supported and installed in accordance with the latest standards of
SMACNA. Install all turning vanes, access doors, extractors, and accessories as indicated or
specified herein.
B. Provide all necessary personnel, equipment, and services and perform all tests necessary to
demonstrate the integrity of the completed installation to the approval of the Owner and
Engineer/Architect. The air and hydronic systems shall be tested, adjusted and balanced in
accordance with the latest edition of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) Procedural
Standards, NEBB or equivalent.
END OF SECTION 233113
OAA-2020-159 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 260000-1
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 260000 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
1. GENERAL
A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, transportation,
permits, certificates of inspection as required for the complete electrical installation
as specified hereinafter and as shown on the drawings.
B. Prior to submitting his bid, the contractor shall call the attention of the Engineer/Architect to
any materials or apparatus he believes inadequate and to any necessary items or work
omitted.
C. If an item is either shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications it shall
be considered sufficient for inclusion of said item in this contract.
2. CODES, PERMITS AND FEES
A. All work and materials are to conform in every detail to the rules and requirements of the
National Board of Fire Underwriter's, National Electrical Code, OSHA, state and local
codes and the local utilities. The contractor shall obtain all permits needed in connection
with the work and pay all fees incident thereto including necessary costs to bring
distribution to site.
3. DRAWINGS
A. It must be understood that the electrical drawings and details are diagrammatic and are
intended to show the intent of the specifications. The contractor shall make full allowance
in his proposal to cover such contingencies as actual length and routing of conduit run,
proper equipment locations and connections, etc. He shall take all necessary measurements
and accept responsibility for their accuracy. Coordinate with the General Contractor for
exact location of walls, beams, shafts, etc. Do not scale drawings. Coordinate with
equipment suppliers for connections made to equipment furnished by others.
B. Make Engineer/Architect aware of any discrepancies between drawings and/or
existing conditions. The Engineer/Architect reserves the right to eliminate
discrepancies through minor changes in work at no change in contract cost.
C. Upon completion of the job, the Electrical Contractor shall turn over to the Owner a
complete set of tracings or a drawing showing size, description and location of electrical
materials as actually installed.
4. INTENT
A. This contractor shall furnish and install all the necessary materials, apparatus and devices,
to complete the electrical equipment herein as specified, except such parts as are
specifically excepted.
B. It is the intent of these specifications and the drawings accompanying same to cause
this equipment to be furnished complete in every respect.
C. If an item is either shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications, it shall
be considered sufficient for inclusion of said item in this contract.
D. Material and labor shall be first class and workmanlike and to the satisfaction of the
260000-2 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
Engineer/Architect, and shall be subject to his inspection, test and approval at all times
from the commencement until the acceptance of the completed work.
E. Where certain items are specified by manufacturer or trade names, the contractor's bid shall
be based on the use of the named item. Where one make is described and others listed,
comparable models of the other named equipment may be used.
5. COOPERATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS
A. The contractor shall lay out his work and shall be responsible for its correctness. He is to
take such measurements from existing work as may be necessary to insure the fitting of his
work and all other work depending thereon. Check equipment provided by others which
required electrical connections and provide outlets suitably located for them. Electrical
contractor shall be responsible for all circuitry required for all equipment. Items not
specifically mentioned in Equipment Connections, shall be the responsibility of the
designated subcontractor. Cooperation between the various contractors to accomplish this
must exist at
all times.
6. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. It is the intent that the Electrical Contractor shall base his proposal upon furnishing and
installing materials as specified. In case the successful bidder wishes to substitute on
manufacturer and/or catalog number, such substitutions shall be reviewed and discussed
with the Engineer/Architect. NO substitutions will be considered unless product substituted
shall benefit the Owner in appearance, operation, efficiency and cost. Further substitutions
shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions and Special Conditions.
7. CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All work and materials shall be in accordance with the following: National Electrical Code,
state and local governing codes, state and local fire codes, regulations of the electric utility
serving the project, and OSHA regulations, current edition.
The following standards apply as minimum requirements: U.L. standards, NFPA
requirements and NEMA standards..
8. INSPECTIONS
Electrical Contractor shall arrange for all required periodic regulatory
inspections.
9. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. Lighting
1. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to
achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watts/sq. ft.
2. Provide and maintain .5 watt/sq. ft. lighting to exterior staging and storage areas
after dark for security purposes.
3. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with
lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.
4. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
5. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.
B. Power
OAA-2020-159 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 260000-3
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1. Provide temporary electrical service with distribution equipment within 10 feet of
the back of the building within two weeks of start of project.
2. Power service characteristics: 240 volt, 200 ampere, single phase.
3. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and
distribution boxes located as required.
4. Provide feeder switch at source distribution equipment.
5. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.
10. SERVICE, UTILITIES
A. Coordinate the extensions of electrical, telephone and TV cable services to have
services available for orderly progress of work. Pay all permanent connection
charges.
B. Contractor shall include all charges for service installations in his bid.
C. Verify service entrance locations with power, cable and telephone companies. Verify
number and size of conduit required for conductors prior to bid.
11. SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Provide four (4) copies of all submittals.
B. Submittals must include all details, noted in the Contract Documents plus ampacity, rated
voltage, cycles, phase, number of poles, maximum fault current and wiring diagrams.
C. All submittal sheets must be marked to indicate the exact equipment and connections
required. General submittal sheets, drawings and wiring diagrams not properly marked will
be rejected.
D. For all equipment requiring installation or connection by another contractor, furnish one (1)
additional set of shop drawings for each contractor making connections to the equipment
involved.
E. The following submittals will be required:
1. Service equipment:
a. Meter centers
b. C/T cabinet if required
c. Panel boards
d. Associated equipment as required
2. Lighting fixtures and standards
3. Emergency lighting
4. Specialty items
12. CONCLUSION
A. The contractor shall furnish the Owner with two complete sets of operating and
maintenance instructions for all items furnished under this contract. Provide in bound sets
with complete index tabs. Information must include parts list, equipment warranties and
wiring diagrams.
B. The contractor shall provide the Owner with a set of drawings showing the route and depth
of the underground services. Conduit routing and pull boxes shall be indicated.
260000-4 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
13. GUARANTEE
A. This contractor acknowledges his acquaintances with these specifications and the
respective requirements. He guarantees that the electrical system has been installed
strictly in accordance with the electrical plans and specifications, using only the best of
materials available, installed in a substantial manner by experienced labor.
B. The contractor, by acceptance of this contract guarantees all labor and materials provided
hereunder and shall at his expense repair, remodel, rebuild, replace and/or require and
further make good and acceptable all labor and materials, except lamps found defective
within one year from date of final acceptance.
END OF SECTION 260000
OAA-2020-159 GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS & SERVICE 260010-1
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 260010 - GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS AND
SERVICE
1. GENERAL
A. The preferred wholesaler for this project is Crescent Electric Supply Company - contact
Chris Crull at (608) 241-2882 (e-mail CULVERS@CESCO.COM). Culver’s Franchising
System has worked out package pricing for electrical equipment.
B. Section 260000 and all references therein form a part of this section.
C. Coordinate with local utility to provide service entrance.
D. By Utility:
1. Primary electric service - 800 amp 3 phase. Verify with utility.
2. Power transformer. Verify with utility.
3. Secondary service conductors, contractor to verify, include in bid if required.
4. Conductor termination fittings and secondary service conductor terminations in
customers service equipment, where applicable, contractor to verify, include in
bid if required.
E. By Electrical Contractor:
1. Provide conduit(s) and wiring from building electric service equipment underground
to the outside of the building where indicated on the drawings as per utility
requirements.
2. Trenching from transformer pad to building.
3. Secondary service ground at building.
4. Provide empty conduit(s) for secondary service conductors under walks, drives,
parking lots, etc. as required by the utility for lighting, signage.
F. Verify service entrance locations with utility. Verify number and size of conduits required
for secondary service conductors.
2. MATERIALS
A. Service Equipment
1. Meter sockets, current transformer cabinets and service terminal boxes shall
meet requirements of the power company.
2. Circuit breaker disconnects shall be Square D.
B. Balancing Loads
1. When connecting single phase circuits to a three phase system, distribute the
loads among phases to achieve a balanced load on all three phases of the
system.
GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS & SERVICE 260010-2 OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
C. Power and Lighting Panels
1. All panel boards shall be Square D, shall have doors, and shall be securely
mounted at the locations indicated on the drawings. All other panels shall have
stenciled identifying code letters/numbers on the outside of the panel doors and in
accordance with the drawings.
2. Circuit breakers shall be common-trip for multi-pole bolt-on.
3. Provide circuit-directory card, typed or neatly black-ink lettered, in each panel
board and under clear plastic shield. Identify all circuits.
D. Wiring Devices
1. All conductors shall be copper, except in sizes #3 AWG and larger, equal
ampacity aluminum conductors may be used.
2. Minimum wire size shall be #12 AWG, unless otherwise noted.
3. Wire #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid with THWN insulation.
4. Wire #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded with THWN insulation.
5. All wiring above the floor will be installed in thin-walled metal conduit.
6. Fixture drops to be metal clad flexible conduit with green ground conductor -
maximum length 6'-0".
7. All wiring installed underground or in the floor slab shall be installed in rigid
heavy wall galvanized steel conduit or rigid heavy wall PVC.
8. All wiring installed exposed to the elements shall be in rigid heavy wall galvanized
steel conduit.
9. Install all emergency lights, exit lights and fire alarm wiring in conduit or raceways.
#10 wire minimum wire size for exit and emergency light circuits.
10. Single conductors installed in conduit may be used throughout.
11. Low voltage wiring to be supported at 5'-0" o.c. maximum.
3. EXECUTION
A. Install service and service equipment as shown on the drawings and riser diagrams.
B. Main service equipment located on the inner face of walls shall be mounted on 3/4"
weatherproof plywood painted with one coat primer and one coat grey enamel before
installation of equipment.
C. Provide system ground for new service as required by Code.
1. Ground all equipment, including switches, transformers, conduit systems, motors and
all other apparatus by conduit to cold water main and to independent electrode using
Burndy or T & B ground clamps. Use additional ground rods if water service is
not metallic or if isolation couplings have been used.
2. Locate ground rods in planters or similar areas which will receive water regularly.
Drive to a depth of at least 8 feet.
3. Perform ground tests to assure not more than 5 ohms resistance. Add rods as required.
4. Provide ground conductor to all motor and equipment connections. Conduit grounding
OAA-2020-159 GENERAL MATERIALS, METHODS & SERVICE 260010-3
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
alone is not acceptable.
D. Transformers, meters, and primary electric service to property limits by local utility company.
Contractor shall coordinate work with power company. Pay any charges to power company
required for installation of service including costs necessary to bring service to property.
E. Connections at all switches and receptacles shall be by screw terminal connections - not thru
"plug-in" type connections provided on the rear of the devices.
END OF SECTION 260010
OAA-2020-159 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION 265000-1
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 265000 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND
INSTALLATION
1. GENERAL
A. Sections 260000 and 260010 and all references therein form a part of this section.
B. There shall be furnished:
1. A complete conduit and wire system for power and lighting including underground
electric service, metering facilities, panelboards, feeder system for power and lighting
as indicated on the drawings and specified in Division 26.
2. Branch circuit wiring, in conduit, for lighting, receptacles, junction boxes and motors.
3. Wiring and connections for equipment.
4. A complete installation of fixtures and lamps, including interior lighting, exit
lighting, exterior lighting and building lighting.
5. Emergency lighting as shown on the drawings.
6. Telephone service conduit and terminal back boards.
7. Intercom and voice/data conduit system.
8. Television wiring and conduit system and terminal back board.
9. Remote visible and audible signal to be tied to in-duct smoke detector.
(in-duct smoke detector provided with mechanical unit).
10. Wiring system in conduit for equipment and controls, motors and controls provided
by plumbing and HVAC contractors which require motor starters and line voltage
controls.
11. All other items necessary to complete all systems.
C. Equipment Connections
Provide all branch wiring, disconnections, trenching, conduit, etc. as required for
all equipment associated with the building, including but not limited to:
1. All food preparation, handling, serving and sanitizing equipment. Provide cord
for shake machine.
2. Custard machine and associated compressors.
3. All intercom and voice/data equipment.
4. All refrigeration equipment.
5. All HVAC equipment including exhaust fans, kitchen fan controls, motorized intake
dampers, economizer controls, in-duct smoke detector and associated equipment.
6. All motors and starters.
7. All plumbing equipment including water heater controls, circulating pump, water
softener, automatic water control valves.
8. Exterior lighting including building, remote directional signs, pole lighting, accent
lighting, utility building lighting, main sign, marquee signs, patio bollards.
9. Time clock controls.
10. Emergency lighting.
265000-2 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
11. Laundry units.
12. Telephone system.
13. Refrigerant alarm.
14. Fire suppression system.
15. Television distribution system.
16. Cash registers and associated equipment.
17. Menu board.
18. Speaker post.
19. Photo cell.
20. Ice machine.
21. Smoke detector and remote alarm.
22. Line voltage control wiring.
23. Sprinkler alarm.
24. Panic alarm.
D. Conduit only: Provide trenching, conduit, etc. as required for all equipment associated
with the building including but not limited to:
1. Future reader board on main sign.
2. Order verification board.
3. Sensor loop.
4. 200' for cable TV - coordinate location with General Contractor.
5. Future electric ceiling heaters and associated controls.
2. MATERIALS
A. Telephone
1. Provide complete wiring system in conduit as required by telephone company
with outlets as shown on the drawings. All wiring shall be in conduit.
2. Telephone jacks shall be flush, single gang boxes with ivory plastic cover
plates to match electrical cover plates.
a. Wall mount telephone jack for hanging telephone: Hubbell #NS722I.
b. Single gang, two modular jack with wall plate: Hubbell #NS722I.
3. Provide an empty conduit to mechanical room as required by the telephone
company, for underground service entrance cables. Coordinate requirements with
telephone company.
4. Telephone cable to be CAT-5.
B. Television (Cable TV)
1. Provide a complete television wiring distribution system including outlet boxes
and cover plates for all outlet boxes.
2. Single gang "F" type with one coaxial connector - Hubbell #NS750I.
C. Receptacles
1. Single
a. Dryer: Hubbell #HBL9350, 30 amp., 125/250 volt, flush receptacle with
#NP724I wall plate or equal.
b. Kitchen Equipment: Hubbell #GFBFST20I dead front GFI with
#RRD201I, 20 amp. 125 volt heavy-duty spec. grade single receptacle.
OAA-2020-159 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION 265000-3
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2. Duplex
a. Interior: Hubbell #5362I, 20 amp., 125 volt hard use duplex outlet.
b. Interior: Hubbell #GFR5362WTR , 20 amp. 125 volt ground fault circuit
interrupter receptacle.
c. Exterior Roof: Hubbell #GFR5362WTR, 20 amp., 125 volt, ground fault
circuit interrupter receptacle with intermatic WP1000 recessed in-use
cover.
d. Exterior Wall: Hubbell #GFR5362WTR, 20 amp., 125 volt ground fault
circuit interrupter receptacle with intermatic WP1010 die-cast in-use
cover.
3. Equipment: Verify receptacle requirements with kitchen equipment supplier.
D. Switches
1. Single pole: Hubbell #CSB120I, 20 amp., 120 volt, AC switch.
2. Single pole-keyed: Hubbell #HBL1221LI, 20 amp., 120 volt, AC switch.
3. Three way: Hubbell #CSB320I, 20 amp., 120 volt, AC switch.
4. Four way: Hubbell #CSB420I, 20 amp., 120 volt, AC switch.
E. Device Cover Plates
1. Interior Kitchen: Aluminum or stainless steel.
2. Interior Dining: Ivory.
F. Lighting Fixtures
1. The type of fixture to be provided for each outlet is indicated by a letter symbol on
the working drawings - these various types are called for in the Lighting Fixtures
Schedule.
2. All fluorescent lighting to be equipped with electronic ballasts and energy saving
lamps.
3. All incidental materials, fittings, hangers to make the lighting fixture
installation complete, shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical
Contractor.
G. Lighting Controls
1. Provide photo cell control on all exterior non-switched fixtures.
2. Provide time clock controls for exterior lighting.
3. EXECUTION
A. All trenching where required shall be a minimum of 24" below final site grades.
B. Conduit Installation
1. Conduit shall be run concealed in walls of the building. Bend conduit to
conform to rock in underground excavated areas, conceal where possible.
Buried PVC conduit shall be imbedded in sand as required to protect against
damage due to rocks.
265000-4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION OAA-2020-159
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2. Conduits shall be securely fastened to structure using straps or hangers at intervals
not greater than 8' and at closer intervals in areas exposed to public contact.
Generally, conduit straps shall be one-hole malleable. Perforated iron hangers or
wire will not be approved.
3. Conduit to exterior lights shall be concealed and holes through exterior walls
carefully caulked and sealed.
4. Conduit fittings shall be tightly applied to maintain rigidity and good electrical bonding.
C. Boxes
1. All electrical boxes shall be standard galvanized or plastic where use permits of a size
adequate for the number of wires and splices. Boxes shall be securely mounted, set
true and flush with finished surfaces. Race, Appleton and Steel City considered
equal.
D. Cutting, Patching and Sleeves
1. Cutting and channeling shall be held to a minimum. Provisions for openings, holes
and clearance through walls, floors, ceilings and partitions shall be made in advance
of construction of such parts of the building. Sleeves may be either plastic or sheet
metal.
2. After conduits are installed in sleeves, openings shall be neatly closed and sealed.
3. Slabs and walls damaged by installation of the electrical work shall be repaired to
the satisfaction of the Engineer/ Architect by the Electrical Contractor.
E. Painting
1. Wood panels and metal frame works required by this electrical work shall be painted by this contractor.
Paint before installation of equipment.
2.
Fixture hangers and supports, panel trims and flush junction box covers in place prior to normal routine
painting will be painted by others, if not in place at this time, this contractor shall be responsible for
painting.
3.
This contractor shall be responsible for refinishing factory finishes damaged by rust and/or
corrosion or damaged by scratching during storage or installation of same.
F. Wire and Cable Installation
1.
No wire or cable shall be installed in any conduit until building is enclosed, watertight and dry.
Conduits having water and/or debris in them shall be swabbed out before conductors are installed.
2.
Properly install conductors in conduit in such fashion that insulation is not damaged or conductors are
overstressed.
3.
Splice conductors #10 and smaller with Code approved connectors such as Scotchlok. Use cast-type
connectors with set screw for #8 and larger connections. Tape with Scotch #88 plastic type or equal.
4. Identify phases of all panel feeders with colored tape or colored conductors at panel
lugs.
G. Fixtures and Lamps
OAA-2020-159 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & INSTALLATION 265000-5
Culver's Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1. Light fixtures as shown on the drawings and shall be installed complete with
lamps, starters and all other equipment necessary for operation.
2. All fixture wiring shall be concealed unless fixture design prevents concealment; all
fixtures must be firmly supported from ceiling suspension of structural system, not
from ceiling material.
3. All fixtures and lamps shall be in perfect condition when job is turned over to
the Owner, and shall function properly to the satisfaction of the Owner and
the Engineer/Architect before approval is given.
4. Lamps in fluorescent fixtures shall be energy saving cool white, G.E., Westinghouse
or Sylvania are considered equal. All fluorescent lamps shall be guaranteed by the
Electrical Contractor for one year.
5. All other lamps shall be 120 volt. Incandescent lamps shall be G.E. inside-
frosted unless otherwise specified on the drawings.
H. Light Standards
Provide trenching, conduit and wiring and install exterior lights and light standards as
shown on the drawings in accordance with Code requirements. Provide all required
concrete foundation work and anchor bolts in strict accordance with manufacturer's
specifications.
I. Site Signage
Provide trenching, conduit and wiring for site signage. Signs, bases and installation by others.
J. Tests and Demonstrations
1. Before placing electrical system in operation, test all wiring and
connections for continuity and grounds.
2. Demonstrate proper performance of all connected electrical equipment and systems.
END OF SECTION 265000
OAA-2020-159 EARTHWORK 312000-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
SECTION 312000 - EARTHWORK
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Site clearing.
2. Stripping and stockpiling of topsoil.
3. Excavation for footings and foundations.
4. Excavation of trenches for underground utilities within the building.
5. Dewatering of excavations.
6. Rough grading for new slabs on grade.
7. Removal of unsatisfactory material below rough grade and subgrade levels as required.
8. Provision of granular materials from offsite for structural fill as required.
9. Classifying and stockpiling usable excavated material, on site, for re-use.
10. Preparation of subgrades to receive fills.
11. Filling, backfilling and compaction of fills.
12. Finish grading of disturbed site areas.
13. Removal and disposal of excess excavated materials.
B. Soils Engineer:
1. Soils Engineer shall be on site to evaluate soil conditions and bearing capacity. Soils Engineer
shall verify existing or remediated soils achieve adequate conditions required for design
indicated on Drawings.
2. The contents of this section are intended as general guidelines meant to supplement the
recommendations and specific instructions of on-site Soils Engineer. These guidelines (in
whole or in part) may conflict with those recommendations or specific instructions, if so,
review with Soils Engineer to determine appropriate course of action.
C. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Soil borings..............................................................................................Section 023213.
2. Foundation perimeter insulation..............................................................Section 072100.
3. Dewatering...............................................................................................Section 312319.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Federal Regulations: Earthwork shall conform to:
1. OSHA 29CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P, “Excavations” and its appendices. Any requirements
specified below which may appear to conflict with OSHA requirements are to be interpreted as
supplements and are not intended to supersede OSHA.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. Contractor shall employ and pay for a licensed Engineer or Surveyor, registered in the state in
which the Project resides, to establish all lines and levels required for execution of the Work.
2. The Engineer/Surveyor shall send a certified statement to Owner after work is completed
stating that the constructed lines and levels meet all requirements of the Drawings and
Specifications.
C. Soil Testing and Inspection Service:
1. The Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform testing for in-place foundation
soils and other soil materials proposed for use in the Work.
312000-2 EARTHWORK OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2. Costs for the first testing of an area shall be paid for by the Owner. All testing required for
checking and correcting faulty work or work to be re-done shall be paid for by the Contractor
at his own expense.
3. Services shall include:
a. Observation of proofrolling (if any).
b. Sieve analysis of material to be used for compacted fill beneath footings/building slabs-
on-grade and for fill beneath concrete slabs in exterior areas.
c. Tests for maximum dry density of compacted fill materials.
d. In-place field dry density tests, a minimum of one for every 2,500 square feet or
fraction thereof, of area of each layer of compacted subgrade fill under building slabs,
other than drainage fill, as directed by Owner’s Representative.
e. In-place field dry density tests, minimum of one per every 50 lineal feet or fraction
thereof, per ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 6938, for each layer of compacted fill under all
footings, as directed by Owner’s Representative.
f. If compaction is found to be unsatisfactory, extra in-place field dry density tests to
determine the extent of recompaction work required.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
B. Submit to the Soil Testing Service 50 pound representative samples of each proposed fill material at
least 2 days prior to the start of any filling operation.
C. The Soil Testing Service shall submit 2 copies of all test reports to Owner’s Representative and
Owner.
D. The Surveyor/Engineer shall submit to the Owner's Representative 2 copies of his certification that
all work has been constructed as indicated and specified.
1.04.JOB CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions: The excavation contractor shall visit the site prior to submitting his bid in order
to determine the existing conditions under which he will be obliged to operate and the extent of the
site preparation work required.
B. Existing Utilities:
1. Locate existing underground utilities in the areas of work before starting earthwork operations.
If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork
operations.
2. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during
excavation, consult the Owner’s Representative immediately as to how to proceed.
3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied or used by the Owner or others,
except when permitted in writing by the Owner's Representative and then only after acceptable
temporary utility services have been arranged.
4. Demolish and completely remove from the site underground utilities indicated to be removed.
Coordinate with local utility companies for shut-off and capping or sealing of services if lines
are active. Capped lines shall be so identified at grade.
C. Explosives: The use of explosives will not be permitted.
1.05.PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
A. Barricade open excavations made as a part of earthwork operations and post with warning lights.
Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required.
OAA-2020-159 EARTHWORK 312000-3
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B. Protect benchmarks and existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving and curbs against damage from
vehicular or foot traffic.
C. Protect the bottoms of excavations and soils around and beneath foundations from frost.
1.06.BRACING, SHEETING AND SHORING
A. Provide bracing, sheeting and shoring for the sides of excavations as necessary to prevent movement
or settlement of adjacent structures, utilities, roads and streets, etc. The cost of bracing, sheeting and
shoring required shall be deemed to have been included as part of the Contract Sum.
B. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the strength and adequacy of all such bracing,
sheeting and shoring, and is liable for any damage or injury caused by or resulting from improperly
supported soils and structures. He shall, if required, submit fully detailed Shop Drawings for review
prior to placement; however, such review shall not diminish the Contractor’s responsibilities in any
way.
C. The Contractor shall issue any notices to owner of adjoining property that may be required by any
pertinent laws or ordinances. Furnish copies of such notices to Owner's Representative.
D. If the safety of any adjacent structures, utilities, etc., shall appear to be endangered, take all proper
means to support such embankments, structures, utilities, etc., and notify the Owner. Do not resume
operation without the Owner’s permission.
E. Provide and place bracing and shoring ordered by the Owner when necessary to safeguard adjacent
buildings, etc. If the Contractor fails to comply promptly when so ordered, the required bracing and
shoring may be placed by order of the Owner at the Contractor’s expense. Any such action shall not
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the bracing and shoring or liability for damage.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.SOIL MATERIALS
A. Fill Materials: Shall be obtained from excavations on the site, provided the material meets the
requirements of the Soils Engineer and is approved by the testing lab. Fill material from offsite shall
be obtained from borrow pits approved by the testing lab and meeting the requirements of the Soils
Engineer.
B. Fill Supporting Footings: Well graded granular material, sand or gravel, tested by the testing
laboratory. Not more than 10% shall pass #200 sieve; except that fill placed during wet weather or
in wet areas shall have no more than 5% passing #200 sieve. Cohesive soils from excavations on the
site may be used provided they can be compacted to 95% of maximum density as determined by
ASTM D 1557.
C. Fill under Interior Floor Slabs, UP TO Drainage Course: Granular material of friable earth, or clay
of low plasticity, tested by the testing laboratory.
D. Drainage Fill Directly under Interior Floor Slabs: Natural hard, clean sand; or naturally or
artificially graded mixture of crushed gravel or crushed stone acceptable to the Owner's
Representative and the testing service.
E. Fill Under Concrete Platforms: Granular fill, the same as used for footings.
F. Other (Ordinary) Backfill and Fill: Reasonably uniform soil materials free of organic or frozen
material, debris, trash, and of stones 4" or greater in diameter. Soils from excavations on site may be
used provided they can be compacted to the densities specified.
2.02.ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Lean Concrete for Use as Structural Fill: Concrete having minimum 28-day strength as
recommended by the Geotechnical Report/Soils Engineer or if not recommended, provide minimum
28-day strength of 300-400 psi.
312000-4 EARTHWORK OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B. Filter for Runoff Water at Catch Basins & Manholes: Silt filter meeting DOT requirements of State
in which the project resides.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.SITE CLEARING
A. General:
1. Except as otherwise indicated, remove trees, shrubs, grass, weeds and other vegetation,
improvements, or obstructions that directly interfere with installation of new construction.
Remove tree stumps and remove roots projecting above surface of finish grade.
2. Carefully and cleanly cut roots and branches of trees indicated to be left standing, where such
roots and branches obstruct facilities to be constructed. Do not remove branches and roots for
the convenience of construction operations except as approved by Owner for each tree. After
cutting branches and roots, immediately apply an approved wound dressing.
B. Topsoil Removal: Strip topsoil from areas to be excavated for construction. Remove heavy growths
of grass from areas before stripping.
1. Remove topsoil down to subsoils.
2. Where trees are indicated to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping a sufficient distance from
such trees to prevent damage to the main root system.
3. Topsoil which has been removed without intermingling with other soils and is reasonably free
of clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2" in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and
other objectionable material, shall be stockpiled for completion of the work. Topsoil not
meeting these criteria may only be used for landscape work and shall be stockpiled separately
or removed from the site.
4. Construct stockpiles so as to drain precipitation freely. Cover storage piles as required to
prevent wind-blown dust and erosion.
3.02.WATER CONTROL
A. Grade around excavated areas so as to prevent water from running into trenches, areas for slabs-on-
grade and excavations; and grade so as to prevent water from running onto adjacent properties or
public thoroughfares.
B. Keep excavations dry with pumps, piping and temporary drains until backfilling is completed.
C. When the earthwork may produce disturbances requiring compliance with a National Pollutant
Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Storm Water Permit, the Excavation Contractor shall
develop a storm water pollution control plan with the cooperation of the Owner (the permittee),
using good engineering practices.
1. The plan, when so required, shall identify potential sources of pollution that may be reasonably
expected to affect the quality of storm water discharge.
2. The plan shall describe practices to reduce pollutants.
3. The plan shall provide means to ensure that the anti-pollution practices will be implemented
and the terms of the permit met.
4. The General Contractor and subcontractors involved in earthwork shall certify that they
understand and will comply with all requirements of the permit.
5. A copy of the permit and the certifications shall be kept on-site for inspection upon request.
D. Do not discharge drainage water lines into municipal sewers without municipal approval.
E. Ensure that water discharge does not contain silt.
OAA-2020-159 EARTHWORK 312000-5
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
3.03.EXCAVATION
A. General: Excavate for all work to elevations and dimensions indicated, plus sufficient space to
permit erection and installation of forms for footings and foundation walls.
1. Notify testing lab and Owner of all unexpected sub-surface conditions. Discontinue work in
area until Owner provides notification to resume work.
B. All subgrades for footing and building slabs shall be in compliance with the recommendations of the
Soils Engineer and be approved by the soils testing service. Give soils testing service adequate
notice as to when excavations are scheduled to reach subgrade elevations shown on Drawings.
C. Authorized Additional Excavation: If an unacceptable subgrade material is encountered at the
subgrade elevation shown on the Drawings, the Owner may direct the Contractor to excavate to a
greater depth by way of Change Order.
D. Unauthorized Excavations: If an acceptable subgrade is encountered at the subgrade elevation
shown on the Drawings and excavation goes to a greater depth, no additional payment shall be made
by the Owner for such excavation nor for backfilling to repair the over excavation.
E. Rock Excavation:
1. Definition: Excavation of boulders or pieces of rock, concrete, or masonry measuring more
than 1/2 cubic yard; or hard shale or solid ledge rock and masonry requiring continuous use of
pneumatic tools or drilling to be removed.
2. Contractor must demonstrate inability to remove by hand pick or by power excavator used for
other excavation. Prior to removal, obtain written approval from Owner or Owner's
Representative that material to be removed qualifies for extra payment.
F. Protect footing and building slab excavations from freezing until excavations are completely
backfilled.
3.04.EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHING
A. General: Excavate for underground utility lines within building. Excavate trenches to indicated
gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
B. Trench Dimensions:
1. Cut trenches wide enough to enable proper installation of services, and to allow for inspection.
2. When sheeting and bracing are used, increase trench width accordingly.
3. Do not exceed a trench bottom width of 30 inches at or below top of pipe and inside sheeting
and bracing.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to
allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe.
1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing
material to allow for bedding course.
2. Ensure that trenching does not interfere with normal 45° bearing slope of foundation for any
structures.
D. Unsuitable Bearing Soil:
1. Where unsuitable soil conditions are encountered, requiring removal below specified depth,
replace material with fill approved by Soils Engineer.
E. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:
1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine
spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not
use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
312000-6 EARTHWORK OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation
of utilities.
F. Comply with recommendations of Soils Engineer for installation and protection of utility lines below
foundation structures.
3.05.UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Bedding (if required): Conform to Municipality Standard Specifications, requirements of
Geotechnical Investigation Report and the Soils Engineer’s recommendations.
1. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits.
B. Backfilling:
1. Inspection: Do not start backfilling until utility lines are inspected and, if requested by Owner
or otherwise required, pressure tested. Ensure that trenches are free of building debris, snow,
ice, and water and that ground surfaces are not frozen.
2. Backfilling: Backfill systematically and early as possible to allow maximum time for natural
settlement.
3. Initial Backfill: Place and compact backfill of sand or gravel, as approved by Soils Testing
Agency, free of organic materials and free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a
height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit, installed in lifts not to exceed 8 inches.
a. Carefully compact backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides
and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of
piping or conduit.
4. Final Backfill:
a. Under Topsoil: Above initial backfill, place and compact final backfill of granular
material, as approved by Soils Testing Agency, up to grade required for topsoil,
installed in lifts not to exceed 8 inches.
b. Under Concrete Slabs: Above initial backfill, place and compact finial backfill of
granular material. as approved by Soils Testing Agency, up to grade required for
drainage course under concrete slabs, installed in lifts not to exceed 8 inches.
3.06.FILLING AND COMPACTION
A. General:
1. Remove all debris from excavations before backfilling.
2. No fill to be compacted shall be placed in free water, or on frozen ground.
3. Manipulate and wet the fill materials as required to obtain uniform moisture content
throughout. Fills shall be placed at +2% of the material’s optimum moisture content.
4. Prior to placement of fills under footings, slabs and pavings, the upper 12" of subgrade shall be
brought to within 2% of optimum moisture and compacted to not less than 90% per Modified
Proctor Method.
5. All subgrades shall be approved by the soils testing service just prior to placement of fills.
Should subgrade become frozen, desiccated, saturated or disturbed, remove the affected
material, or scarify, moisture condition and recompact the affected materials. Notify soils
testing service well ahead of when excavations are scheduled to reach the subgrade elevations
required.
6. Proofroll after placement of fill to verify compliance.
B. Placing Fill to be Compacted:
OAA-2020-159 EARTHWORK 312000-7
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
1. Placement: Place fill material in layers not exceeding 8" in thickness, starting in the deepest
area and progressing approximately parallel to the finished grade.
2. Testing Between Layers: Compaction of each layer shall be tested as specified. Obtain
approval from Soil Engineer before next layer of fill is placed.
3. Drainage Course under Interior Concrete Slabs on Grade: Install a layer of the specified
granular fill 6" thick, such that, after compaction, the top of the fill will be at the bottom
elevation of the slab as indicated by the Drawings, plus 0", minus 1/2".
4. Fill Under Exterior Platform Slabs: Extend granular fill down to bottom of platform
foundation.
C. Compaction Procedures:
1. Compact the soils immediately after placement, while they retain their optimum moisture
content; otherwise, manipulate and wet the soil as required to obtain the required moisture
content uniformly throughout.
2. Suspend compaction operations when proper results cannot be obtained because of rain or
soggy conditions, or when other conditions are, in the Soil Engineer’s opinion, unsatisfactory.
3. Compact with vibratory compaction and/or rolling equipment to the specified densities.
Compaction by travel of grading equipment will not be considered adequate. Use small
vibratory or hand tamping compactors whenever fill is placed adjacent to walls or around
footings and columns.
4. Each layer of fill shall be compacted all across its surface to the required density before
additional fill may be placed.
5. If compaction is found to be unsatisfactory, recompact until required density is achieved.
D. Minimum Compaction Densities:
1. Granular Fill under Footings, Building Slabs and Exterior Platforms: 95% of maximum
density, per Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D 1557).
2. Cohesive Soil Fills within Perimeter of Building Foundations: 95% of maximum laboratory
density, per Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D 1557).
3. Fills To Five (5) Feet outside of Building Perimeter: 95% of maximum density, per Modified
Proctor Test (ASTM D 1557).
E. Replacement of Over-Excavation:
1. Where over-excavation has been authorized, provide approved granular fill to replace the
materials excavated from below the designated design subgrade and compact the fill to the
required densities. Payment for such additional work will by Change Order.
2. When authorized over-excavation causes the width of the excavation to be increased, fill the
excavation to the extended width with the appropriate fill materials and compact the fill to the
required densities. Payment for the additional fill work required will be by Change Order.
3. Where over excavation has not been authorized, fill with granular fill compacted to the
required density at the required elevation without additional payment.
3.07.ROUGH GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade new filled areas, including adjacent transition areas, and as otherwise
indicated within the limits of construction. Include any areas disturbed by construction operations.
1. Smooth the finished surfaces within specified tolerances, with uniform levels of slopes
between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades.
2. The degree of finish required will be that ordinarily obtainable from either blade-grader or
scraper operations.
312000-8 EARTHWORK OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B. Walks: Shape the surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with the finish
surface not more than 0.00' above nor 0.10' below the required subgrade elevation, after compaction,
and graded to prevent ponding of water after rains.
C. Interior of Building: Rough grade the areas under slabs-on-grade to not less than 6" nor more than
6-1/2", plus the slab thickness, below finish floor line. Grade the surface so as to be free from
irregular surface changes.
3.08. MAINTENANCE
A. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent
construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape, and compact to the required
density prior to further construction.
B. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep free of
trash and debris.
1. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the specified tolerances.
2. Any settlement of areas shall be filled level and smoothed out, and shall be repaired so as to
maintain the required grade level for a period of one year.
3.09.DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove excavated material unsuitable for fill or backfill from Owner’s property before backfill
operations begin. After backfilling is completed, remove from Owner's property all excess fill
material.
B. Areas under stockpiles not indicated as receiving new construction shall be restored to original
condition.
C. All off-site hauling shall be in tight beds such as to prevent spilling onto streets or highways. Use
drip pans where necessary to prevent spilling. Off-site haul routes shall be approved by the
appropriate county and city authorities for disposal of wastes from this contract.
D. All excess material removed from site shall become the property of the Contractor. Legally dispose
of all materials removed from the site.
END 312000.
OAA-2020-159 DEWATERING 312319-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
SECTION 312319 – DEWATERING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A.The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and means to dewater the project site in the
event dewatering is necessary. Contractor shall pay for all permits required under this Specification.
1.02.PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering
system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground-water flow into excavations and permit
construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades.
1.Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed
slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is
prevented.
2.Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.
3.Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings adjacent to excavation.
4.Remove dewatering system if no longer needed.
1.03.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Contractors Organization
1.Contractor shall have a competent supervisor onsite during the process of the work who shall act
for the Contractor in all matters concerning the work. He shall have the authority to receive and
to act upon directions from the Owner.
1.04.PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.Project Site Information: A geotechnical investigations report has been prepared for this Project and is
available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of the Soils Engineer
and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by the Soils
Engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data.
1.The soils investigations report is referenced elsewhere in the Project Manual.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01.MATERIALS
A.In the event dewatering is necessary, Contractor will provide portable pump or other means of
dewatering the project site.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01.RESPONSIBILITIES
A.The dewatering of all areas where work must be performed is the responsibility of the Contractor and
no additional sum will be allowed for any other expense incurred due to the occurrence of ground
water, surface water or water from possible leakage of existing buildings, structures and piping in the
vicinity of the Contractor's operations.
312319-2 DEWATERING OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
B.Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
C.Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by water accumulation.
1.Reroute surface water away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in
excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump
equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal,
and surface-water controls.
B.Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of
structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to
drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other
excavations. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed
and fill materials have been placed, or until dewatering is no longer required.
1.Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade softening, and
slope instability.
C.Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property,
and portions of work under construction or completed. Further, dispose of water in a manner that
avoids inconvenience to other contractors.
D.Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain
dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering
requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged
structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner.
E.Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations.
END 312319
OAA-2020-159 TERMITE CONTROL 313116-1
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL
1. GENERAL
1.01.SUMMARY
A. Work Included In This Section Features:
1. Soil treatment for termites when required by code or ordinance.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Backfill materials.....................................................................................Section 312000.
1.02.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the Standards of the state in which the Project resides.
1.03.SUBMITTALS
A. Process all submittals per requirements in Section 013300 “Submittals.”
1. Product Data:
a. Submit toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, intended
application rate.
b. Include product agency label information.
2. Test Reports: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports.
3. Manufacturer’s Application Instructions: Indicate caution requirements and in accordance
with current product label of chosen pesticide.
4. Manufacturer’s Certification: Certify products meet or exceed current label specifications
regarding pest and treatment site.
5. Certify applications followed NPMA WDO for termite control or other regional location
guidance.
6. Closeout Submittals:
a. Project Record Documents:
1) Record moisture content of soil before application.
2) Date and rate of application.
3) Areas of application.
4) Diary of toxicity meter readings and corresponding soil coverage.
b. Operation & Maintenance Data: Indicate re-treatment schedule.
1.04.WARRANTY
A. Provide five (5) year warranty for:
1. Damage and repairs to building and building contents caused by termites.
2. Repair of damage.
3. Re-treatment where required.
B. Inspect and report annually, in writing, to Owner.
313116-2 TERMITE CONTROL OAA-2020-159
Culver’s Restaurant – Carmel, Indiana
2. PRODUCTS
2.01.MATERIALS
A. Furnish materials in accordance with the Standards of the State in which the Project resides.
B. Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved, synthetically cooler dyed to permit visual identification of
treated soil.
C. Diluent: As recommended by toxicant manufacturer.
2.02.MIXES
A. Mix toxicant to manufactuer’s instruction.
3. EXECUTION
3.01.EXAMINATION
A. Verify in writing that soils are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant and is ready to receive
treatment.
B. Verify final grading and excavation are complete.
C. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of soil conditions.
3.02.APPLICATION
A. Apply Work in accord with the Standards of the state in which the Project resides.
B. Coordinate soil treatment at foundation perimeter with finish grading and landscaping work to avoid
disturbance of treated soil.
3.03.SCHEDULES
A. Treat soil in following locations:
1. Under slabs-on-grade.
2. Both side of foundation surfaces.
3. Soil within 10 feet of building perimeter for a depth of 3 feet.
B. Use same pesticide specified for original treatment.
3.04.CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of work, remove all surplus materials, packaging, containers and rubbish resulting
from work and legally dispose of off site.
END 313116